Omron SYSMAC CXONE-AL**C-E Operation Manual

Cat. No. W445-E1-02
SYSMAC
CXONE-AL@@C-E
CX-Integrator Ver. 1.1
OPERATION MANUAL
CXONE-AL@@C-E
CX-Integrator Ver. 1.1
Operation Manual
Revised November 2005
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or
damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some
Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient
operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 2005
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form,
or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information
contained in this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS
1
Intended Audience.......................................................................................................... xvi
2
Safety Precautions.......................................................................................................... xvi
3
Application Precautions .................................................................................................xviii
4
Operating Environment Precautions................................................................................xx
5
Guide to Version Upgrade .............................................................................................. xxi
Section 1 Overview
1-1
The CX-Integrator ........................................................................................................ 1-2
1-2
Specifications............................................................................................................... 1-8
1-3
Installation.................................................................................................................. 1-14
1-4
PLC Connecting Cables ............................................................................................ 1-15
1-5
Window Descriptions ................................................................................................. 1-22
1-6
Menus ........................................................................................................................ 1-34
Section 2 Basic Operations
2-1
Basic Procedures......................................................................................................... 2-2
2-2
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC......................................................................... 2-10
2-3
Uploading Network Configurations and Checking for Communications Unit Errors . 2-21
2-4
Switching the Target PLC .......................................................................................... 2-27
2-5
Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline ........................................................ 2-29
2-6
Manipulating Component Parameters ....................................................................... 2-38
2-7
Uploading, Downloading, and Comparing Network Parameters ............................... 2-43
2-8
Comparing Network Configurations........................................................................... 2-44
2-9
File Operations .......................................................................................................... 2-45
2-10
Target PLC Online Operations .................................................................................. 2-49
2-11
Starting Specified Applications .................................................................................. 2-51
2-12
Printing....................................................................................................................... 2-52
Section 3 Routing Tables
3-1
Routing Table Overview .............................................................................................. 3-2
3-2
Setting the Routing Tables .......................................................................................... 3-9
3-3
Maintenance after Network Configuration ................................................................. 3-25
Section 4 Data Links for Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK
4-1
Overview...................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-2
User Interface Overview .............................................................................................. 4-4
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links ........................................................................................ 4-8
4-4
Automatically Set Data Links..................................................................................... 4-41
Section 5 Ethernet
5-1
Broadcast Node Search .............................................................................................. 5-2
5-2
Ping Test...................................................................................................................... 5-4
vii
Section 6 DeviceNet
6-1
DeviceNet Setting Procedures..................................................................................... 6-2
6-2
Setting Slave Parameters ............................................................................................ 6-4
6-3
Adding Slaves to the Master........................................................................................ 6-8
6-4
Setting Master Properties .......................................................................................... 6-13
6-5
Editing Master Parameters ........................................................................................ 6-15
6-6
Parameter Wizard ...................................................................................................... 6-16
6-7
Master Parameter Editing Details (Tab Descriptions) ............................................... 6-21
6-8
Manual I/O Allocations ............................................................................................... 6-29
6-9
Advanced Settings (Connection, Communication Cycle Time, Slave Function Settings,
Etc.)............................................................................................................................ 6-36
6-10
Creating and Editing I/O Comments .......................................................................... 6-43
6-11
Displaying Device Properties..................................................................................... 6-45
6-12
Downloading the Network Configuration/Device Parameters to Devices.................. 6-51
6-13
Uploading and Verifying Device Parameters ............................................................. 6-57
6-14
Monitoring Devices .................................................................................................... 6-62
6-15
Using General-purpose Tools to Set Devices ........................................................... 6-70
6-16
Optional Functions ..................................................................................................... 6-72
Section 7 CompoWay/F
7-1
CompoWay/F System Configuration ........................................................................... 7-2
7-2
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a PLC ................................................................. 7-3
7-3
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a Computer....................................................... 7-10
Section 8 NT Links
8-1
NT Link Connection Auto-detect Function ................................................................... 8-2
8-2
Transferring Screen Data through the PLC ................................................................. 8-6
Section 9 Network Testing
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool...................................................................... 9-2
9-2
Echoback Test between Nodes ................................................................................. 9-22
9-3
Ethernet Ping Test ..................................................................................................... 9-25
Appendices
A-1
CPS File Management.................................................................................................A-2
A-2
EDS File Management.................................................................................................A-4
Revision History
viii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of CX-Integrator and includes the sections
described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before
attempting to use the CX-Integrator. Be sure to read the precautions provided in the following section.
Precautions provides general precautions for using the CX-Integrator.
Section 1 outlines the functions of the CX-Integrator and describes the menus and connecting to
networks.
Section 2 describes the basic operations required to use the CX-Integrator.
Section 3 describes how to set routing tables.
Section 4 describes how to set data links for Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK Networks.
Section 5 describes the how to use the diagnostic tools for Controller Link Networks.
Section 6 describes settings and operations unique to DeviceNet Networks, including registering
slaves in the master, allocating I/O, monitoring devices, etc.
Section 7 describes settings and operations unique to CompoWay/F Networks.
Section 8 settings and operations unique to NT Links.
The Appendix describes CPS files for Ethernet, Controller Link, CompoWay/F, and NT Link
Networks and EDS files for DeviceNet Networks.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
ix
Manuals Related to the CX-Integrator
Cat No.
W445
(this manual)
Models
CXONE-AL@@C-E
Name
CX-Integrator Operation
Manual
W444
CXONE-AL@@C-E
CX-One Setup Manual
W446
WS02-CXPC1-E-V60
W447
WS02-CXPC1-E-V60
CS1G-CPU@@H
CS1H-CPU@@H
CJ1G- CPU@@H
CJ1H- CPU@@H
CJ1M- CPU@@
CP1H- X@@@@-@
CP1H- XA@@@@-@
CX-Programmer Ver. 6.1
Operation Manual
CX-Programmer Ver. 6.1
Operation Manual:
Function Blocks
Description
Describes CX-Integrator operating
methods, e.g., for setting up and
monitoring networks.
Describes installation and provides an
overview of the CX-One FA Integrated
Tool Package.
Describes CX-Programmer operations
except those related to function blocks.
Describes function blocks for
CS/CJ-series CPU Units unit version 3.0
or later and CP-series CPU Units, and
CX-Programmer operations related to
function blocks.
Refer to the W447 manual above for other
CX-Programmer operations.
Manuals Related to DeviceNet
Cat No.
W267
W380
W379
W381
x
Models
---
CS1W-DRM21(-V1)
CJ1W-DRM21
C200HW-DRM21-V1
CVM1-DRM21-V1
3G8F7-DRM21
Name
DeviceNet Operation
Manual
DeviceNet Unit Operation
Manual
DeviceNet Master Unit
Operation Manual
DeviceNet PCI Board
Operation Manual
Description
Describes network communications
settings and wiring common to all
DeviceNet networks.
Describes CX/CJ-series DeviceNet Units.
Describes C200H and CV/CVM1-series
DeviceNet Master Units.
Describes the DeviceNet PCI Board.
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on
which liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xi
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the
uses listed may be suitable for the products:
•Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
•Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
•Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND
INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xii
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and
does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xiii
xiv
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides precautions for using the CX-Integrator.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the CX-Integrator.
You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to use the
CX-Integrator.
1
2
3
4
5
Intended Audience..........................................................................................
Safety Precautions ..........................................................................................
Application Precautions..................................................................................
Operating Environment Precautions...............................................................
Guide to Version Upgrade..............................................................................
xvi
xvi
xviii
xx
xxi
1
1
Intended Audience
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities
2
Safety Precautions
!Caution When performing any of the following operations, always check the network
address and node address of the other node (PLC) and the node address
and unit number of the mounted Unit (PLC CPU Bus Unit or Special I/O Unit)
or the node address of the Component (DeviceNet Master/Slave or
CompoWay/F Slave), and be sure that these operations can be performed
safely for the current status of the node (Unit or Component):
• Transferring parameter or program data to the other node
• Changing the operating mode of the other node
Unexpected operation may result if parameter or program data is transferred
to the wrong node (DeviceNet Master/Slave or CompoWay/F Slave), the
operating mode of the wrong node is changed, or the other node is not in a
suitable status to receive the program or parameter data or the operating
mode change.
!Caution When changing the target PLC to any PLC other than the relay PLC, check
the node address and node number of the target PLC carefully before
executing the change. Unexpected operation and injury may result if the
wrong PLC is set as the target PLC.
• Changing the operating mode
• Transferring or verifying user-set data link tables
• Transferring or verifying routing tables
• Performing I/O table operations (including transferring CPU Bus Unit or
Special I/O Unit parameters)
Note
Operations performed from the CX-Integrator are performed for the target
PLC, which is not necessarily the same as the relay PLC.
!Caution When transferring parameters that have been created or edited on the
computer to actual Units (PLC CPU Bus Units or PLC Special I/O Units) or to
actual Components (DeviceNet Masters/Slaves or CompoWay/F Slaves),
always check the identifying number of the actual Units or Components (i.e.,
the unit numbers and unit addresses or node addresses) before executing
the transfer. Unexpected operation and injury may result if parameters are
transferred to the wrong Unit or Component.
!Caution When changing or removing a routing table (see note), be sure to update the
display for the Online Connection Information Window. The display for the
Online Connection Information Window could possibly be different from the
actual network status. If operations are executed without first updating the
display, particularly online operations in the Network Configuration Window, it
could cause data to be mistakenly read or written for the wrong network or
node address or unit number.
xvi
2
Note:
Safety Precautions
Changing or removing a routing table refers to using the
CX-Integrator (or a CX-Integrator for another personal computer) to
start the Routing Table Component and then changing or removing
a routing table for the target PLC (either a local network table or a
relay network table).
!Caution Do not execute a broadcast node search if a node exists for something other
than an OMRON Ethernet Unit or FinsGateway within the same segment on
Ethernet, and when the Ethernet network system is in operation. When a
broadcast node search is executed, an OMRON FINS command is sent to all
nodes in the segment. Therefore, if a node exists for something other than an
OMRON Ethernet Unit or FinsGateway, the FINS command will not be
received at that node and unexpected operation may occur.
xvii
3
3
Application Precautions
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the CX-Integrator.
General Communications Precautions
• Do not turn OFF the power to the PLC or disconnect the cable connecting
the PLC when the CX-Integrator is online with the PLC. Doing so may cause
the computer running CX-Integrator to malfunction.
• Before changing the operating mode, always confirm that doing so will not
adversely affect system operation.
• Always check the operation of parameters sufficiently before using them for
actual system operation.
• Confirm that resetting CPU Bus Units and Special I/O Units will not
adversely affect system operation before resetting these Units.
DeviceNet
• Enable the scan list to before operating the system.
• When adding a new node to the network, make sure that the baud rate is
the same as other nodes.
• Use specified communications cables.
• Do not extend connection distances beyond the ranges given in the
specifications.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the personal computer, Slaves, and
Communications Units before attempting any of the following.
• Attaching or detaching the DeviceNet Board or Card
• Assembling the Units
• Setting rotary switches
• Connecting or wiring the cables
• Connecting or disconnecting connectors
• Be sure that the communications cables and other items with locking
devices are properly locked into place.
• Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications cable.
• Separate the communications cables from the power lines or
high-tension lines.
• Do not bend the communications cables.
• Do not pull on the communications cables.
• Do not place heavy objects on top of the communications cables.
• Be sure to wire communications cable inside ducts.
• Use appropriate communications cables.
• Before touching the PCI Board, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic
object in order to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in
malfunction or damage.
• When transporting a Board or Card, use the special box in which it was
shipped to protect the LSIs and ICs from being damaged. Also do not
subject the Board or Card to excessive vibration or shock.
xviii
3
Application Precautions
• Because the devices are reset in order, communications errors will
temporarily occur in the master and slaves. For this reason, do not
download the network configuration while the master-side PLC (CPU Unit)
is operating.
• When downloading the network configuration, each of the devices is reset.
If the Master Unit is reset first, it may cause errors in writing parameters to
the subsequent slaves. For that reason, this method (downloading the
network configuration) should be used only when the Master Unit has been
given the highest address.
• Downloaded device parameters will be valid only after the devices are reset
unless they are the OMRON CVM1-DRM21-V1, C200HW-DRM21-V1,
CS1W-DRM21(-V1), or CJ1W-DRM21.
• When the devices are reset, communications errors will temporarily occur.
For this reason, do not reset the devices while the master-side PLC (CPU
Unit) is operating.
Data Links in Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK Networks
• The data link mode (manual setting or automatic setting) and data link
method are determined according to the data link setting in the startup node.
In the startup node, set a data link table for manual settings and data link
automatic setting parameters for automatic settings. If the settings are
incorrect, the data links will not start.
Check the following items before starting data links.
(1) Manually Set Data Links
Check the data link tables in each node participating in the data link to
see that they are correct.
Be sure that data link tables are deleted from nodes that are not
participating in the data links.
(2) Automatically Set Data Links
Be sure that the correct DM parameters have been set in the data link
startup node.
• If incorrect data link tables or parameters are set, injury may result due to
unexpected operation of the system. Even if the correct data link tables and
parameters have been set, do not start or stop data links before verifying
that there will be no adverse influence on the system.
Routing Tables
CPU Bus Units are reset when routing tables are transferred from a
Programming Device to a PLC to allow set routing tables to be read. Make
sure that resetting CPU Bus Units will not cause equipment damage or
dangerous system behavior before transferring tables.
xix
4
4
Operating Environment Precautions
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Perform installation properly, according to the procedures described in this
manual.
!Caution Do not install in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in
the specifications
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in
temperature
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals
• Locations subject to shock or vibration
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing in the
following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity
• Locations close to power supplies
xx
5
5
Guide to Version Upgrade
Guide to Version Upgrade
The following table shows the changes in the upgrade from CX-Integrator
Ver. 1.0 to Ver. 1.1.
Item
Previous (Ver. 1.0)
Ver. 1.1
CP1H supported as PLC model
No
Yes
No
Yes. When Automatic USB
Connection is selected from the
Network Menu, the PLC model
(such as the CP1H) is
automatically recognized and
connected online.
Ethernet network PING test
No
Yes
Echoback test between nodes
on Ethernet, Controller Link,
SYSMAC LINK, and DeviceNet
No
Yes. (Response time can be
measured.)
Controller Link network
diagnosis Repeater display
No
Branching information can
displayed by Repeater Units.
Start Special Application
No
It is possible to select an Inverter
on DeviceNet, and to start the
CX-Drive.
Support for NSJ Series
No
Yes
Automatic
online
connection
Automatic
USB
connection
be
xxi
Communications
Section 1 Overview
This section provides an overview of the CX-Integrator and describes CX-Integrator
menus and connections.
1
1-1
The CX-Integrator
1-1-1
Overview
1-1
The CX-Integrator
1-1-1
Overview
The CX-Integrator is a Programming Device software package that enables reading the
PLC's network and serial network configuration from a personal computer via an online
connection. This enables easily performing many operations, such as monitoring the
connection status of various networks, setting parameters, and diagnosing networks.
The CX-Integrator can be placed online manually or automatically with the CS/CJ-series
PLC to which it is directly connected to enable uploading and monitoring the network
configuration (including device parameters) for that PLC or other network PLCs for each
network.
Direction connection to serial communications using the CompoWay/F protocol is also
possible without going through a PLC. The CompoWay/F network configuration can be
uploaded or automatic connection is possible using the NT Link protocol for NS-series PTs
and CS/CJ-series PLCs.
Furthermore, parameters in slaves on the networks can be set, edited, uploaded, and
downloaded.
Whenever required, network configuration information can be saved in files. The
configuration information in previously saved files can be later compared to the actually
current configuration.
Uploading and displaying network and serial
communications configuration of the target PLC for
each network
CS/CJ-series PLC
Computer running CX-Integrator
Ethernet
Target PLC
CS/CJ-series PLC
Online connection
Serial
connection
(NT Link)
Access
Direct serial connection
(Toolbus or Host Link) or
network connection
Serial
communications/net
works that can be
accessed
Controller Link
DeviceNet
Uploaded to computer
General-purpose slaves,
such as I/O Terminals
CompoWay/F
Temperature
Controller
1-2
Smart Sensor
PLC
Temperature Controller
or other device
1-1
The CX-Integrator
1-1-1
Overview
The network/serial communications configuration of a PLC other than the one originally
connected to online to can be set as the target. The PLC that was originally connected to
online (called the relay PLC, see note 1), is relayed through to connect to another PLC
(called the target PLC, see note 2) to switch the online connection.
Note 1:
Note 2:
The relay PLC is the PLC to which an online connection was first made from the computer
through a network or serial connection.
The target PLC is the PLC from which the network configuration can be uploaded.
Uploading and displaying network and serial
communications configuration of the target PLC for each
network
CS/CJ-series PLC
A PLC other than the relay PLC
can be set as the target.
Computer running
CX-Integrator
Ethernet
Target PLC
Relay PLC
Online
connection
CS/CJ-series
PLC
CS/CJ-series PLC
Serial connection
(NT Link)
Access
Direct serial connection
(Toolbus or Host Link) or
Serial
communications/net
works that can be
accessed
Controller Link
network connection
DeviceNet
Uploaded to computer
General-purpose slaves,
such as I/O Terminals
CompoWay/F
Temperature
Controller
PLC
Temperature
Controller or
other device
Smart Sensor
Direction connection from the CX-Integrator to serial communications using the
CompoWay/F protocol is also possible using RS-232C or RS-485 communications without
going through a PLC. The CompoWay/F network configuration can also be uploaded.
Computer
CX-Integrator
running
Standard RS-232C cable (female-female)
K3SC RS-232C to RS-485 Interface
Converter
RS-485 cable connection
CompoWay/F protocol
Uploaded to computer
Temperature
Controller
Smart Sensor
Smart Sensor
1-3
1-1
The CX-Integrator
1-1-2
Functions According to Network
1-1-2
Functions According to Network
The functions for each network are listed in the following table.
Network
DeviceNet or CompoWay/F
Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK
Controller Link
Ethernet
NT Link
FINS networks, such as Ethernet, Controller
Link, SYSMAC LINK, and DeviceNet
1-1-3
Functions
A virtual network or virtual serial communications
configuration can be created offline and connected
device parameters can be set, uploaded,
downloaded, and compared.
User-set data link tables can be created offline
and then transferred online to CS/CJ-series PLCs.
Data link parameters can be set automatically
online and then transferred to CS/CJ-series PLCs.
A Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool can be
started to diagnose Controller Link networks.
Broadcast node searches and ping tests are
enabled (with CX-Integrator Ver. 1.1 or later).
Settings for an NS-series PT with a model number
ending in V1 or later serially connected to a
CS/CJ-series PLC via NT Link can be
automatically detected and set for the serial port of
the CS/CJ-series PLC. This is called NT Link Auto
Online Setting function.
Routing tables can be set offline and then
transferred online to CS/CJ-series PLCs.
Echoback tests between nodes are enabled (with
CX-Integrator Ver. 1.1 or later).
Connecting to the Relay PLC
Either of the following methods can be used to connect the CX-Integrator online to the relay
PLC.
Serial communications (Toolbus or Host Link Mode)
FINS network communications, such as Controller Link, SYSMAC LINK, Ethernet, Ethernet
FINS/TCP, or FinsGateway
Note: If the computer running the CX-Integrator is connected directly to a network, the network
address and node can be specified to set any PLC on the local network or an interconnected
network as the relay PLC.
1-4
1-1-4
1-1
The CX-Integrator
1-1-4
Accessible Network
Accessible Network
The network configuration of the target PLC (i.e., either the relay PLC or a PLC connected to
the relay PLC) can be uploaded and monitored for each of the following networks.
Accessible Networks
Network
Ethernet
Controller Link
SYSMAC LINK
DeviceNet
Conditions
Monitoring and editing parameters is possible for all CS/CJ-series PLCs
and NSJ-series NSJ Controllers on the Ethernet network. Only monitoring
the network configuration is possible for CVM1/CV-series PLCs and
computers with FinsGateway.
Monitoring and editing parameters is possible for all CS/CJ-series PLCs
and NSJ-series NSJ Controllers on the Controller Link network. Only
monitoring the network configuration is possible for C200HX/HG/HS
PLCs, CVM1/CV-series PLCs, and computers with FinsGateway.
Monitoring and editing parameters is possible for all CS-series PLCs on
the SYSMAC LINK network. Only monitoring the network configuration is
possible for C200HX/HG/HS PLCs, CVM1/CV-series PLCs, and
computers with FinsGateway.
Monitoring and editing parameters is possible for all CS/CJ-series
DeviceNet Units and NSJ-series NSJ Controllers. Only setting the
DeviceNet Master Unit is possible for C200H-series DeviceNet Master
Unit and CVM1/CV-series DeviceNet Master Units.
Accessible Serial Communications
Serial
communications
CompoWay/F
NT Link
Conditions
The serial communications mode of the serial port must be Serial
Gateway Mode or Protocol Macro Mode. (See note.)
Note:
To use the built-in serial ports on CS/CJ-series CPU Units,
unit version 3.0 or later must be used. For Serial Communications
Boards and Serial Communications Units, unit version 1.2 or later
must be used.
Monitoring and parameter editing is possible only for CompoWay/F slaves
for which CPS files have been installed on the computer running the
CX-Integrator.
(If the CompoWay/F slave is a Temperature Controller, however, only
monitoring the network configuration is possible. Parameters are edited
using the CX-Thermo.)
The serial communications mode of the serial port must be 1:N NT Link.
Monitoring is possible only for NS-series PTs with model numbers ending
in V1or later. (Monitoring is not possible for earlier NS-series PTs without
a model number suffix or for NT-series PTs.)
1-5
1-1
The CX-Integrator
1-1-4
Accessible Network
Local Network Table Requirements
A local network table must be registered in the target PLC in the following cases.
Communications
Network
communications
Serial
communications
Conditions
• More than one Network Communications Unit is mounted to the target
PLC. (See note.)
Note:
Network Communications Units include Ethernet Units, Controller
Link Units, SYSMAC LINK Units, DeviceNet Units, and FL-net Units.
Serial Communications Units and Serial Communications Boards are not
included except in the following case: If serial ports are registered in the
local network table to treat them as networks, the serial ports must be
treated as Network Communications Units, including the serial ports on
the CPU Unit.
• Routing tables are already registered in one or more nodes on the network.
• Communications are required between networks.
Serial ports on Serial Communications Units and Serial Communications
Boards are used as serial gateways to Host Link FINS and access is
required via networks via Host Link FINS to PLCs functioning as Host Link
slaves.
Note:
Serial ports do not necessarily need to be registered in the local
network table (to treat them as networks) to enable using other serial
gateway functions. Registration is normally not required to convert from
serial to serial. Refer to 3-6 Overview of Serial Gateway Functions in the
CS/CJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (Cat. No.
W342) for details on whether local network tables are required to use
serial gateway functions.
Note: As an exception, local network tables are not required even when more than one Network
Communications Unit is mounted in the following situation:
Access is possible without a local network table when connecting online to the target PLC via a
direct serial connection and access is required only to the network of the Network
Communications Unit with the smallest unit number (set on the front panel rotary switches) of all
the Network Communications Units that are mounted to the target PLC.
1-6
1-1
1-1-5
1-1-5
The CX-Integrator
Communicating Across Network Layers
Communicating Across Network Layers
If relay network routing tables are set in the CPU Units of the PLCs, a PLC on a different
network layer than the network of the PLC connected to the CX-Integrator can be set as the
target PLC to enable uploading, saving, and comparing the network configuration of the
target PLC.
Uploading and displaying network and serial communications configuration
of a target PLC on a remote network for each network
Computer running
CX-Integrator
Relay network routing tables
set in the CPU Units
Relay PLC
CS/CJ-series PLC
CS/CJ-series PLC
Target PLC
Serial connection
(Toolbus or Host
Link) or network
connection
CS/CJ-series PLC
Serial connection
(NT Link)
Controller Link
Ethernet
Uploaded to computer
Network and serial
communications
structure can be
uploaded.
DeviceNet
General-purpose slaves, such
as I/O Terminals
1-1-6
PLC
Temperature
Controller or
other device
Starting Other Applications
The following applications can be started from the CX-Integrator.
Application
CX-Programmer
Data Link Component
Routing Table Component
Controller Link Network Diagnostic
Tool
CX-Designer
CX-Thermo
CX-Drive
Starting method
Right-click the desired CS/CJ-series PLC in the Network
Configuration Window and select Start Special Application
from the pop-up menu.
Either select Tools – Start Data Link or right-click the desired
Controller Link Unit in the Online Connection Information
Window and select Start Data Link from the pop-up menu.
Either select Tools – Start Routing table or right-click the
desired Communication Unit/port in the Online Connection
Information Window and select Start Routing table from the
pop-up menu.
Select Tools – Controller Link tool – Network diagnosis.
Right-click the desired NS-series PT in the Network
Configuration Window and select Start Special Application
from the pop-up menu.
Right-click the desired OMRON Temperature Controller in the
Network Configuration Window and select Start Special
Application from the pop-up menu.
Right-click the desired Inverter or Servo in the Network
Configuration Window and select Start Special Application
from the pop-up menu.
1-7
1-2
Specifications
1-2-1
CX-Integrator Specifications
1-2
Specifications
1-2-1
CX-Integrator Specifications
Item
Model
Setup media
Applicable
Computer
computers
CPU
(with
FinsGateway) OS
Specification
Provided in the CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package (CXONE-AL@@C-E).
CD-ROM
IBM PC/AT or compatible
Pentium II, 333 MHz or better, for Windows 98 SE or NT 4.0 with service pack 6a Pentium III, 1
GHz or better, is recommended.
Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Me, 2000, or XP
Microsoft Windows NT version 4.0 service pack 6a
Note: CX-Integrator cannot be used with Windows 95.
Memory 64 MB min. for Windows 98 SE or NT 4.0 with service pack 6a
Hard disk 100 MB min. of available space
drive
Monitor
SVGA, 800 x 600 pixels or better
Note: Use the small font size.
CD-ROM At least one required.
drive
Communi At least one RS-232C or USB port (See note.)
cations
Note:
The USB port on a computer can be connected to if the CJ1W-CIF31 USB-Serial
port
Conversion Cable is used. (The driver software included with the CJ1W-CIF31 must be installed
on the computer.)
PLCs that can be used
Series
Device type
CPU Unit model
as relay PLC for online
(See note 1.)
connections
CS Series
CS1H
CS1H-CPU67/66/65/64/63(-V1)
Note: A relay PLC is the
PLC to which the
CX-Integrator is
connected online.
CJ Series
CP-Series
(See note 3.)
NSJ Series
CS1G/CJ1G
CS1G-H
CS1H-H
CS1D-H
CS1D-S
CS1G/CJ1G
CJ1M
CJ1G-H
CJ1H-H
CP1H-XA
CP1H-X
NSJ
CS1G-CPU45/44/43/42(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45H/44H/43H/42H
CS1H-CPU67H/66H/65H/64H/63H
CS1D-CPU67H/65H (See note 2.)
CS1D-CPU67S/65S/44S/42S
CJ1G-CPU45/44
CJ1M-CPU23/22/21/13/12/11
CJ1G- CPU45H/44H/43H/42H
CJ1H-CPU67H/66H/65H
CP1H-XA@@@@-@
CP1H-X@@@@-@
G5D (Used for the NSJ5-TQ0@-G5D, NSJ5-SQ0@-G5D,
NSJ8-TV0@-G5D, NSJ10-TV0@-G5D, and NSJ12-TS0@-G5D.)
Note 1: To connect the computer running CX-Integrator directly as a CompoWay/F slave, set
the Device type to CompoWay/F Device.
Note 2: When using a pre-Ver. 1.1 CS1D-H CPU Unit, use it as if it were a CS1H-H CPU
Unit.
Note 3: Use commercially available USB cable (B type to A type connectors) for connecting
CP-series CPU Units.
1-8
1-2
1-2-1
Item
Connecting to the
Relay PLC
Specifications
CX-Integrator Specifications
Specification
Either of the following can be used.
Serial
Direction connection is possible to any of the following serial ports on a
communications
CS/CJ-series PLC.
• CPU Unit peripheral port (Toolbus or Host Link)
• CPU Unit RS-232C port (Toolbus or Host Link)
• CPU Unit USB port (CP Series only)
• Serial Communications Board or Serial Communications Unit RS-232C
port or RS-422A/485 port (Host Link)
Direct connection is possible to any of the following serial ports on an
NSJ-series NSJ Controller.
• RS-232C port A (Toolbus) on NSJ Controller
• RS-232C port B (Toolbus) on NSJ Controller
• USB port on NSJ Controller
Note:
FINS network
communications
Automatic online connection is possible for serial communications
ports. (The user does not have to set the computer communications
settings.) The communications settings will be automatically set to
those of the PLC. Connection is possible to a serial port on the CPU
Unit, a Serial Communications Board, or a Serial Communications
Unit. For PLC serial ports, however, only the Toolbus or Host Link
serial communications modes can be used and the baud rate must be
9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200 bits/s.
Direction connection is possible through any of the following networks on
a CS/CJ-series PLC or NSJ-series NSJ Controller.
• Ethernet (Ethernet, Ethernet FINS/TCP, or FinsGateway)
• Controller Link (Controller Link or FinsGateway)
• SYSMAC LINK (SYSMAC LINK or FinsGateway)
1-9
1-2
Specifications
1-2-1
CX-Integrator Specifications
Item
PLCs that are
accessible as target
PLCs
Note: The target PLC
is the PLC actually
being accessed, e.g.,
to upload/download
the PLC’s network
configurations.
Series
Device type
Specification
CPU Unit model
CS Series CS1H
CS1H-CPU67/66/65/64/63(-V1)
CS1G/CJ1G CS1G-CPU45/44/43/42(-V1)
CS1G-H
CS1H-H
CS1D-H
CS1G-CPU45H/44H/43H/42H
CS1H-CPU67H/66H/65H/64H/63H
CS1D-CPU67H/65H
Note: When using a pre-Ver. 1.1
CS1D-H CPU Unit, use it as if it
were a CS1H-H CPU Unit.
CS1D-S
CS1D-CPU67S/65S/44S/42S
CJ Series CS1G/CJ1G CJ1G-CPU45/44
CJ1M
CJ1M-CPU23/22/21/13/12/11
CJ1G-H
CJ1G- CPU45H/44H/43H/42H
CJ1H-H
CJ1H-CPU67H/66H/65H
Supported
communications
1-10
Note: CompoWay/F cannot be
used with a built-in serial
port on the CPU Unit.
Note: A CPU Unit with unit
version 3.0 or later must be
used when using
CompoWay/F with a
built-in serial port on the
CPU Unit
Note: CompoWay/F cannot be
used with a built-in serial
port on the CPU Unit.
Note: A CPU Unit with unit
version 3.0 or later must
be used when using
CompoWay/F with a
built-in serial port on the
CPU Unit
CP-Series CP1H-XA
CP1H-XA@@@@-@
Note: CompoWay/F cannot be
used with a built-in USB
CP1H-X
CP1H-X@@@@-@
port on the CPU Unit. It
can be used with a serial
communications port.
NSJ
NSJ
G5D (Used for the NSJ5-TQ0@-G5D,
Note: CompoWay/F can be used
Series
NSJ5-SQ0@-G5D, NSJ8-TV0@-G5D,
on serial port C (RS-232C
NSJ10-TV0@-G5D, and
port) on the Controller
NSJ12-TS0@-G5D.)
Section of the NSJ
Controller.
Note:
The CS/CJ-series PLC must have a lot number of 030201 or later (manufactured 1
February 2003 or later) to start the CX-Designer and transfer screen data to an NS-series PT
from the CX-Designer through the PLC. The following PLCs can be used:
CS1G-H, CS1H-H, CS1D-S, CJ1M, or CJ1H-H. (The CS1D-H cannot be used.)
The following communications are possible for a directly connected target PLC.
Supported network
Ethernet (Access is possible only to CS/CJ-series PLCs, NS-series PTs,
communications
and computers with FinsGateway on the Ethernet network. For
CVM1/CV-series PLCs, only display functions are supported.)
Controller Link (Access is possible only to CS/CJ/CP-series PLCs,
NS-series PTs, and computers with FinsGateway on the Controller Link
network.) For C200H-series PLCs and CVM1/CV-series PLCs, only
display functions are supported.)
Note:
When the Controller Link Network Diagnosis application is
being used, it is possible to monitor and troubleshoot PLC models in
the Controller Link network other than CS/CJ-series PLCs.
SYSMAC LINK (Monitoring is possible only to CS/CJ-series PLCs,
NS-series PTs, and computers with FinsGateway on the SYSMAC LINK
network.)
DeviceNet (CS/CJ-series DeviceNet Units, C200H DeviceNet Master
Units, or CVM1/CV-series DeviceNet Master Units)
Note:
A C200H-DRM21-V1 or CVM1-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master
Unit can be used through a CS/CJ-series DeviceNet Unit.
Supported serial
CompoWay/F (CS/CJ-series CPU Units must be unit version 3.0 or later.)
communications
Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units must be
unit version 1.2 or later. Only slaves for which CPS files are installed on
the computer can be accessed.
NT Links (Connection is possible only for NS-series PTs with model
numbers ending in V1 or later.)
Note: Accessing PLC Communications Across Network Layers
If relay network routing tables are set, a PLC on a different network layer than the network of the
PLC connected to the CX-Integrator can be set as the target PLC.
1-2
1-2-1
Item
Online Connection
Information Window
Communications
monitoring functions
Setting functions
Verification functions
Operations
Specifications
CX-Integrator Specifications
Specification
When the target PLC is online, Communications Units connected to the target PLC (referred to here
as simple “Communications Units”) are displayed as follows:.
Target Device, Target PLC CPU Unit model (network address) (node address)
• CPU Unit name [model] (network address) (-) (serial port FINS unit address)
• Communications Unit name [model] (network address) (node address) (unit number)
• Communications Unit name [model] (network address) (node address) (unit number)
Communications configuration information can be uploaded by right-clicking a Communications Unit
and selecting Transfer – Network to PC.
Ethernet
Node information for FINS communications (CPU Unit model, Ethernet
Unit mode, node address, and network address)
Controller Link
Information on nodes participating in the Controller Link network (CPU
Unit model, Controller Link Unit mode, node address, and network
address)
The following functions are also possible if the Controller Link Network
Diagnostic Tool is started.
Configuration node diagnosis (network participation status, current
Controller Link Unit errors, current CPU Unit errors, and differences from
node files), setting diagnosis (e.g., DM Area parameter setting
consistency), line disconnection information diagnosis, transmission
status diagnosis, node status (displaying current error status and error
log), error log collection, and node file editing (node names, connection
order, and Repeater Units)
SYSMAC LINK
Information on nodes participating in the SYSMAC LINK network (CPU
Unit model, Controller Link Unit mode, node address, and network
address)
DeviceNet
Information on nodes connected to DeviceNet for which EDS files are
installed on the computer (DeviceNet Unit model, slave model,
master/slave node addresses)
CompoWay/F
Information on nodes connected to a serial port in serial gateway mode or
protocol macro mode for which CPS files are installed on the computer
(CompoWay/F SLAVE model and CompoWay/F node address).
Note:
CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later, or Serial
Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later, or
CP-series Communications Option Boards must be used.
NT Link
Information on nodes connected to 1:N NT Links (NS-series PT model
and NT Link unit number)
Note:
Automatic detection of NS-series PTs connected serially to a
CS/CJ-series PLC is also possible. (The NT Link Automatic Setting
Function automatically changes the setting of the PLC’s serial port to
match those of the NS-series PT.)
Ethernet
Ethernet Unit settings (CPU Bus Unit System Settings)
Controller Link
User-set data link tables
Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK Unit settings (in allocated DM Area
SYSMAC LINK
words), including automatically set data link parameters (transferred to
the startup node set as the target PLC)
DeviceNet
DeviceNet Unit master parameters (remote I/O allocations, connection
settings, device information check, communications cycle time, etc.)
Slave parameters
CompoWay/F
CompoWay/F slave parameters (except for Temperature Controllers)
Note: Parameters for CompoWay/F-compatible Temperature Controllers
are set using the CX-Thermo, started as an application.
PLC serial port communications settings (CPU Unit: part of PLC Setup,
Serial Communications Boards/Units: allocated DM Area words)
NT Link
None
FINS networks, such
Routing tables (FINS local routing tables and FINS network routing
as Ethernet, Controller
tables)
Link, SYSMAC LINK,
Note:
The FINS local routing table is transferred to the target PLC.
and DeviceNet
Verifying communications/network configurations
Verifying component parameters
The following operations are possible for the CPU Unit at the target PLC.
Creating, editing, and transferring I/O tables
Displaying current errors and error logs
Changing the operating mode
Transferring or verifying a manually set data link table
Transferring or verifying a routing table (FINS local routing table)
1-11
1-2
Specifications
1-2-2
Files Created by the CX-Integrator
1-2-2
Files Created by the CX-Integrator
The following files can be created by the CX-Integrator.
Files
Project files (.cin)
Contents
Connection
information to relay
PLC, all network
configurations for
target PLC, and
parameters for
DeviceNet masters,
DeviceNet slaves,
and CompoWay/F
slaves
Network
configuration files
DeviceNet network
structure files (.npf)
Component
parameter files
Controller Link node
files (.crg)
DeviceNet device
parameter files
(.dvf)
CompoWay/F
component
parameter files
(.xml)
Data link table files
Controller Link data
link table files (.cl2)
SYSMAC LINK data
link table files (.sl3)
1-12
Details
These files are used offline to check network configurations and parameters
and for other purposes, such as printing. Each file consists of the following:
Device type setting information of the relay PLC
Communications Unit models connected to the target PLC (Ethernet Units,
Controller Link Units, SYSMAC LINK Units, DeviceNet Units, and Serial
Communications Boards/Units)
Device models connected to the above CPU Units or Communications
Units via communications (DeviceNet slaves, CompoWay/F slaves,
NS-series PTs, etc.)
Parameters for DeviceNet Master Unit and Device parameters and
DeviceNet slaves (for all devices for which EDS files are installed on the
computer including slaves from other manufacturers)
Parameters for CompoWay/F slaves (for all components for which CPS
files are installed on the computer (except for Temperature Controllers)
Controller Link network parameters
Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK Unit allocated DM Area words settings,
including automatically set data link parameters
Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit System Settings
Serial Communications Board/Unit serial communications settings
Note: Routing tables (local network tables and relay network tables) and
user-set data link tables are not included in project files.
Network configuration for one DeviceNet network connected directly to the
target PLC (including master and slave parameters)
Note: These are the same as the DeviceNet network structure files (.npf)
created with DeviceNet Configurator version 2.@. Files created with
DeviceNet Configurator version 2.@ can be imported/exported.
Network configuration for Controller Link networks connected directly to the
target PLC
Parameters for individual DeviceNet devices (master or slave)
Note: These are the same as the DeviceNet device parameter files (.dvf)
created with DeviceNet Configurator version 2.@. Files created with
DeviceNet Configurator version 2.@ can be imported.
Parameters for individual CompoWay/F slaves (except for Temperature
Controllers)
CPU Unit parameters (parts of PLC Setup: serial communications settings)
Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK network parameters
Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK Unit allocated DM Area words settings,
including automatically set data link parameters
Ethernet Unit CPU Bus Unit System Settings
Serial Communications Board/Unit serial communications settings
Controller Link user-set data link tables
Note: These are the same as the Controller Link data link table files (.cl3)
created with the CX-Net. Files created with the CX-Net can be
imported.
SYSMAC LINK user-set data link tables
Note: These are the same as the SYSMAC LINK data link table files (.sl3)
created with the CX-Net. Files created with the CX-Net can be
imported.
1-2
1-2-2
File name
Routing table files
Contents
FINS local routing
table files (.rtg)
FINS network
routing table files
(.rt3)
Specifications
Files Created by the CX-Integrator
Details
Routing tables of the target PLC
Note: These are the same as the FINS local routing table files (.rtg) created
with the CX-Net. Files created with the CX-Net can be imported.
Routing tables for all PLCs on networks to which the target PLC belongs
Note: These are the same as the FINS network routing table files (.rt3)
created with the CX-Net. Files created with the CX-Net can be
imported.
Note
With DeviceNet only, the following files can also be exported and saved.
EDS files (.eds)
The device list saved in CSV format (.csv)
The I/O comments saved in CSV format (.csv)
The device parameters of an OMRON DeviceNet Master Unit saved as an Open
Network Controller DRM_UNIT (virtual unit) file
The device parameters of an OMRON DeviceNet Master Unit saved as a NetX Server
(NetX Server for DeviceNet) file
Note
The CX-Integrator does not support files created in the DeviceNet Configurator Ver.
1.0 file format.
1-13
1-3
Installation
1-2-2
Files Created by the CX-Integrator
1-3
Installation
The CX-Integrator is installed from the CX-One Installer. Refer to the CX-One Setup Manual
(W444) for details.
1-14
1-4
1-4-1
1-4
PLC Connecting Cables
1-4-1
Direct Serial Connections to a PLC
PLC Connecting Cables
Direct Serial Connections to a PLC
When connecting the computer running the CX-Integrator directly to a PLC using a serial
line, make the connection correctly using the following Connecting Cables and connection
diagrams.
Connecting Cables to CS/CJ-series PLCs
Unit
Unit port
CPU Unit
Computer
Built-in
peripheral port
IBM PC/AT
or
compatible
Built-in
RS-232C port
D-sub 9-pin
male
IBM PC/AT
or
compatible
Serial
RS-232C port
Communications D-sub 9-pin
Boards/Units
male
Network type
Computer
(serial
Model
port
communications
mode)
D-sub
Peripheral bus
CS1W-CN226/626
9-pin male (Toolbus)
or Host Link
(SYSWAY)
Peripheral bus
XW2Z-200S-CV/
D-sub
500S-CV
9-pin male (Toolbus)
or Host Link
(SYSWAY)
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
IBM PC/AT
or
compatible
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V
XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V
Length
Remarks
2 m/6 m ---
2 m/5 m Connector
with ESD
(electrostatic
discharge)
countermeasu
res used.
2 m/5 m --2 m/5 m Connector
with ESD
(electrostatic
discharge)
countermeasu
res used.
2 m/5 m -
Refer to the following connection diagrams.
Connection to IBM PC/AT or Compatible
Connection to Peripheral Port
Connection to RS-232C Port
IBM PC/AT or compatible
IBM PC/AT or compatible
9-pin
9-pin
CPU Unit peripheral port
Built-in RS-232C
port on CPU Unit
or port on Serial
Communications
Board/Unit
9-pin
CS1W-CN226 (2.0 m)
CS1W-CN626 (6.0 m)
Note
XW2Z-200S-CV (2.0 m)
XW2Z-500S-CV (5.0 m)
•When using an RS-232C cable for the computer running CX-Integrator and
connecting to a CS/CJ-series PLC with a Toolbus connection, use a
XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV Connecting Cable. (This cable can be used only with IBM
PC/AT or compatible computers.)
•The following connection methods can be used when connecting an RS-232C cable
to a peripheral port on a CS/CJ-series PLC.
1-15
1-4
PLC Connecting Cables
1-4-1
Direct Serial Connections to a PLC
Unit
CPU Unit
Unit port
Computer
Computer
port
Built-in
IBM
D-sub 9-pin
peripheral port PC/AT or male
compatible
IBM
D-sub 9-pin
PC/AT or male
compatible
Network type
(serial
Model
communications
mode)
Peripheral bus
CS1W-CN118 +
(Toolbus)
XW2Z-200S-CV/
or Host Link
500S-CV
(SYSWAY)
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
CS1W-CN118 +
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V
Length
Remarks
0.1 m + The
2 m/5 m XW2Z-@@@
S-CV uses a
connector
with ESD
(electrostatic
discharge)
countermeas
ures.
0.1 m + --2 m/5 m
Connection to
RS-232C Port
XW2Z-@@@S-@@
RS-232C cable
(listed above)
CS1W-CN118
Peripheral port
Note
Unit
CPU Unit
The following connection methods can be used when connecting an CQM1-CIF01/02
cable to a peripheral port on a CS/CJ-series PLC.
Unit port
Computer
Computer
port
Built-in peripheral IBM
D-sub 9-pin
port
PC/AT or male
compatible
Network type
(serial
Model
communications
mode)
Host Link
CS1W-CN114 +
(SYSWAY)
CQM1-CIF02
Note: Baud rate
must be 19.2
Kbits/s or less.
Connection to
RS-232C Port
CQM1-CIF01/02
Peripheral Cable
CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port
1-16
Length
05 m +
3.3 m
Remarks
---
1-4
1-4-1
Note
PLC Connecting Cables
Direct Serial Connections to a PLC
Connecting the PLC Using a USB Port on the Computer
A USB port on the computer can be used to connect the computer running the
CX-Integrator to a PLC. To do so, connect the computer to the PLC as shown below
using a CS1W-CIF31 USB-Serial Conversion Cable. When connecting the computer to
a CP-series PLC, it is possible to make a direct connection using a
commercially-available USB cable (B type – A type connectors).
The driver software included with the CJ1W-CIF31 must be installed on the computer
to use a USB port to connect the CX-Integrator. Refer to the PDF User’s Manual
included with the CS1W-CIF31 USB-Serial Conversion Cable for details.
PLC Connection Methods
Computer
running
CX-Integrator
CS1W-CIF31
Cable 2
(when required)
Cable 1
PLC
CS1W-N226/626 CS/CJ-series
Peripheral Port Programming
Device Connecting Cable
CS1W-CN114
C-series-CS/CJ-series
Peripheral Conversion Cable
or
CS1W-CIF31
USB Connecting Cable
+
CQM1H-CIF02 C-series
Peripheral Port Programming
Device Connecting Cable
+
CS1W-CN118
RS-232C-CS/CJ-series
Peripheral Conversion Cable
or
XW2Z-@@@ RS-232C Programming
Device Connecting Cable
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Connection Patterns
USB
Connecting
Cable
Model
Cable 1
Connector
CS1W-CIF31 D-sub 9-pin
female
Model
Cable 2
Connector
Connector
CS1W-CN226/626 CS/CJ
(length: 2 m/6 m)
peripheral
Model
Port
Connector
Not needed.
Serial
communications
mode
(network
type)
CS/CJ
peripheral
Peripheral
(Toolbus)
or Host Link
(SYSWAY)
D-sub 9-pin
female
CQM1-CIF02
(length: 3.3 m)
C peripheral
C peripheral
CS1W-CN114
(length: 5 cm)
CS/CJ
peripheral
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
D-sub 9-pin
female
XW2Z-200S-CV
/500S-CV
(length: 2 m/5 m)
D-sub 9-pin
male
D-sub 9-pin
female
CS1W-CN118
(length: 0.1 m)
CS/CJ
peripheral
Peripheral
(Toolbus)
or Host Link
(SYSWAY)
D-sub 9-pin
female
XW2Z-200S-V
/500S-V
(length: 2 m/5 m)
D-sub 9-pin
male
D-sub 9-pin
female
CS1W-CN118
(length: 0.1 m)
CS/CJ
peripheral
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
D-sub 9-pin
female
XW2Z-200S-CV
/500S-CV
(length: 2 m/5 m)
RS-232C
D-sub 9-pin
male
Not needed.
D-sub 9-pin
female
XW2Z-200S-V
/500S-V
(length: 2 m/5 m)
RS-232C
D-sub 9-pin
male
Not needed.
RS-232C
D-sub 9-pin
female
Peripheral
(Toolbus)
or Host Link
(SYSWAY)
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
1-17
1-4
PLC Connecting Cables
1-4-1
Direct Serial Connections to a PLC
Connection diagrams are shown below.
Connecting to the Peripheral Port
-Using the CS1W-CN226/626 Connecting Cable
USB A-plug connector,
male
CS1W-CIF31
D-sub connector
(9-pin male)
● CS/CJ-series PLCs
● Customizable Counter Units
CS/CJ peripheral connector
D-sub connector
(9-pin female)
Peripheral port
Recommended cable:
CS1W-CN226/626
-Using the CQM1-CIF02 Connecting Cable
USB A-plug connector,
male
CS1W-CIF31
D-sub connector
(9-pin male)
D-sub connector
(9-pin female)
● CS/CJ-series PLCs (See note.)
C peripheral connector
CS/CJ peripheral connector
Peripheral port
Recommended cable:
CQM1-CIF02
CS1W-CN114
Note: Only a Host Link connection is possible for CS/CJ-series PLCs.
1-18
1-4
1-4-1
PLC Connecting Cables
Direct Serial Connections to a PLC
-Using the XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV or XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V Connecting Cable for
RS-232C
USB A-plug connector,
male
CS1W-CIF31
D-sub connector
(9-pin male)
CS/CJ-series PLCs
D-sub connector
(9-pin female)
D-sub connector (9-pin male)
Peripheral port
XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV
or
XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V (See note.)
D-sub connector
(9-pin female)
CS/CJ peripheral
connector
CS1W-CN118
Note: Only a Host Link connection is possible for CS/CJ-series PLCs.
-Using the XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV or XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V Connecting Cable for
RS-232C
USB A-plug connector,
male
CS1W-CIF31
D-sub connector
(9-pin male)
CS/CJ-series PLCs
D-sub connector
(9-pin male)
D-sub connector
(9-pin female)
RS-232C port
D-sub connector
(9-pin female)
Recommended cable:
XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV
or
XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V (See note.)
Note: Only a Host Link connection is possible for CS/CJ-series PLCs.
1-19
1-4
PLC Connecting Cables
1-4-1
Direct Serial Connections to a PLC
Connecting Cables for CP1H-series PLCs
Connecting to USB Port in CPU Unit Using Commercially-available USB Cable
Unit
Port at
Unit
Computer
Port at
computer
CPU Unit
USB port
(B
connector)
DOS/V
USB port
(A
connector)
Network type
(serial
communications
mode)
USB
Model
Length
Remarks
Cable
for USB
1.1 or
2.0
5 m max.
---
DOS/V computer
USB port
CP1H CPU Unit
Commerciallyavailable USB
cable
Peripheral USB port
Connecting by RS-232C Cable to the RS-232C Port in a Serial Communications
Option Board
1-20
Unit
Unit port
Computer
Computer
port
CP1WCIF01
Serial
Option
Board
RS-232C
port, D-SUB
9-pin,
female
IBM
PC/AT or
compatible
D-SUB
9-pin, male
Network type
(serial
communications
mode)
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
Model
Length
Remarks
XW2Z200S-CV/
500S-CV
2 m/
5m
Connect
or with
ESD
(electrostatic discharge)
counterm
easure
used.
1-4
1-4-2
1-4-2
PLC Connecting Cables
Direct Connections to a Relay PLC via a Network
Direct Connections to a Relay PLC via a Network
When connecting the computer running the CX-Integrator directly to the relay PLC via a
network, make the connection correctly using the following connection diagrams.
Ethernet
CS/CJ-series
Ethernet Unit
CS/CJ-series
relay PLC
Ethernet port
Ethernet
DeviceNet network
Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK
CS/CJ-series
Controller Link Unit
CS/CJ-series
relay PLC
PCI Controller Link Support Board
(See note.)
Controller Link
Note:
Type
Optical ring with H-PCF cable
Optical ring with GI cable
Wired (twisted-pair cable)
DeviceNet network
Board
Controller Link PCI-bus
Support Board
Model
3G8F7-CLK12-V1
3G8F7-CLK52-V1
3G8F7-CLK21-V1
1-21
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-1
Starting Methods
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-1
Starting Methods
The CX-Integrator can be started with any of the following three methods.
1) When using the CX-Programmer Ver. 6.0 or later, select Tools − Network Settings.
2) When using the CX-Programmer that was installed from the CX-One, right-click a
Communication Unit in the CX-Programmer’s I/O table display and select Start Special
Application from the pop-up menu.
Note: If the Communication Unit is a Serial Communications Board/Unit, a Start Special Application
Dialog Box will be displayed. Select CX-Integrator in the dialog box to start the CX-Integrator.
3) Select CX-Integrator from the Start Menu.
1-5-2
Main Window
One of the following windows will appear when the CX-Integrator is started.
Offline Window
Workspace Window
Network Configuration Window
Online Window
Workspace Window
Network Configuration Window
Online Connection
Information Window
Output Window
1-22
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-2
Note
Main Window
The following operations can be performed on the Workspace Window, Output
Window, Component List Window, and Outline Window.
Moving a Window and Displaying the Window Separately
Drag the window by its top border to move it.
Closing a Window
Click the X Button (Close Button) at the upper-right corner of the window.
Displaying a Window
Select the desired window from the View − Windows Menu. (A check mark appears
next to the windows that are displayed.)
Online Connection Information Window
The Online Connection Information Window displays the online/offline status and the Relay
PLC’s communications settings.
When online, the target PLC will be displayed in a tree structure with all of the
Communications Units and ports that belong to it.
Online Operation
The target PLC and Communication Units/ports mounted to the target PLC will be listed
below the relay PLC.
Relay PLC Communications Settings
The relay PLC’s communications settings will be displayed to the right of the Online icon
( Online).
After Connecting Online
Relay PLC
=
When the computer is directly
connected to a PLC, the same
PLC will be both the relay PLC
and the target PLC.
Target PLC
The target PLC is displayed in green.
Target PLC Information
The target PLC’s CPU Unit model, Net (network address), and Node (node address) will be
displayed to the right of the Target icon ( Target PLC).
Display format:
Target PLC [Target PLC’s CPU Unit model] Net (network address) Node (node address)
Description:
In brackets
[ ] to the right of
TargetPLC
Target PLC’s
CPU Unit model
[Target PLC’s CPU Unit
model]
Target PLC’s CPU Unit
model
Net (Network address)
Node (Node address)
Network address (1 to 127,
decimal)
Note: This is the network
address registered when this
PLC is registered as the target
PLC via the relay PLC.
Node address (decimal)
Note: This is the node
address on the network
registered when this PLC
is registered as the target
PLC via the relay PLC.
1-23
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-2
Main Window
Communications Unit and Port Information for Target PLC
The following CPU Unit built-in serial ports, Inner Boards, and Communications Units
(referred to here as Communications Units/Ports) that are part of the target PLC are
displayed under TargetPLC in directory tree format.
Display format:
Unit name [Unit model] Net (network address) Node (node address) Unit (unit number or
or
FINS unit address)
: Not connected (access not possible).
: Connected (access possible).
Description:
Communications
Unit/port
CPU Unit built-in
serial port
Right of
or
Unit name
CPU Unit/port
:
[Unit model]
Target PLC’s
CPU Unit
model
Serial port on
Serial Communications
Inner Board
Board
(Nothing
displayed if an
Inner Board is not
mounted.)
Serial Communications
Board model
Communications
Unit name, Model
Communications Unit
model
Communications Unit
name (Ethernet Unit,
Controller Link Unit,
SYSMAC LINK Unit, or
DeviceNet Unit)
Net (Network
address)
Node (Node
address)
The network address − (Does not
change.)
(1 to 127, decimal),
when the serial port is
registered in the local
network table to treat
it as a network.
Note: “−” will be
displayed if the serial
port is not registered
in the local network
table.
Same as above.
− (Does not
change.)
Unit (Unit number
or FINS unit
address)
Serial port’s FINS
unit address
(decimal)
Peripheral port: 253
RS-232C port: 252
Note: “−” will be
displayed if the
serial port is not
registered in the
local network table.
Serial port’s FINS
unit address
(decimal)
Port 1: 225
Port 2: 226
Note: “−” will be
displayed if the
serial port is not
registered in the
local network table.
Network address (1 to Node
Unit number
127, decimal)
address
(decimal)
Note: “−” will be
(node ID on (Rotary switch on
displayed if a local
the network) front of CPU Bus
network table is not
Unit: 0 to 15)
registered.
If a connection is established and access is enabled for a Communications Unit/port, the
instead of
.
icon on the left will be
Right-click the Communications Unit/port and select Connect to connect to the
Communications Unit/port and enable access. (With the CX-Integrator, only one
Communications Unit/port can be accessed at any one time.)
The actual network configuration can then be uploaded by right-clicking the Communications
Unit/port and selecting Transfer − Network to PC.
1-24
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-2
Main Window
Network Type
COM Port No., Baud Rate, Parity, Data
Bits, Stop Bits
Relay PLC
communications
settings
Relay PLC’s CPU Unit model
Relay PLC’s FINS destination network
address
Online displayed.
Relay PLC’s FINS destination node
address
Online Connection
Information Window
Target PLC’s CPU Unit model
Target PLC’s network address
Target PLC
information
Target PLC’s node address
Target PLC displayed in green.
Note: If an online connection is
made to the relay PLC, the relay
PLC will also be the target PLC
by default.
Unit No.
Node Address
The
icon will be displayed next to
the Communication Unit/port that is
presently connected and accessible.
Network Address
Communications Unit model (CPU Unit model for CPU Unit built-in serial ports)
Communications Unit and port information
for target PLC
Displayed from the top in the following order.
• CPU ports: CPU Unit serial ports
• Inner Boards (Nothing is displayed if no
Inner Boards are mounted.)
• Communications Units
Communications Unit name (CPU Unit for CPU Unit built-in serial ports)
Note: If an online connection is made to the relay PLC, that PLC will be both the relay PLC and the
target PLC. The Communications Units mounted in the relay PLC will be displayed in the Online
Connection Information Window. Normally, the CX-Integrator is used with the same PLC as both
the relay PLC and the target PLC.
Once a connection has been made, it is possible to download the network configuration and
switch the target PLC to any PLC on the network. To do this, right-click a PLC on a network and
select Connect to this PLC.
Note
CX-Integrator Communications Connections
There are three levels of CX-Integrator communications connections depending on
where the connection is made.
1-25
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-2
Main Window
Display in Online
Connection
Information
Window
Level
Operation
1) Online connection to
the relay PLC
Right-click the
communications settings
for the relay PLC and
select Auto Online or
Work Online.
The operation is the same
as above when the relay
PLC is the target PLC.
If the target PLC is
different from the relay
PLC, upload the
communications
configuration, right-click
the target PLC, and select
Connect to this PLC.
Online
2) Status Online
connection to the
target PLC
TargetPLC or
TargetComponent
(See note.)
3) A connection to one
of the Communications
Units/ports at the
target PLC (Access is
possible.)
Remarks
Right-click the
Communications Unit/port
and select Connect.
Remember that this icon
indicates that the online
connection is to the relay
PLC.
An online connection to the
target PLC is made after
connecting online to the relay
PLC, as described above.
The following operations are
possible for the CPU Unit at
the target PLC.
I/O tables: Creating, editing,
and transferring I/O tables
Error log: Displaying current
errors and error logs
Mode setting: Changing the
operating mode
Only one Communications
Unit/port can be accessed at
any one time.
Communications
configurations can be
uploaded only for a
Communications Unit/port in
this status.
Note: Access is possible to a
Communications Unit/port
only when it is connected.
Access is not possible when
disconnected.
Note:To connect the computer (CX-Integrator) directly to a CompoWay/F Slave through a serial
connection, select CompoWay/F Device as the PLC model.
Offline Displays
Relay PLC Communications Settings
Network Type
COM Port No., Baud Rate, Parity, Data
Bits, Stop Bits
Relay PLC’s CPU Unit
Offline displayed.
Relay PLC’s FINS destination network address
Relay PLC’s FINS destination node
Online Connection
Information Window
1-26
Relay PLC
communications
settings
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-2
Main Window
Relay PLC Communications Settings
Display format:
Offline, Network Type, COM Port No., Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, Stop Bits
[relay PLC’s CPU Unit model] Net (Network Address) Node (Node Address)
Description:
Display item
Contents
Example
Display item
Example
Contents
Network Type
The following network
types will be displayed for
the connection to the
relay PLC.
Toolbus (peripheral)
SYSMAC WAY (Host
Link)
SYSMAC LINK
Ethernet
Ethernet (FINS/TCP)
FinsGateway
Controller Link
Toolbus
Relay PLC’s CPU Unit
model
[CS1H-CPU67H]
Relay PLC’s CPU Unit
model
COM Port
No.
COM port on
computer
COM1,
Baud Rate
Parity
Data Bits
Stop Bits
(Displayed
only for
Toolbus or
SYSMAC
WAY)
Baud rate is
displayed in
bits/s.
(Displayed
only for
SYSMAC
WAY)
The
communicatio
ns data
format parity
is displayed.
Even, Odd, or
None
(Displayed
only for
SYSMAC
WAY)
7 or 8
(Displayed
only for
SYSMAC
WAY)
1 or 2
19200,
None,
8,
1
Relay PLC’s FINS destination
Relay PLC’s FINS destination node
network address (decimal)
address (decimal)
Net (0)
Node (0)
For a direct serial connection, the FINS destination network and node addresses
are normally displayed as 0.
For direct network connections, any FINS destination network (1 to 127) and
node addresses can be set. (If routing tables are registered in the PLCs on the
networks, specifying a PLC on any network other than the network that is
directly connected to is also possible.
Updating the Online Connection Information Window Display
This section describes how to update the target PLC display in the Online Connection
Information Window display, and how to display the updated information.
!Caution When changing or removing a routing table (see note), be sure to update the
display for the Online Connection Information Window. The display for the
Online Connection Information Window could possibly be different from the actual network status. If operations are executed without first updating the display,
particularly online operations in the Network Configuration Window, it could
cause data to be mistakenly read or written for the wrong network or node address or unit number.
Note:
Changing or removing a routing table refers to using the CX-Integrator (or a
CX-Integrator for another personal computer) to start the Routing Table
Component and then changing or removing a routing table for the target PLC
(either a local network table or a relay network table).
Use the following procedure.
1. In the Online Connection Information Window, either select Update of Online
Information Window from the View Menu or press the F5 Key.
1-27
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-2
Main Window
2. The following dialog box will be displayed for confirmation. To execute the update,
click the Yes Button.
3. The display contents of the Online Connection Information Window will be updated.
4. After the display has been updated, operations can be executed with respect to the
Units and Components that are displayed.
Precautions for Online Operations After a Routing Table has been Changed or
Removed
After a routing table has been changed or removed, observe the following precautions
regarding the windows from which to execute online operations such as connections,
network transfers, and starting of special applications.
1. Executing online operations in the Network Configuration Window:
The actual network status may be different from what is being displayed in the Online
Connection Information Window. Be sure to select Display – Change Online
Connection Information Window and update the Online Connection Information
Window.
2. Executing online operations except for “connect” (see note) in a window other
than the Network Configuration Window:
A dialog box will be displayed to notify of a display update. Click the OK Button to
update the Online Connection Information Window display. Then execute the online
operation again.
Note:
1-28
When the “connect” operation is executed, the connection is made after the Online
Connection Information Window display has been automatically updated, without any
dialog box displayed for updating the window display.
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-2
Main Window
Workspace Window
The Workspace Window lists the networks displayed in the Network Configuration Window.
Project name
List of networks displayed in
Network Configuration Window
Workspace Window
Network address (3 digits following #)
Network type
Network name
The icon to the left of the network that is currently connected and can be accessed will be
or
either
With the CX-Integrator, only one Communications Unit/port can be
accessed at any one time.) To enable accessing a network, right-click on it and select
Connect. The actual communications configuration can then be uploaded by right-clicking
the Communications Unit/port and selecting Transfer − Network to PC. To compare the
actual communications configuration with that on the CX-Integrator, right-click the
Communications Unit/port and select Compare.
Note: The Workspace Window corresponds 1:1 to the Network Configuration Window.
If the Network Configuration Window is closed, double-click on a network in the Workspace
Window, and the communications configuration of that network will be displayed in the Network
Configuration Window.
Note
Accessible Status for Networks
The following status is possible for a network displayed in the Workspace Window.
Display in
Workspace
Window
Status
Operation
Remarks
Accessible network
Right-click the network and
select Connect.
Inaccessible networks
Networks created offline
or networks for which the
communications
configuration has been
uploaded and then the
connection was changed to
a different network by
right-clicking and selecting
Connect.
Only one network can be
accessed at any one time.
Network configurations can
be uploaded or compared
only for a network in this
status.
Note: Access is possible to a
network only when it is
connected.
Note: Access is not possible
to a network that is not
connected.
1-29
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-2
Main Window
Network Configuration Window
When the network configuration is uploaded online from the target PLC, the network
configuration will be displayed in this window. If a network is inserted offline, the new
network will be displayed in the Network Configuration Window.
The Network Configuration Window corresponds 1:1 with the Workspace Window.
Online (Same for All Network Types)
The target component’s actual network configuration (including component parameters) can
be uploaded online from the target component by selecting Transfer [Network to PC] after
selecting Connect. The uploaded network configuration will be displayed in this Network
Configuration Window.
Meaning of Window Background Colors and Target Component Highlighting
The background of the Network Configuration Window will be gray when the window can be
accessed. Also, the target component will be highlighted with a green border.
The window title shows network number (assigned in order starting
with Network1), then the network type, and finally the network
address in parentheses.
The network type is displayed after the network number.
The default component name is “Compo”
followed by a number (assigned in order starting
with 1).
The target PLC is highlighted with a green
border.
The background is gray when online and white when offline.
Network
Configuration
Window
Component
display
Item
Background color
Online
Offline
Gray
White
Target component
(See note.)
Green border
No border
Other component
No border
Note: The relay PLC will remain the target PLC with the green border until another node (PLC) is
specified as the target PLC by selecting Connect to this PLC.
Offline (for DeviceNet or CompoWay/F Only)
When offline in a DeviceNet network, components can be selected from the Component List
Menu and added to the virtual network in the Network Configuration Window by dragging
them from the EDS (DeviceNet) Tab and dropping them in the Network Configuration
Window.
1-30
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-2
Main Window
DeviceNet:
A Master or Slave can be selected from the EDS (DeviceNet) Tab
Page and then dragged and dropped in the Network Configuration
Window.
Other Device:
Other components can be selected from the CPS Tab Page and
then dragged and dropped in the Network Configuration Window.
With DeviceNet, the node address, product name, and slave allocation status in the master
will be displayed as shown below.
Node addresses are
displayed with a # prefix.
Product names are
displayed.
When slaves are registered with the master,
the node address of the master is displayed
after the
icon with a # prefix.
Later, the component parameters in the virtual network that was created can be downloaded
to the devices on the actual network online. Furthermore, the configuration of the virtual
network that was created (not including component parameters) or selected component
parameters can be compared to the actual network configuration or the parameters in the
actual component.
Note
The same functions can be performed by right-clicking in the window and selecting
from the Edit or Component Menu. If the mouse pointer is moved to a component, a
description of the component will be displayed in a pop-up.
For other than DeviceNet, the version of each component is also displayed (except for
version 0).
1-31
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-2
Main Window
Parts List (Component List)
Components are listed in the Parts List. A component can be added to the network just by
selecting the component in the Parts List and then dragging and dropping it in the Network
Configuration Window. There are lists in the CPS and EDS Tabs.
CPS Tab
The Parts List shows the OMRON components that have had CPS files installed. The
components are organized by component type in the directory tree format.
A component can be added by selecting the desired component from the Parts List and then
dragging and dropping it in the non-DeviceNet Network Configuration Window.
The following component types are available.
Component type
Generic Device
Human-Machine Interface
PLC
Sensor
Temperature Controller
Description
These are general-purpose devices such as computers that are not
CPS-compatible.
Contains the supported OMRON NS-series PT models.
Contains the supported OMRON CS/CJ-series PLC (CPU Unit)
models.
Contains the supported OMRON ZX-series Smart Sensor models.
Contains the supported OMRON E5@-series Temperature Controllers.
Note: The CPS files are installed in the following directory:
Program Files\Common Files\Omron\Profiles\CPSFiles
EDS Tab
The Parts List shows components that have had EPS files installed. The components are
organized by both vendor and component type in the directory tree format. A single device
will be displayed in both the vendor and component type directory trees. Select the device in
whichever directory is easier to use.
A component can be added by selecting the desired component from the Parts List and then
dragging and dropping it in the DeviceNet Network Configuration Window.
Vendor List
The installed devices are organized by vendor name in this directory. When the
CX-Integrator is first installed, the OMRON directory will be the only directory, but other
manufacturer’s directories will be created automatically when another manufacturer’s
EDS files are installed.
1-32
1-5
Window Descriptions
1-5-2
Main Window
DeviceType List
The installed devices are organized by device type in this directory. The following
device types are available.
Device type
Generic Purpose Discrete I/O
Communications Adapter
Human-Machine Interface
AC Drives
Position Controller
Generic Device
Description
Contains general-purpose I/O devices.
Contains devices that operate as network gateways.
Contains devices that operate as human-machine interfaces, such
as PTs.
Contains AC drive devices.
Contains devices equipped with positioning functions, such as
servomotors and stepping motors.
Other devices
1-33
1-6
Menus
1-6-1
Menus
1-6
Menus
1-6-1
Menus
Main
menu
File
Sub-menu/command
New
Open
Close
Save
Save As
Import
Network
Export
Network
DeviceNet
Component
Comment
list
Print Preview
Print
Edit
NewProject.smt
Exit
Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Select All
Toggle Position
View
Tool bar
Windows
Workspace
Alt+1
Output
Alt+2
Component List
Alt+3
Online
Connection
Information
Alt+4
Status Bar
Update of Online Connection
Information Window
Large Icons
Large Icons-Maintenance mode
Detail
1-34
Description
Creates a new project.
Opens a project that already
exists.
Closes the project being edited.
Saves (overwrites) the project
being edited.
Saves the project being edited
under a different name.
Imports a DeviceNet network
configuration file (.npf).
Exports the DeviceNet network
configuration file (.npf) for the
DeviceNet network selected in the
Workspace Window.
Saves I/O comments in a
CSV-format file.
Displays a printing preview.
Prints component parameters and
I/O comment lists.
Opens the previous file.
Exists the CX-Integrator.
Undoes the previous operation.
Restores an operation that has
been undone.
Cuts the specified range.
Copies the selected object to the
clipboard.
Pastes the object on the clipboard
to the cursor position.
Deletes the selected object.
Selects all objects.
Switches the positions of
components in the Network
Configuration Window between
above and below the network line.
Used to customize the toolbar.
Displays and hides the Workspace
Window.
Displays and hides the Output
Window.
Displays and hides the
Component List Window.
Displays and hides the Online
Connection Information Window.
Displays and hides the status bar.
Updates the display for the Online
Connection Information Window.
Displays components in the
Network Configuration Window
with large icons.
Displays components in the
Network Configuration Window
with large icons in Maintenance
Mode.
Switches to a detailed display.
Network
type
All networks
Offline
Online
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
OK
OK
DeviceNet
only
OK
OK
All networks
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
No
OK
OK
No
No
OK
No
OK
OK
OK
No
No
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
OK
OK
DeviceNet
only
OK
OK
DeviceNet
only
OK
OK
DeviceNet
only
OK
OK
DeviceNet
only
DeviceNet
only
All networks
except
DeviceNet
All networks
1-6
Menus
1-6-1
Main
menu
View
Sub-menu/command
Zoom
200%
100%
75%
50%
Properties
Insert
Network
Component
Insert TBranch
Network
Work Online
Communication Settings
IP address table setting
Auto Online
Change connection to the PLC
Transfer [PC to Network]
Transfer [Network to PC]
Compare
Description
Displays components in the
Network Configuration Window at
200% of the default size.
Displays components in the
Network Configuration Window at
the default size.
Displays components in the
Network Configuration Window at
75% of the default size.
Displays components in the
Network Configuration Window at
50% of the default size.
Displays the properties of the
selected project, network,
component, or EDS file.
Adds a new virtual network to the
Network Configuration Window
offline.
Adds the component selected in
the Component List Window to the
Network Configuration Window
offline.
Adds a new T-branch to the
Network Configuration Window
offline (Controller Link only).
Switches between working offline
and online with the relay PLC
using the device type setting in
the computer.
Used to change the device type
settings of the relay PLC on the
computer. The Change Dialog Box
PLC is displayed.
Sets the CX-Integrator IP address
table. (Only when the relay PLC is
set for Ethernet communications
and the network address is 1 or
greater.)
Automatically connects to the
relay PLC using the
communications settings of the
PLC (supported for serial
communications only).
After the auto-connection has
been made, the device type
information of the relay PLC that
was connected to will be
uploaded.
Switches the connection to the
selected network to enable
accessing it.
Downloads all component
parameters from the virtual
network on the computer to the
components in the actual network.
Uploads the network configuration
of the Communications Unit
selected in the Online Connection
Information Window, provided that
the network can be displayed and
accessed in the Workspace
Window.
Compares the virtual network on
the computer to the network
configuration of the actual
networks (without component
parameters). The target PLC must
be online and accessible.
Network
type
All networks
Ethernet only.
Offline
Menus
Online
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
OK
No
OK
No
OK
OK
OK
No
OK
OK
OK
No
No
OK
No
OK
No
OK
No
OK
1-35
1-6
Menus
1-6-1
Menus
Main
menu
Network
Sub-menu/command
Parameter
Edit
Write
Read
Transfer [PC to
Network]
Transfer
[Network to PC]
Compare
Move to upper network
Move to lower network
Rename Network
Change Network Address
Update Maintenance Information
Component
Parameter
Wizard
Edit
Load
Save
Download
Upload
Compare
Monitor
Reset
Start Special
Application
Start with
Settings Inherited
Start Only
1-36
Description
Enables editing the parameters of
the selected Controller Link
network.
Writes the parameters of the
selected component to a
component parameter file.
Reads the parameters from a
component parameter file to a
selected component.
Downloads all component
parameters or network parameters
from the virtual network on the
computer to the actual network.
Uploads the network configuration
and all component parameters or
network parameters from the
actual network to the virtual
network on the computer.
Compares the network
configuration and all component
parameters or network parameters
between the actual network and
the virtual network on the
computer.
Displays the next higher network
layer.
Displays the next lower network
layer.
Changes the network name.
Changes the network address.
Updates the device’s maintenance
information.
Enables setting component
parameters with a wizard (for
supported components only).
Enables editing the parameters of
the selected component.
Reads the parameters from a
component parameter file to a
selected component.
Saves the parameters of the
selected component to a
component parameter file.
Downloads the selected
component parameters to the
actual component.
Uploads the selected component
parameters from the actual
component.
Compares the selected
component parameters with those
in the actual component.
Enables monitoring the selected
component (for supported
components only).
Resets the selected component.
Starts the associated Support
Software for the selected
component or PLC, keeping the
CX-Integrator settings.
Starts the associated Support
Software for the selected
component or PLC, without
keeping the CX-Integrator
settings.
Network
type
All networks
Offline
Online
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
No
OK
No
OK
No
OK
DeviceNet
only
DeviceNet
only
No
OK
No
OK
All networks
OK
OK
No
No
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
OK
No
OK
No
OK
DeviceNet
only
No
OK
DeviceNet
only
All networks
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
DeviceNet
only
DeviceNet
only
All networks
1-6
Menus
1-6-1
Main
menu
Component
Sub-menu/command
IO table
Error Log
Mode Setting
Maintenance information
Status/Error of Communication Unit
Error Log of Communication Unit
Resister to
No applicable
another device devices
Change Node address
I/O Comment
Edit Device Comment
Tools
Start Data Link
Start Routing Table
NT Link tool
Auto online setting
DeviceNet
tool
Generic parameter
setting
Edit Configuration
file
Edit configuration
file
Install of plugin
module
Setup monitor
refresh timer
Parameter auto
update when I/O
size changed
Controller
Link tool
Ethernet tool
Network Diagnosis
Ping test
Broadcast node
search
Echoback
test between
PLC nodes
CPS file
Install CPS
EDS file
Install EDS
Create
Delete
Save
Description
Starts the I/O Table Component
online.
Display the CPU Unit error log
online.
Reads or changes the CPU Unit’s
operating mode online.
Displays the maintenance
information of the selected
component.
Displays the status and error
information on a Communications
Unit online.
Displays the error log of a
Communications Unit online.
Registers the current device to the
scan list in another device.
Changes the node address of a
component.
Enables editing the comments of a
DeviceNet device (component).
Enables changing the comment of
a component.
Starts the Data Link Component.
Starts the Routing Table
Component.
Automatically detects an
NS-series PT connected serially
via an NT Link to a CS/CJ-series
PLC.
Sends an explicit message.
Edits each settings file.
Edits a variety of setting files.
Enables installing a plug-in
module.
Set the monitor refresh timer for
the device monitor window.
Enables automatically updating
the slave I/O size registered in the
scan list in the master when a
slave I/O size is changed. The
default setting is OFF (not
automatically updated). Normally,
leave this function set to OFF.
Starts the Controller Link Network
Diagnosis Tool.
Starts the Ethernet ping test tool.
Uses IP broadcast to search for
nodes on Ethernet.
Starts the echoback test tool for
checking the communications
status of the network.
Installs a CPS file on the computer
and adds the component to the
CPS list.
Installs an EDS file on the
computer and adds the device to
the EDS list.
Creates a new EDS file on the
computer and adds the device to
the EDS list.
Deletes an EDS file from the EDS
list.
Saves an EDS file from the EDS
list in a file with a different name.
Network
type
All networks
Offline
Menus
Online
No
OK
No
OK
No
OK
DeviceNet
only
No
OK
All networks
No
OK
No
OK
DeviceNet
only
All networks
OK
No
OK
No
DeviceNet
only
DeviceNet
only
All networks
OK
No
OK
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
NT Link only
No
OK
DeviceNet
only
DeviceNet
only
DeviceNet
only
DeviceNet
only
DeviceNet
only
DeviceNet
only
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
All networks
No
OK
Ethernet only
No
OK
OK
OK
All networks
No
OK
OK
OK
DeviceNet
only
OK
OK
DeviceNet
only
OK
OK
DeviceNet
only
DeviceNet
only
OK
OK
OK
OK
1-37
1-6
Menus
1-6-1
Menus
Main
menu
Tools
Window
Help
Sub-menu/command
EDS file
Find
Close All
Next Docked
Previous
Docked
Cascade
Tile Horizontally
Tile Vertically
Help Contents
Online Registration
About CX-Integrator
1-38
Description
Searches for the specified EDS
file in the EDS list.
Closes all windows.
Moves the focus to the next
docked window.
Moves the focus to the previous
docked window.
Cascades the windows.
Tiles the windows horizontally.
Tiles the windows vertically.
Displays help.
Displays the online registration
window.
Displays version information.
Network
type
DeviceNet
only
All networks
Offline
Online
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
1-6
1-6-2
1-6-2
Menus
Pop-up Menus
Pop-up Menus
Online Connection Information Window
Pop-up Menu for the Relay PLC's Communications Settings
The following pop-up menu will be displayed if you right-click the relay PLC’s
communications settings line (starting with Offline) in the Online Connection Information
Window.
Pop-up menu item
Work Online
Auto Online
Edit Communication
Settings
Description
Connects to the relay PLC using the device
type settings on the computer.
For a serial connection, automatically
connects using the communications settings
in the PLC. (The device type settings of the
connected relay PLC will be uploaded.)
Used to change the device type settings of
the relay PLC on the computer. The Change
PLC Dialog Box is displayed.
Offline
OK
Online
No
OK
No
OK
No
Offline
No
Online
OK
Offline
No
No
No
No
No
Online
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Note: The following will be displayed when online.
Pop-up menu item
Offline
Description
Closes the connect and places the
CX-Integrator offline.
Pop-up Menu for Target PLC Online
Pop-up menu item
I/O table
Error Log
Mode Setting
Start Routing Table
Echoback test
between PLC nodes
Description
Starts the I/O Table Component.
Starts the PLC Error Component.
Changes the operating mode of the CPU Unit
Starts the Routing Table Component.
Starts the echoback test for checking the
communications status of the network.
1-39
1-6
Menus
1-6-2
Pop-up Menus
Pop-up Menu for Communications Units/Ports under TargetPLC Online
Pop-up menu
Description
Transfer [Network to PC]
Uploads the communications configuration
of the selected Communications Unit/port.
Enables accessing the selected
Communications Unit/port.
Starts the Data Link Component. (Controller
Link or SYSMAC Link only)
Starts the Routing Table Component.
Automatically detects the communications
settings of an NS-series PT that is
connected serially to the selected
Communications Unit/port, overwrites the
PLC serial port’s communications settings
to match them, and connects automatically.
Starts the Controller Link Network
Diagnostic Tool.
Starts the Ethernet ping test tool.
Starts the echoback test for checking the
communications status of the network.
Connect
Start Data Link
Start Routing Table
NT Link Tool - NT Link
Auto Online Setting
Controller Link Tool –
Network diagnosis
Ethernet tool – Ping test
Echoback test between
PLC nodes
1-40
Offline
Online
Not
Connected
connected
No
No
OK
No
OK
OK
No
OK
OK
No
No
OK
OK
--OK
No
OK
OK
No
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
1-6
1-6-2
Menus
Pop-up Menus
Network Configuration Window
Pop-up Menu for Components
PLCs
Pop-up menu
Parameter
Edit
Load
Save
Compare and Change Unit
Version
Display Error Log
Status/Error of
Communication Unit
Error Log of
Communication Unit
Connect to this PLC
Toggle Position
Copy
Paste
Delete
Edit Name
Edit Node Address
Start Special Start with
Application
Settings
Inherited
Start Only
Description
Edits the selected PLC’s parameters.
Reads the selected PLC’s parameters from
a file.
Saves the selected PLC’s parameters.
Compares the unit version of the actual
component (Unit) with the unit version
supported by the software on the computer.
Also changes the unit version of the
component on the computer to match the
unit version of the actual component (Unit).
Displays present CPU Unit errors and the
CPU Unit error log online.
Displays a Communications Unit’s status
and error information online.
Displays a Communications Unit’s error log
online.
Switches to the selected PLC as the target
PLC so it is possible to access that PLC.
Allows the network configuration to be read.
Moves a component’s icon above or below
the network line.
Copies the selected PLC.
Pastes the selected PLC in the network.
Deletes the selected PLC.
Changes the selected PLC’s name.
Edits the selected PLC’s node address.
Starts the associated application while
keeping the PLC model settings.
Starts the associated application
(CX-Programmer for a PLC).
Offline
Online
OK
OK
No
No
OK
No
OK
OK
No
OK
No
OK
No
OK
No
OK
OK
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
No
No
No
No
OK
OK
OK
1-41
1-6
Menus
1-6-2
Pop-up Menus
Other Components
Pop-up menu
Parameter
Edit
Load
Save
Toggle Position
Copy
Paste
Delete
Edit Name
Edit Node Address
Start Special
Start with
Application
Settings
Inherited
Start Only
Description
Edits the selected PLC’s parameters.
Reads the selected PLC’s parameters from
a file.
Saves the selected PLC’s parameters.
Moves a component’s icon above or below
the network line.
Copies the selected PLC.
Pastes the selected PLC in the network.
Deletes the selected PLC.
Changes the selected PLC’s name.
Edits the selected PLC’s node address.
Starts the associated application while
keeping the PLC model settings.
Offline
OK
OK
Online
No
No
OK
OK
OK
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
No
No
No
No
OK
Starts the associated application
(CX-Thermo for a Temperature Controller).
OK
OK
DeviceNet Networks
Sub-menu/command
Parameter
Wizard
Edit
Load
Save
Upload
Download
Compare
Monitor
1-42
Description
Enables setting device parameters with a
wizard (for supported devices only).
Enables editing device parameters.
Loads parameters from a device parameter
file.
Saves device parameters to a file.
Uploads device parameters from a device on
the network.
Downloads device parameters to a device on
the network.
Compare device parameters with the
parameters in a device on the network.
Enables monitoring a device on the network
(supported devices only).
Offline
Online
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
OK
No
OK
No
OK
No
OK
1-6
1-6-2
Sub-menu/command
Reset
Maintenance information
Resister to another device
Export
Comment list
NX-Server DDE
Setup File
NX-Server ONC
Setup File
ONC DRM Unit
Setup File
Cut
Copy
Paste
Delete
Change Node Address
Change Device Comment
I/O Comment
Start Special
Application
Properties
Start with
Settings
Inherited
Start Only
Description
Resets a device on the network.
Displays the maintenance information for the
selected device.
Registers the current device to the scan list in
another device.
Exports I/O comments in CSV format
(supported devices only).
Scan list information is output in the
NX-Server DDE Edition file format.
Scan list information is output in the
NX-Server ONC Edition file format.
Scan list information is output in the ONC
Master parameter file format.
Cuts the selected device.
Copies the selected device.
Pastes the device on the clipboard.
Deletes the selected device.
Changes the selected device’s node address.
Changes the selected device’s description
(comment).
Enables editing I/O comments.
Starts the associated application while
keeping the PLC model settings.
Starts the associated application.
Displays the properties of the device.
Offline
Menus
Pop-up Menus
Online
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
No
No
No
No
OK
No
OK
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
1-43
1-6
Menus
1-6-2
Pop-up Menus
Workspace Window
Pop-up Menu for the Project Name or Network
Pop-up menu
Selected
Open
Network
Insert Network
Project name
Delete
Network
Transfer [PC to Network]
Transfer [Network to PC]
Compare
Connect
Rename Network
Change Network Address
Copy
Paste
1-44
Project name
Description
Displays the network
configuration of the selected
network in the Network
Configuration Window.
Adds a new network on the
computer.
Deletes a virtual network
from the computer.
Downloads the network
configuration (including
component parameters) of a
virtual network on the
computer to the same
network address.
Uploads the network
configuration and
component parameters from
the actual network to the
virtual network on the
computer for the actual
network of the same
network address as the
virtual network.
Compares the virtual
network on the computer to
the network configuration of
the actual network (without
component parameters).
Enables access the virtual
network on the computer.
Changes the name of a
virtual network on the
computer.
Changes the network
address of a virtual network
on the computer.
Copies the selected
network.
Pastes the virtual network
that was copied offline.
OK
Online
Not
Connected
connected
OK
OK
OK
No
No
OK
No
No
No
No
OK
No
No
OK
No
No
OK
No
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
No
OK
No
No
OK
No
No
Offline
1-6
1-6-2
Pop-up menu
Parameter
Edit
Load
Save
Transfer
[PC to
Network]
Transfer
[Network
to PC]
Compare
Selected
Network
Menus
Pop-up Menus
Edits the network
parameters of a virtual
Controller Link network on
the computer (Controller
Link or SYSMAC Link only).
Reads the network
parameters from a network
parameter file to the
selected network.
Writes the selected
network’s network
parameters to a network
file.
Downloads the network
parameters from the
computer to the network.
Uploads the actual
network’s network
parameters to the computer.
OK
Online
Not
Connected
connected
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
OK
OK
No
No
No
OK
No
No
OK
Compares the computer’s
network parameters with the
actual network parameters.
No
No
OK
Description
Offline
1-45
1-6
Menus
1-6-3
Toolbars
1-6-3
Toolbars
The most commonly used functions are provided as icons on toolbars.
The following menu commands are allocated to these icons.
Icon
1-46
Description
Creates a new project.
Actual menu command
File - New
Opens a project file.
File - Open
Saves a project.
File - Save
Print.
File - Print
Print Preview.
File - Print Preview
Undo.
Edit - Undo
Redo.
Edit - Redo
Cuts devices.
Edit - Cut
Copies devices.
Edit - Copy
Pastes devices.
Edit - Paste
Switches between working offline and online
with the device type setting in the computer.
Enables changing device type settings on the
computer.
Automatically connects to the relay PLC
using the communications settings of the
PLC (supported for serial communications
only).
Downloads a network configuration created
offline in the Network Configuration Window
to the Communications Unit selected in the
Online Connection Information Window.
Uploads the network configuration of the
Communications Unit selected in the Online
Connection Information Window.
Compares a network configuration created
offline in the Network Configuration Window
with network configuration of the
Communications Unit selected in the Online
Connection Information Window.
Increases or decreases the magnification of
the components displayed in the Network
Configuration Window.
Displays the next higher network layer.
Network - Work Online
Displays the next lower network layer.
Network - Move to Lower network
Uploads network device information.
Network - Transfer [Network to PC]
Downloads network device information.
Network - Transfer [PC to Network]
Displays the windows in network
configuration mode.
Maintenance mode
View - Large Icons
Network - Communication Settings
Network - Auto Online
Network - Transfer [PC to Network]
Network - Transfer [Network to PC]
Network - Compare
View - Zoom
Network - Move to upper network
View - Large Icons Maintenance Mode
Displays the windows in detailed report
mode.
Device parameter wizard.
View - Detail
Component - Parameter - Wizard
Edits device parameters.
Component - Parameter - Edit
Icon
1-6
Menus
1-6-3
Toolbars
Description
Reads parameters from device parameter
files.
Saves device parameters in files.
Actual menu command
Component - Parameter - Read
Component - Parameter - Save
Uploads device parameters.
Transfer [PC to Component]
Downloads device parameters.
Transfer [Component to PC]
Maintenance information
Monitors supported network devices.
Component - Maintenance
information
Component - Monitor
Edits I/O comments.
Component - I/O Comment
Displays device properties.
Component - Properties
Adds new EDS files.
Tools - EDS file - Install EDS
Deletes EDS files.
Tools - EDS file - Delete
Saves a new EDS file with a new EDS file
name.
Inserts components.
Tools - EDS file - Save
Insert - Component
Searches for EDS files.
Tools - EDS file - Find
Displays EDS file properties.
View - Properties
1-47
Communications
Section 2 Basic Operations
This section describes the basic operations used for the CX-Integrator.
2
2-1
2-1
Basic Procedures
Basic Procedures
This section describes the overall procedures used for the CX-Integrator.
Basic procedure
Uploading Network Configurations
PLCs with Only One Network
Online
Communications Unit
PLCs with More Than One Network
Communications Unit
Uploading Network Configurations from Target PLCs Other than the Relay PLC
Reading Network Configurations and Parameters from Actual Networks and Saving
Them to Files Online
Designing DeviceNet and CompoWay/F Networks Offline
Reading Saved Parameters and Downloading Them Online to DeviceNet or
CompoWay/F Components
Directly Connecting the Computer Running CX-Integrator to CompoWay/F
Components without Going Through a PLC
Page
2-2
2-3
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
Uploading Network Configurations Online
The PLC that is initially connected online form the CX-Integrator is called the relay
PLC. The relay PLC is connected directly, either serially or though a network. The
network configuration and component parameters of the relay PLC can be uploaded.
PLCs with Only One Network Communications Unit
If the relay PLC (which is the target PLC when the online connection is first made) has
only one Network Communications Unit (see note), it is not necessary to create and
transfer a local network table.
Note: Network Communications Units include Ethernet Units, Controller Link Units, SYSMAC
LINK Units, DeviceNet Units, and FL-net Units. Serial Communications Boards/Units are
not included.
Overall Procedure
Start the CX-Integrator.
Connect online to the relay PLC.
Connect to a Communications Unit/port to
enable accessing it.
Upload the network structure.
Example: Select Component − Auto Online
from the menu bar to automatically connect
online using a serial connection.
Right-click the desired network in the Online
Connection Information Window and select
Connect from the pop-up menu.
Right-click and select Transfer [Network to
PC].
Network Configuration Example
Computer running CX-Integrator
Relay PLC (= target PLC)
Direct serial or
network connection
CS/CJ-series PLC
The network address will be 0.
One Network Communications Unit (Ethernet
Unit, Controller Link Unit, SYSMAC LINK
Unit, DeviceNet Unit, or FL-net Unit)
2-2
2-1
Basic Procedures
PLCs with More Than One Network Communications Unit
If the relay PLC has more than one Network Communications Unit (see note 1), it is
normally necessary to create and transfer a local network table (see note 2).
Select Tools − Start Routing Table to start the Routing Table Component, set the
local network table, and download it to the relay PLC.
Note 1: Network Communications Units include Ethernet Units, Controller Link Units,
SYSMAC LINK Units, DeviceNet Units, and FL-net Units. Serial Communications
Boards/Units are not included except in the following case: If serial ports are registered in the local network table to treat them as networks, the serial ports must be
treated as Network Communications Units, including the serial ports on the CPU
Unit.
Note 2: The local network table is one of the routing tables. It lists the unit numbers and
network addresses of the network Communications Units.
Number of Network Communications
Units
Local network table registration
Only 1
Not required
More than 1
Required
Overall Procedure
Start the CX-Integrator.
Connect online to the relay PLC.
Create the local network table.
Example: Select Component − Auto Online
from the menu bar to automatically connect
online using a serial connection.
Select Tools - Start Routing Table from the
menu bar.
Required
Transfer the local network table to the relay PLC
via the serial connection.
Connect to a Communications Unit/port to
enable accessing it.
Upload the network structure.
Create the local network table and select
Option − Transfer to PLC.
Right-click the desired network in the Online
Connection Information Window and select
Connect from the pop-up menu.
Right-click and select Transfer [Network to
PC].
Network Configuration Example
Computer running CX-Integrator
Relay PLC (= target PLC)
Direct serial or
network connection
CS/CJ-series PLC
At least one network address must be
assigned in the local network table.
More than One Network Communications Unit
(Ethernet Unit, Controller Link Unit, SYSMAC
LINK Unit, DeviceNet Unit, or FL-net Unit)
Note
The local network table must be transferred
when the relay PLC is still the target PLC to
register the correspondence between unit
numbers and network addresses.
A local network table must be registered in the CPU Unit when the target PLC has
more than one Network Communications Unit, except in the case outlined below.
Even if an online connection is made to a PLC, it will not be possible to upload or
download the network configurations unless a local network table is registered.
2-3
2-1
Basic Procedures
Note
The following case is an exception to the rule that a local network table must be registered if there are two or more Network Communications Units mounted.
Overview:
Procedure:
If a local network table is not registered and a direct serial connection is
made to a target PLC in which two or more Network Communications
Units are mounted, it will be possible to access only the network of the
Communications Unit with the lowest unit number.
In this case, the network address of each network will be 0 and the
network addresses will be displayed as “−” in the Online Connection
Information Window.
Connect online to the relay PLC. Open the Online Connection
Information Window and right-click the Network Communications Unit
with the lowest unit number and select Connect from the pop-up menu.
That Network Communication Unit’s network is the only network that will
be accessible.
Computer running CX-Integrator
After connecting online to the relay PLC, the Network Communications Unit will
be displayed in the Online Connection Information Window with the network
addresses given as “−”.
Right-click the Network Communications Unit with the smallest unit number and
select Connect from the pop-up menu to enable accessing that network.
Relay PLC (= target PLC)
Local Network Table Not Registered in PLC to which a Direct
Serial Connection Has Been Made:
CS/CJ-series PLC
Direct serial
communications
Access is possible only to the Network Communications Unit
with the smallest unit number, which is the Controller Link Unit
in this example.
Controller Link (network address = 0)
DeviceNet Unit’s unit number: 3
Ethernet (network address = 0)
Ethernet Unit’s unit number: 2
DeviceNet (network address = 0)
Controller Link Unit’s unit number: 1
2-4
More than One Network Communications Unit (Ethernet Unit,
Controller Link Unit, SYSMAC LINK Unit, DeviceNet Unit, or FL-net
Unit)
2-1
Basic Procedures
Uploading Network Configurations from Target PLCs other than the Relay
PLC
The network configuration of another PLC can be read via the PLC that was first
connected to the computer (known as the relay PLC). To read another PLC’s network
configuration, switch the target PLC from the relay PLC to the desired PLC connected.
At this point, it is possible to upload the configuration of the network (including
component parameters) of the network connected to that target PLC.
Note: When accessing a target PLC other than the relay PLC, observe the following two precautions, set routing tables, and transfer them to the PLCs.
• Always create local network tables and transfer them to the relay PLC and target PLC.
• When specifying a target PLC in another network, register both local network tables and
relay network tables in all of the PLCs on the path between the relay PLC and target PLC.
Overall Procedure
Start the CX-Integrator.
Connect online to the relay PLC.
Example: Select Component − Auto
Online from the menu bar to automatically
connect online using a serial connection.
Create the local network table.
Transfer the local network table to the relay
PLC via the serial connection.
Connect to a Communications
Unit/port to enable accessing it.
Required when there is
more than one Network
Communications Unit in
the relay PLC.
Create the local network tables
and relay network tables.
Required when the target PLC
is on a remote network.
Transfer the routing tables to all PLCs
between the relay PLC and target PLC.
Right-click the desired network in the Online
Connection Information Window and select
Connect from the pop-up menu.
Upload the network structure.
Switch the target PLC.
Right-click the target PLC in the
Network Structure Window and select
Connect to this PLC.
Connect to a Communications
Unit/port to enable accessing it.
Upload the network structure.
2-5
2-1
Basic Procedures
Reading Network Configurations and Parameters from Actual Networks
and Saving Them to Files Online
To simplify maintenance, the target PLC’s actual network configuration and all of the
DeviceNet and CompoWay/F component parameters can be uploaded and saved in a
project file (.cin) for each network.
Overall Procedure
Start the CX-Integrator.
Connect online to the relay PLC (= target PLC).
Example: Select Component - Auto Online
from the menu bar to automatically connect
online using a serial connection.
Create the local network table.
Select Tools - Start Routing Table from the
menu bar.
Transfer the local network table to the relay PLC
via the serial connection.
Connect to a Communications Unit/port to
enable accessing it.
Right-click the desired network in the Online
Connection Information Window and select
Connect from the pop-up menu.
Upload the network configuration.
Right-click and select Transfer [Network to
PC].
Save the project file (.cin).
2-6
Create the local network table and select
Option - Transfer to PLC.
Select Network - Parameter - Write to file
from the menu bar.
Required when there
is more than one
Network
Communications Unit
in the relay PLC
(= target PLC).
2-1
Basic Procedures
Designing DeviceNet and CompoWay/F Networks Offline
Networks can be designed on the CX-Integrator even before they have been installed.
Parameters for individual DeviceNet masters and slaves can be set.
Parameters for individual CompoWay/F slaves can be set.
The specified parameters can be saved in project files.
All DeviceNet device and CompoWay/F component properties are included in the
project file (.cin).
Overall Procedure
Start the CX-Integrator.
● DeviceNet Networks
● CompoWay/F Networks
Add devices to the virtual network.
Add CompoWay/F slaves to the virtual network.
Set slave parameters for slaves that require
setting.
Set CompoWay/F slave parameters.
Register slaves in the master.
Set master parameters.
Save everything in the project file (.cin).
2-7
2-1
Basic Procedures
Reading Saved Parameters and Downloading Them Online to DeviceNet
or CompoWay/F Components
All of the component parameters on a network can be downloaded to the actual
components from a previously saved project file (.cin) after the network has been
installed. Parameters can also be downloaded for individual components.
Overall Procedure
Start the CX-Integrator.
Select Network − Parameter − Read from
file from the menu bar.
Read network structure file.
Connect online to the relay PLC (= target PLC).
Create the local network table.
Transfer the local network table to the relay
PLC via the serial connection.
Select Tools - Start Routing Table from the
menu bar.
Create the local network table and select
Option − Transfer to PLC.
Connect to a Communications Unit/port to enable
accessing it.
Download parameters to the network or
to individual components.
2-8
Required when there
is more than one
Network
Communications Unit
in the relay PLC (=
target PLC).
Right-click the desired network in the Online
Connection Information Window and select
Connect from the pop-up menu.
Select Network − Transfer [PC to Network] or
Component − Download from the menu bar.
2-1
Basic Procedures
Directly Connecting the Computer Running CX-Integrator to CompoWay/F
Components without Going Through a PLC
Uploading the CompoWay/F network configuration is possible through a direction
connection from the CX-Integrator to CompoWay/F protocol components using
RS-232C or RS-485 communications without going through a PLC. Component
parameters can also be set.
Overall Procedure
Start the CX-Integrator.
Change the device type in the Change PLC
Dialog Box to CompoWay/F Device.
Connect online to the CompoWay/F component.
Upload the network structure.
Set the CompoWay/F component parameters.
Download parameters to the CompoWay/F
component.
2-9
2-2
2-2-1
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
Overview
2-2
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
2-2-1
Overview
To use the CX-Integrator, the computer must first connect online to a PLC connected
though a direct serial connection or another PLC in the network (known as the relay
PLC). Once the online connection is established with the relay PLC, another PLC can
be specified as the target PLC and accessed through the relay PLC.
Normally, the same PLC is both the relay PLC and the target PLC.
Computer running CX-Integrator
Relay PLC (= target PLC)
Direct serial or
network connection
CS/CJ-series PLC
First, connect online to
the relay PLC.
Serial
communications/network
communications to be
accessed
Note: If an online connection is made to the relay PLC, the same PLC will be both the relay PLC
and the target PLC. Once the relay PLC has been connected to online, the network configuration can be uploaded or the target PLC can be changed to a different PLC.
Computer running CX-Integrator
Relay PLC
Direct serial or
network connection
CS/CJ-series PLC
First, connect online to
the relay PLC.
Initially, the relay PLC and
the target PLC are the
same. The CX-Integrator is
normally used in this status
Target PLC
CS/CJ-series PLC
(The target PLC can be
changed later.)
Serial communications/network
communications to be accessed
After connecting online to the relay PLC, check for CPU Unit errors, eliminate the
cause of the errors, and clear the errors.
2-10
2-2
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
2-2-2
2-2-2
Procedures
Procedures
An online connection to the relay PLC can be established automatically or manually.
Automatic Online Connection
For automatic connections, the communications settings are automatically set to those
of the PLC (i.e., the user does not have to make any communications settings on the
computer).
1. Select Network − Auto Online from the menu bar or click the
icon.
The Auto Online Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select the connection method.
• If the connecting port at the PLC is a serial port (peripheral, RS-232C, or
RS-422/485), check the box for a serial connection (including when Serial-USB
conversion cable is used). From the Serial port of PC pull-down list, select the
COM port for the computer that is to be used.
• If the connecting port is the USB port on the NSJ-series or CP-series, select USB
connection.
Depending on the connection method selected, follow the procedures described
below.
2-11
2-2
2-2-2
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
Procedures
When Serial Connection Is Selected
1. Detection of the serial connection method will start and the Auto-Connecting Dialog
Box will be displayed.
2. If automatic connection with the PLC is successful, the online status and
information on the target PLC will be displayed in the Online Connection
Information Window.
Online displayed.
Relay PLC’s model settings
in the computer
Target PLC information
Online Connection
Information
Window
Information on accessible
Communications Units and ports
in the target PLC
Note 1:
The device type information that was uploaded can be checked offline by clicking
the
icon or selecting Network - Communications Settings from the menu
bar.
Note 2: Once an automatic connection has been made, switching between offline and
online is possible by clicking the
icon or selecting Network − Work Online
from the menu bar. If the network and node address settings for the relay PLC and
the target PLC are the same, the Unit that was connected immediately before will
be automatically connected again the next time online.
Note 3: When connecting online for the first time after opening a project, the target Unit will
be determined in the following order.
1. The Unit with the same network and node addresses.
2. When a routing table is set for the target PLC, the communicating Unit or port
with the lowest network address in the target networks.
When USB Connection Is Selected
(USB connection can be selected when connecting to an NSJ-series or CP-series.)
1. Detection of the selected connection method will start and the Auto-Connecting
Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. If automatic connection with the Controller is successful, just as with serial
connection, the online status and information on the target Controller will be
displayed in the Online Connection Information Window.
2-12
2-2
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
2-2-2
Procedures
Manual Online Connections
For a manual connection, the communications settings of the relay PLC on the
computer are set first before an online connection is made.
Communications Settings
Select Network − Communication Settings from the menu bar, click the
communications setting icon.
The Change PLC Dialog Box will be displayed.
2-13
2-2
2-2-2
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
Procedures
Item
Device Name
Device Type
Contents
Relay Device (fixed)
Series
Device Type
CS Series
CS1H
CS1G/CJ1G
CS1G-H
CS1H-H
CS1D-H
CS1D-S
CJ Series
CS1G/CJ1G
CJ1M
CJ1G-H
CJ1H-H
CP-Series
CP1H-XA
CP1H-X
NSJ Series
NSJ
-
Network Type
CPU Unit model
CS1H-CPU67/66/65/64/63(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45/44/43/42(-V1)
CS1G-CPU45H/44H/43H/42H
CS1H-CPU67H/66H/65H/64H/63H
CS1D-CPU67H/65H
CS1D-CPU67S/65S/44S/42S
CJ1G-CPU45/44
CJ1M-CPU23/22/21/13/12/11
CJ1G- CPU45H/44H/43H/42H
CJ1H-CPU67H/66H/65H
CP1H-XA@@@@-@
CP1H-X@@@@-@
G5D (Used for the NSJ5-TQ0@-G5D,
NSJ5-SQ0@-G5D, NSJ8-TV0@-G5D,
NSJ10-TV0@-G5D, and
NSJ12-TS0@-G5D.)
CompoWay/F
Device
Select CompoWay/F Device to connect
the computer running CX-Integrator
directly as a CompoWay/F slave using
serial communications.
Select one of the following network types.
Network type
Contents
Toolbus
Select to connect the computer with a direct serial
connection using the Toolbus protocol.
Note:
The Toolbus (peripheral) protocol is faster
than the SYSMAC WAY protocol. Serial
connections are generally made using this
network type.
SYSMAC WAY
Select to connect the computer with a direct serial
connection using the SYSMAC WAY protocol.
Note:
The SYSMAC WAY protocol enables 1:N
connections, which are not possible for the
Toolbus protocol.
Ethernet
Select to connect the computer directly to an Ethernet
network using the Ethernet UDP/IP protocol.
Ethernet (FINS/TCP)
Select to connect the computer directly to an Ethernet
network using the Ethernet TCP/IP protocol.
FinsGateway
Select to use FinsGateway for communications.
(Selected when using FinsGateway for all
communications.)
Controller Link
Select to connect the computer directly to a Controller
Link network through a Controller Link Support Board.
SYSMAC LINK
Select to connect the computer directly to a SYSMAC
LINK network through a SYSMAC LINK Support
Board.
CompoWay/F
Select to connect the computer with a direct serial
connection to a CompoWay/F slave.
USB
Select to connect the computer directly to an
NSJ-series NSJ Controller using a USB cable.
Click the Settings Button to display the Network Settings Dialog Box for each type of
network. Details are described here for Toolbus, SYSMAC WAY, and Ethernet. Refer
to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual for other methods.
2-14
2-2
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
2-2-2
Procedures
Toolbus
Click the Driver Tab and set the following settings as required.
Note
Port Name:
Select the computer’s COM port from the drop-down list.
Baud Rate:
Select the baud rate (bits/s) from the drop-down list.
Baud Rate Auto-Detect: Clear this selection to connect with the baud rate set on the
computer, ignoring the baud rate of the serial port on the
CPU Unit. To disable automatic detection of the baud rate,
the DIP switch on the CPU Unit must be set as follows:
For peripheral port connection: Pin 4 of the DIP switch must
be OFF (automatic detection of communications settings:
use Programming Console or CX-Integrator settings).
For RS-232C port connection: Pin 5 of the DIP switch must
be ON (automatic detection of communications settings: use
CX-Integrator settings).
For automatic baud rate detection with the Toolbus protocol, the baud rate setting on
the computer is used and the serial port on the CPU Unit is set to the same value.
For automatic online connections, the communications settings (device type, serial
communications mode, baud rate, and other communications settings) of the serial
port on the CPU Unit are detected and the device type information on the computer
are set to the same values.
2-15
2-2
2-2-2
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
Procedures
SYSMAC WAY
Click the Driver Tab and set the following settings as required.
Port Name:
Select the computer’s COM port from the drop-down list.
Baud Rate:
Select the baud rate (bits/s) from the drop-down list.
Data Format:
Select the data length (data bits), parity, and number of stop bits from the
pull-down lists.
Data Bits:
7 or 8 (Settings of 4 to 6 are not used.)
Parity: Even, odd, none, mark (no parity), or space (no parity)
Stop bits:
1 or 2
Ethernet
Set the network address of the Ethernet network connected to the
computer.
Set the node address of the connected Ethernet
Unit.
Set the network address of the Ethernet network connected to the PLC
to which the connected Ethernet Unit is mounted.
2-16
2-2
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
2-2-2
Field name on
Network Tab Page
FINS Source
Address
FINS Destination
Address
Item
Procedures
Contents
Settings
Network
Set the network address of the Ethernet network
connected to the computer.
Network
Set the network address of the Ethernet network
connected to the PLC to which the connected
Ethernet Unit is mounted.
Node
Set the node address of the connected Ethernet
Unit.
Set the node address set on the rotary switches
on the Ethernet Unit.
Set the maximum frame length.
Do not change the default setting.
1 to 127
Use the default setting of 0
if there is only one Ethernet
Unit in the PLC and only
one network is being used.
1 to 127
Use the default setting of 0
if there is only one Ethernet
Unit in the PLC and only
one network is being used.
1 to 254
Frame
Length
Response
Timeout
This is the timeout time for receiving a response.
Increase this setting only if there are many
communications errors.
CS/CJ-series PLCs: 2,000
bytes
CVM1/CV-series PLCs:
1,950 bytes
2s
Click the Driver Tab and set the following settings as required.
Select whether FINS node addresses are to be automatically generated
from IP addresses on the computer. This option is selected by default.
Clear this selection to enable using an IP address
table or combined method.
Set the computer’s IP address according to the IP
address table.
Set the UDP port number.
Normally, the default value of 9600 is used.
Set the IP address of the connected
Ethernet Unit.
2-17
2-2
2-2-2
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
Procedures
Field name on
Driver Tab Page
Workstation Node
Number
Contents
Auto-detect
Selected
(default).
Selection
cleared.
IP Address
Port Number
The node address of the computer is
set when the Auto-detect selection is
cleared (IP address table or combined
method).
Set the IP address of the connected
Ethernet Unit.
Note:
The IP address setting
method and default depends on
the model of Ethernet Unit being
used. Refer to the operation
manual of the Ethernet Unit for
details.
Set the UDP port number. Normally,
the default value of 9600 should be
used.
Settings
The node number (node address) is
automatically created based on the IP
address of the computer. The node
number on the left will be grayed out
and the node number will be the
least-significant digit of the IP address of
the computer at that time.
Clear this selection to enable using an
IP address table or combined method.
The workstation node address on the
left can be input when the selection is
cleared.
1 to 254
Default IP address for the
CS1W-ETN21/CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet
Unit:
192.168.250.FINS_node_address
1 to 65535
Default: 9600
Setting the IP Address Table at the CX-Integrator (Computer)
When Ethernet is selected as the network type in the communications settings, and
the IP conversion for any node on Ethernet (i.e., an Ethernet Unit or personal
computer) is set for either the IP address table method or the combined method, the
IP address table at the CX-Integrator (personal computer) must be preset. (For details
on IP conversion, refer to the Ethernet Units Construction of Networks Operation
Manual.)
1. Select Communication Settings from the Network Menu.
2. The Change PLC Dialog Box will be displayed.
3. Select Ethernet as the network type, and click the Settings Button. The Network
Settings [Ethernet] Dialog Box will be displayed.
2-18
2-2
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
2-2-2
Procedures
4. For Network, under FINS Destination Address, enter the network address of the
network to be connected, and then click the OK Button.
5. Select IP address table setting from the Network Menu.
6. The IP address table setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
In the IP address column, enter the IP address corresponding to the FINS node
address. Enter the IP address for all nodes for which the conversion is set for either
the IP address table method or the combined method, and click the OK Button to
complete the setting. It need not be input for nodes for which the conversion is set
for automatic generation (either dynamic or static).
Note
If the IP address table is not set correctly, the target node may not be displayed when
network uploads are executed.
2-19
2-2
2-2-3
Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
CPU Unit Troubleshooting
Online Connection
Click the
Online Connection Icon or select Network − Work Online from the
Online Icon will be displayed in the Online
menu bar to go online. The
Connection Information Window. The following will appear in the status bar at the
same time:
2-2-3
CPU Unit Troubleshooting
Right-click the desired target PLC in the Online Connection Information Window and
select Error Log. Refer to 2-4 Switching the Target PLC for details.
The PLC Errors Dialog Box will be displayed. Check the errors that have occurred in
the CPU Unit and perform any required error processing.
For example, the PLC Errors Window above will be displayed when an I/O Table
Setting Error has occurred in a CJ-series PLC. In this case, the registered I/O table
does not match the actual I/O table. There are three ways to correct this error: change
the actual Units in the PLC, create a new I/O table, or edit and transfer the I/O table.
2-20
2-3
Uploading Network Configurations and Checking for Communications
Unit Errors
2-3-1
Overview
2-3
Uploading Network Configurations and Checking for Communications Unit Errors
2-3-1
Overview
With the CX-Integrator, the actual network configuration including component
parameters can be uploaded from the target PLC and displayed in the Network
Configuration Window.
Network Configuration Window
Computer running
CX-Integrator
Relay PLC
Upload
Target PLC
CS/CJ Series PLC
Example: Controller Link
Access must be enabled by executing Connect.
Note: The network that is uploaded will be automatically added to the Workspace Window.
After uploading the network, check the connection status of the nodes and check the
status of Communications Units (check for errors).
2-3-2
Procedure
Right-click a Communications Unit or port below TargetDevice in the Online
Connection Information Window and select Connect from the pop-up menu.
Accessing the Communications Unit or port will be enabled and the icon to the left will
change to
. (If the network has been uploaded but a network address is not
displayed (Net(-) displayed), it will be necessary to select the desired network in the
Workspace Window, right-click, and select Connect. )
Then select Transfer [Network to PC].
Note: When uploading the network configuration of a target PLC through the relay PLC, select
and right-click the desired target PLC on the network and select Connect to this PLC
from the pop-up menu to make that PLC the target PLC. Refer to 2-4 Switching the Target PLC for details.
Uploading the Serial Network Configuration Connected to a CPU Unit
CompoWay/F Networks
Right-click a CPU Unit under TargetPLC in the Online Connection Information Window
and select Connect from the pop-up menu. The serial port will become accessible.
(If the network has been uploaded but a network address is not displayed (Net(-)
displayed), it will be necessary to select the desired network in the Workspace
Window, right-click, and select Connect. )
Right-click the CPU Unit again and then select Transfer [Network to PC].
Refer to 7-2 CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a PLC for details.
2-21
2-3
Uploading Network Configurations and Checking for Communications
Unit Errors
2-3-2 Procedure
NT Link
Right-click a CPU Unit under TargetPLC in the Online Connection Information Window
and select Connect or NT Link Auto Online Setting from the pop-up menu.
NT Link Auto Online Setting
With an NT Link, the NT Link baud rate and maximum PT unit number for an
NS-series PT with a model number ending in V1 or later serially connected to a
CS/CJ-series PLC via an NT Link can be automatically detected and set for the serial
port on the CS/CJ-series PLC. This is called NT Link Auto Online Setting.
Refer to Communications Section 8 NT Links, 8-1 NT Link Connection Auto-detect
Function for details.
Computer running
CX-Integrator
Relay PLC
PLC serial port settings automatically changed to the
serial port settings of the NS-series PTs.
Overwritten
CS/CJ-series PLC
Serial connection
(Toolbus or Host
Link) or network
connection
NS-series PT with model
number ending in V1 or later
Automatic serial
connections for NT Link
Note: The settings of the PLC serial port will be as follows after automatic connection:
Serial communications mode:
1:N NT Link
Port baud rate:
Same as NS-series PT
Maximum unit number in NT Link Mode: Same as NS-series PT unless it is set to 0, in
which case 1 will be used.
Uploading the Network Configuration Connected to a Communications
Unit
Use the following procedure to upload the network configuration of a network
connected to an Ethernet, Controller Link, SYSMAC LINK, or DeviceNet
Communications Unit.
1. With the CX-Integrator online, right-click a Communications Unit under TargetPLC
in the Online Connection Information Window and select Connect from the pop-up
menu.
The same operation can be executed by double-clicking the Communications Unit.
2. Right-click the Communications Unit/port and select Transfer [Network to PC].
2-22
2-3
Uploading Network Configurations and Checking for Communications
Unit Errors
2-3-2
Procedure
Select the desired Communications
Unit, right-click, and select Transfer
[Network to PC].
The
icon
indicates that the
network structure
can be uploaded.
3.
1) For networks other than Ethernet:
The dialog box for selecting the data to be transferred will be displayed.
The selection is fixed for DeviceNet.
Clicking the Transfer Button is will start the transfer. Clicking the Cancel Button
will cancel it.
2-23
2-3
Uploading Network Configurations and Checking for Communications
Unit Errors
2-3-2 Procedure
2)
For Ethernet networks:
The following message will be displayed for verification.
Check to confirm that no nodes other than OMRON Ethernet Units or FinsGateway
exist in the same segment, and then click the OK Button. The dialog box will then
be displayed for selecting the data to be transferred.
Click the Transfer Button to display the following Searching Node Setting Dialog
Box.
Check the range of FINS node addresses on the Ethernet network for the
applicable nodes and input the minimum and maximum values of the range. Then
click the OK Button. The transfer will start.
If the range of addresses is unknown, select All (1 to 254), and then click the OK
Button.
Note
Click the Cancel Button to cancel the transfer.
If the default settings are use for the minimum and maximum nodes (1 for both),
the network configuration will be uploaded only from the node with node address
1. Always set the minimum and maximum node addresses.
If nodes in the specified range do not exist, it will take 20 seconds per node to
search for it. If All (1 to 254) is selected, it will take up to approximately 85 minutes
for the transfer to be completed. The transfer will also take longer if a maximum
address is entered that is higher than any of the existing node address.
!Caution Do not use this function if a node exists for something other than an OMRON
Ethernet Unit or FinsGateway within the same segment on Ethernet, and when the
Ethernet network system is in operation. When an Ethernet network configuration
upload is executed, an OMRON FINS command is sent to all nodes in the
segment. Therefore, if a node exists for something other than an OMRON Ethernet
Unit or FinsGateway, the FINS command will not be received at that node and
unexpected operation may occur.
2-24
2-3
Uploading Network Configurations and Checking for Communications
Unit Errors
2-3-3
Checking and Correcting Communications Unit Errors
4. The network configuration uploaded from the Unit will be displayed in the Network
Configuration Window.
The target PLC is displayed
with a green border.
The window
background will be
gray when online.
5. Check the connection status of the nodes. To check the CPU Unit and
Communications Units for errors, right-click the node in the Network Configuration
Window and select Error Log or Status/Error of Communication Unit from the
pop-up menu.
2-3-3
Checking and Correcting Communications Unit Errors
Checking a Communications Unit’s Status and Errors
Right-click the target PLC in the Network Configuration Window and select
Status/Error of Communication Unit from the pop-up menu.
The PLC Unit Status Dialog Box will be displayed. In this example, a Controller Link
Unit is selected.
Note: The Communications Unit’s status and error information can be saved as a CSV file by
clicking the Save Button, so the Communications Unit’s status at that point can be read
from the CSV file later and analyzed.
2-25
2-3
Uploading Network Configurations and Checking for Communications
Unit Errors
2-3-3 Checking and Correcting Communications Unit Errors
Checking a Communications Unit’s Error Log
Right-click the target PLC in the Network Configuration Window and select Error Log
of Communication Unit from the pop-up menu.
The Error log Dialog Box will be displayed. In this example, a Controller Link Unit is
selected.
The Communications Unit’s error log (stored in the Unit’s EEPROM) will be displayed,
showing each error’s Error occurring time, Error code, Detail information, and Content
of Error. Refer to the Communications Unit’s Operation Manual or details on individual
errors.
Note: The Communications Unit’s error log can be saved as a CSV file by clicking the Save
Button, so the Communications Unit’s error log at that point can be read from the CSV file
later and analyzed.
2-26
2-4
Switching the Target PLC
2-4-1
2-4
Switching the Target PLC
2-4-1
Overview
Overview
When an online connection is made from the CX-Integrator to the relay PLC, initially
the same PLC will be both the relay PLC and the target PLC and the Communications
Units and ports of the relay PLC will be displayed in the Online Connection Information
Window.
From there, the network configuration can be uploaded and other PLC on a network
specified to make it the target PLC.
2-4-2
Procedure
1. Right-click a Communications Unit or port connected of the relay PLC and select
Connect to enable accessing the Communications Unit or port. (If the network has
been uploaded but a network address is not displayed (Net(-) displayed), it will be
necessary to select the desired network in the Workspace Window, right-click, and
select Connect.) The
icon will be displayed to indicate the selected
Communications Unit or port can be accessed.
2. Right-click the Communications Unit/port again and select Transfer [Network to
PC] to upload the network configuration.
The network configuration will be displayed in the Network Configuration Window.
Network Structure Window
2-27
2-4
2-4-2
Switching the Target PLC
Procedure
3. Right-click a PLC on the network and select Connect to this PLC from the pop-up
menu.
Network Structure Window
Right-click the PLC for which the
network structure is to be uploaded
and select Connect to this PLC from
the pop-up menu.
The selected PLC will be set as the target PLC.
Here, the target PLC is
switched to this PLC.
Example: CS1G-CPU45H
The new target PLC
can be confirmed here.
4. Right-click a Communications Unit/port from the new target PLC and select
Transfer [Network to PC] to upload the network configuration.
2-28
2-5
Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline
2-5-1
Overview
2-5
Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline
2-5-1
Overview
For a DeviceNet or CompoWay/F network, the network configuration can be created
offline, the component parameters can be set, and both the configuration and
parameters can be saved in a network configuration file even before the network has
been installed.
All of the component parameters on a network can be downloaded to the actual
components from a previously saved network configuration file after the network has
been installed.
2-5-2
Procedure
CompoWay/F Networks
1. Offline, select Insert − Network. The Select Network Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select CompoWay/F and click the OK Button.
3. Select a component from the CPS Tab Page in the Component List Window and
drag and drop it in the Network Configuration Window.
Drag and drop
4. The Unit Type Select Dialog Box will be displayed.
2-29
2-5
2-5-2
Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline
Procedure
For example, when CompoWay/F slaves, such as Temperature Controllers, are
dragged and dropped, the communications unit number of the CompoWay/F slave
is set.
In the following example, a PLC CPU Unit model number has been dragged and
dropped:
Connecting CompoWay/F to a CPU Unit's RS-232C Port
Select the model number of the CPU Unit and click the OK Button.
Note: Always select the same CPU Unit model number as the one selected in the Component List Window.
The Port Select Dialog Box will be displayed.
If the peripheral port is being used for the CompoWay/F connection, select 01:
Peripheral and click the OK Button. If the RS-232C port is being used for the
CompoWay/F connection, select 02: Host Link and click the OK Button.
2-30
2-5
Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline
2-5-2
Procedure
Connecting CompoWay/F to a Serial Port on a Serial Communications Unit
Select the model number of the Serial Communications Unit and click the OK Button.
The Unit Number Select Dialog Box will be displayed. Select a unit number between
00 and 15 and click the OK Button.
Connecting CompoWay/F to a Serial Port on a Serial Communications Board
• Select the model number of the Serial Communications Board and click the OK
Button.
• The Unit Number Select Dialog Box will be displayed. Click the OK Button.
• The Port Select Dialog Box will be displayed. Select the serial port to which to
connect CompoWay/F and click the OK Button. Select 01: Host Link 1 for port 1 or
02: Host Link 2 for port 2.
2-31
2-5
2-5-2
Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline
Procedure
5. The component will be registered in the Network Configuration Window as shown
below.
In this example, a PLC CPU Unit and two Temperature Controllers have been
dragged and dropped:
DeviceNet Networks
Adding the Master
1. Offline, select Insert − Network. The Select Network Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select DeviceNet and click the OK Button.
3. Select a device (component) from the EDS (DeviceNet) Tab Page in the
Component List Window and drag and drop it in the Network Configuration
Window.
4. The device will be registered in the Network Configuration Window as shown
below.
Drag and drop
2-32
2-5
Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline
2-5-2
Procedure
Adding Slaves
Slaves are added just like the master was, by dragging and dropping them from the
Component List Window.
Drag and drop
Example of Devices Registered by Dragging and Dropping
Note
Devices can also be added to the network by right-clicking the device in the Component List Window and selecting Add to Network from the pop-up menu.
2-33
2-5
2-5-3
2-5-3
Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline
Changing Node Addresses
Changing Node Addresses
Component − Change Node Address
Node address between 0 and 63 will be automatically assigned to devices as they are
added to the network.
Use the following procedure to change a node address that has been assigned.
1 Select the device for which the node address is to be changed.
2 Select Component − Change Node Address from the menu bar. Alternately,
right-click the device and select Change Node Address from the pop-up menu.
The Change Node Address Dialog Box will be displayed.
3 Change the node address to a value between 0 and 63 and click the OK Button.
The node address will be changed.
Repeat this operation to change any other node address in the network that should
be different.
2-34
2-5
Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline
2-5-4
2-5-4
Editing Components (Devices)
Editing Components (Devices)
Deleting Components (Devices)
Edit - Delete
Use the following procedure to delete a component from a network.
1 Select the component to be deleted. (More than one device can be selected.)
2 Select Edit.
3 Select Delete.
4 The following dialog box will be displayed to confirm deletion. Click the Yes Button
to delete the selected component.
If a slave device that is registered in the master device is deleted, the registration in
the master device will be deleted and the slave will be deleted from the scan list
automatically.
Copying Components (Devices)
Edit - Copy
Use the following procedure to copy a component on a network.
1 Select the component to be copied. (More than one device can be selected.)
2 Select Edit.
3 Select Copy.
The component and its parameters will be copied to the CX-Integrator's clipboard.
Pasting Components (Devices)
Edit - Paste
Use the following procedure to paste a component from the CX-Integrator's clipboard
into a network.
1 Select the component at the location where the component on the clipboard is to
be pasted. If no component is selected, pasted components will be added to the
end of the network.
2 Select Edit − Paste.
An unused node address will be assigned to the newly inserted component.
Changing the Locations of Components (Devices)
Use the following procedure to move the locations in which components are displayed
on a network.
1 Left-click the component to be moved and drag it.
2 Drop the component at the new location where it is to be displayed.
3 The new component will be moved to the new display location.
2-35
2-5
2-5-4
Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline
Editing Components (Devices)
DeviceNet Networks
Use the following procedure to change the display locations of DeviceNet components
in the Network Configuration Window.
1 Right-click the device to be moved and drag it.
2 Drop the device at the new location where it is to be displayed.
3 The new device will be moved to the new display location.
Example 1: Moving Device #00 to the Location of Device #02
Right-click.
Drop.
Drag.
Other devices will move
in this direction.
Example 2: Moving Device #00 to the Location of Device #02
Right-click.
Drop.
Drag.
Other devices will move
in this direction.
Changing DeviceNet Device Comments
Component - Change Device Comment
Comments can be registered for DeviceNet devices registered in a network.
The default comment is the product name.
Use the following procedure to change the device comment.
1 Select the device to be edited.
2 Select Component - Change Device Comment.
The Change Device Comment Dialog Box will be displayed.
2-36
2-5
Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline
2-5-4
Editing Components (Devices)
3 Change the device comment and click the OK Button.
Device comments can be displayed by moving the mouse pointer to the locations
of devices in the Network Configuration Window.
Note
Device comments will be displayed when devices are pointed at on a network. In the
detailed display, comments are displayed in the Comment column.
2-37
2-6
2-6-1
Manipulating Component Parameters
Overview
2-6
Manipulating Component Parameters
2-6-1
Overview
With the CX-Integrator, the parameters on components in the Network Configuration
Window can be set. They can also be uploaded from, downloaded to, and compared
with the parameters of the components on the actual network.
Applicable Components and Parameters
The components and parameters that can be manipulated are listed in the following
table.
Component
CPU Unit
Serial Communications
Boards/Units
Controller Link Units
SYSMAC LINK Units
Ethernet Units
CompoWay/F slaves
DeviceNet Units
DeviceNet slaves
Parameters
Part of the PLC Setup:
Communications settings for the peripheral and RS-232C ports
and FINS protection settings
Serial port communications settings
Unit communications settings and data link settings
Unit communications settings and data link settings
Unit communications settings
CompoWay/F slave device parameters
DeviceNet Unit device parameters
DeviceNet slave device parameters
Note: The applicable component (Unit) when a PLC is selected on a Network Configuration
Window depends on the type of communications and the serial port being used, as
shown in the following table.
Communications
Ethernet
Controller Link
SYSMAC LINK
CompoWay/F
NT Link
2-38
Applicable Unit
Ethernet Unit
Controller Link Unit
SYSMAC LINK Unit
• Serial port on CPU Unit: CPU Unit
• Serial port on Serial Communications Unit/Board:
Serial Communications Unit/Board
2-6
Manipulating Component Parameters
2-6-2
2-6-2
Procedure
Procedure
Setting Parameters Offline
To set parameters offline, right-click a component in the Network Configuration
Window and select Edit Parameters. The Edit Parameters Dialog Box will be
displayed. This dialog box can be used to set component parameters.
Example for a PLC
Right-click the PLC and select Edit Parameters, or double-click the PLC. The
following dialog box will be displayed.
The following list will be displayed if the down arrow is clicked in the Displayed Field.
The following parameters can be set here: Communications settings for the peripheral
and RS-232C ports and FINS protection settings across networks.
Select the appropriate value for each item from the pull-down lists and click the OK
Button to change the settings.
Note 1: The items displayed here are the same ones as displayed on the Peripheral Port, Host
Link Port, and FINS Protect Tab Pages of the PLC Setup in the CX-Programmer.
2-39
2-6
2-6-2
Manipulating Component Parameters
Procedure
Note 2: Set other settings in the PLC Setup using the CX-Programmer PLC Setup settings.
Example for a CompoWay/F Slave Component.
Right-click a CompoWay/F slave component and select Edit Parameters. The Edit
Parameter Dialog Box will be displayed.
Downloading and Uploading Parameters from Actual Components
Uploading and Downloading Component Parameters for Individual Components
Downloading
To download component parameters set on the computer to the actual component,
select Transfer [PC to Unit] in the Edit Parameter Dialog Box. The parameters will be
downloaded to the actual component.
Note
Depending on the Unit, it may be necessary to restart in order to make the downloaded
settings effective. Click the OK Button in the verification dialog box, and restart the
Unit.
Uploading
To upload component parameters from the actual component to the computer, select
Transfer [Unit to PC] in the Edit Parameter Dialog Box. The parameters will be
uploaded from the actual component.
Comparing
Note
To compare the component parameters set on the computer to those in the actual
component, and select Compare in the Edit Parameter Dialog Box. The parameters
set for the component on the computer will be compared with those set in the actual
component.
When downloading parameters to the actual component, the unit version of the
component on the computer and the unit version of the actual component must be the
same.
If the following message is displayed when attempting to download parameters, the
unit version of the component on the computer is different from the unit version of the
actual component.
Use the following procedure to change the unit version of the component on the
computer to the same unit version as the actual component and then download the
parameters.
1. Right-click the PLC in the Network Window and select Compare and Change Unit
Version from the pop-up menu.
2-40
2-6
Manipulating Component Parameters
2-6-2
Procedure
2. The results of comparing the unit version of the component on the computer to the
unit version of the actual component will be displayed as shown below.
•The following display will appear if the unit version of the component on the
computer is newer than the unit version of the actual component.
•The following display will appear if the unit version of the component on the
computer is older than the unit version of the actual component.
3. Click the Yes Button to change the unit version of the component on the computer
so that it is the same as the unit version of the actual component.
4. The unit version of the component on the computer will be changed and the
following dialog box will be displayed. Click the OK Button.
5. Changing the unit version of the component on the computer may make some of
the parameters that have been set invalid. Check the parameter settings and then
download the parameters.
Uploading and Downloading Parameters for All Components in the Network
Downloading
To download all of the component parameters set in the virtual network on the
computer to all components on the actual network, right-click the network in the
Workspace Window and select Transfer [PC to Network] from the pop-up menu. All
parameters will be downloaded to all of the components on the actual network with the
same network address.
2-41
2-6
2-6-2
Manipulating Component Parameters
Procedure
A list will be displayed of the Units to which the parameters will be downloaded.
Clicking the OK Button will start the transfer. Clicking the Cancel Button will cancel
the transfer.
For DeviceNet, the following dialog box will be displayed.
Clicking the Yes Button will start the transfer. Clicking the No Button will cancel the
transfer.
Uploading
To upload all of the component parameters set in the components on the actual
network to all components in the virtual network on the computer, right-click the
network in the Workspace Window and select Parameter - Upload from the pop-up
menu. All parameters will be uploaded from all of the components on the actual
network with the same network address.
2-42
2-7
Uploading, Downloading, and Comparing Network Parameters
2-7-1
Overview
2-7
Uploading, Downloading, and Comparing Network Parameters
2-7-1
Overview
With the CX-Integrator, the parameters of networks in the Workspace Window can be
uploaded from, downloaded to, and compared with the parameters of the actual
network.
Applicable Networks
The networks and parameters for which network parameters can be uploaded,
downloaded, and compared are listed in the following table.
Network
Controller Link networks
SYSMAC LINK networks
2-7-2
Parameters
Network parameters:
Maximum node address, number of polling nodes, allowable
number of send/receive frames
Network parameters:
Communications cycle time, maximum node address, number
of polling nodes, allowable number of send/receive frames
Procedure
Setting Parameters Offline
To set parameters offline, right-click a network in the Workspace Window and select
Parameter − Edit. The Edit Parameter Dialog Box will be displayed. The network
parameters can be set in this dialog box.
Downloading and Uploading Parameters from Actual Networks
Downloading
To download the parameters set for the virtual network on the computer to an actual
network, right-click the network in the Workspace Window and select Parameter –
Transfer [PC to Network] from the pop-up menu. The parameters will be downloaded
to the actual network with the same network address.
Uploading
To upload the parameters set for the actual network to the virtual network on the
computer, right-click the network in the Workspace Window and select Parameter Transfer [Network to PC] from the pop-up menu. The parameters will be uploaded
from the actual network with the same network address.
Comparing
To compare the parameters set for the virtual network on the computer to the
parameters of an actual network, right-click the network in the Workspace Window
and select Parameter - Compare from the pop-up menu. The parameters set for the
virtual network on the computer will be compared with those set in the actual network
with the same network address.
2-43
2-8
2-8-1
Comparing Network Configurations
Overview
2-8
Comparing Network Configurations
2-8-1
Overview
The configuration of a virtual network on the computer can be compared to the
configuration of an actual network. The model numbers of all nodes are also
compared.
Component parameters are not compared.
Network Structure Window
Computer running
CX-Integrator
Relay PLC
Structure compared
Results of
comparison
(Node model numbers are also compared. )
Target PLC
CS/CJ-series PLC
CompoWay/F
Temperature
Controller
2-8-2
Smart Sensor
Procedure
1. Right a network in the Workspace Window and select Connect from the pop-up
menu. Accessing the network will be enabled and the icon to the left will change to
.
If the network has been uploaded but a network address is not displayed (Net(-)
displayed), it will be necessary to select the desired network in the Workspace
Window, right-click, and select Connect.
2. Right-click the network and select Compare from the pop-up menu.
For an Ethernet network, the following dialog box will be displayed.
Check to confirm that no nodes other than OMRON Ethernet Units or FinsGateway
exist in the same segment, and then click the OK Button.
!Caution Do not use this function if a node exists for something other than an OMRON
Ethernet Unit or FinsGateway within the same segment on Ethernet, and when the
Ethernet network system is in operation. When an Ethernet network configuration
upload is executed, an OMRON FINS command is sent to all nodes in the
segment. Therefore, if a node exists for something other than an OMRON Ethernet
Unit or FinsGateway, the FINS command will not be received at that node and
unexpected operation may occur.
3. The network configuration of the virtual network will be compared to the
configuration of the network with the same network address and the results will be
displayed.
Note: The virtual networks on the computer correspond to actual networks with the same network addresses.
2-44
2-9
File Operations
2-9-1
2-9
File Operations
2-9-1
Overview
Overview
The following files can be saved and read by the CX-Integrator.
File name
Project files
Network
configuration
files
File name
extension
.cin
Contents
Connection information to the Relay
PLC
Overall network configuration of the
target PLC including parameters
DeviceNet configuration of the
target PLC including parameters
Note:
Each file contains only
one network.
Network configuration for Controller
Link networks connected directly to
the target PLC
Parameters for individual DeviceNet
devices (master or slave)
Parameters for all components
except for DeviceNet devices
Note:
These files do not
include Temperature Controller
information.
Controller Link user-set data link
tables
Network structure
files
.npf
Controller Link
node files
.csv
Component
parameter
files
DeviceNet device
parameter files
CompoWay/F
component
parameter files
.dvf
Data link
files
Controller Link
data link table files
.cl2
SYSMAC LINK
data link table files
.sl3
SYSMAC LINK user-set data link
tables
.rtg
Routing tables of the target PLC
FINS local routing table files
Note
.xml
Storage location
when downloaded
---
All DeviceNet
slaves on the
network
--All DeviceNet
slaves
All components
CPU Bus Unit
setup area in the
parameter area of
the CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit
setup area in the
parameter area of
the CPU Unit
Parameter area in
the CPU Unit
Network configurations and device parameters can be saved individually in network
configuration files and component parameter files.
Doing so will enable quicker system recovery when a failed device is replaced because
the parameter file can be read to quickly reset the replaced device.
2-45
2-9
2-9-2
2-9-2
File Operations
Procedures
Procedures
Saving Files
Project Files (.cin)
1. Select File − Save or File − Save as from the menu bar.
The Save As Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Specify the directory and file name and click the Save Button. The default name is
NewProject.cin.
DeviceNet Network Structure Files (.npf)
1. Double-click a DeviceNet network in the Workspace Window to make the network
active in the Network Configuration Window.
2. Select File − Export − Network from the menu bar.
The Network Structure (npf). Export DeviceNet List (CSV) Dialog Box will be
displayed.
3. Select the type of file to be saved (.npf or .csv) and click the Save Button.
Note
2-46
The registered device parameters will be saved along with the network configuration.
2-9
File Operations
2-9-2
Procedures
Component Parameter Files
DeviceNet Device Parameter Files (.dvf)
1. Select a device in a DeviceNet network in the Network Configuration Window.
2. Select Component – Network – Parameter - Write to file from the menu bar.
CompoWay/F Component Parameter Files (.xml)
1. Select a component in a CompoWay/F network in the Network Configuration
Window.
2. Select Component − Network − Parameter − Write to file from the menu bar.
A dialog box to specify the folder and file name in which to save the component
parameters will be displayed.
3. Specify the folder and file name and click the Save Button.
The file will be saved.
Reading Files
Project Files (.cin)
1. Select File − Open from the menu bar.
The Open Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select the project file and click the Open Button.
The project file will be read.
Network Configuration Files
DeviceNet Network Structure Files (.npf)
1. Select File - Import - Network from the menu bar.
The Open Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select a DeviceNet configuration file (.npf) and click the Open Button.
The DeviceNet network configuration in the file will be added to the Workspace
Window.
Component Parameter Files
DeviceNet Device Parameter Files (.dvf)
1. Select a device in a DeviceNet network in the Network Configuration Window.
2. Select Component - Parameter - Read from file from the menu bar.
The DeviceNet device parameter file will be read.
CompoWay/F Component Parameter Files (.xml)
1. Select a component in a CompoWay/F network in the Network Configuration
Window.
2. Select Component - Parameter - Read from file from the menu bar.
The CompoWay/F component parameter file will be read.
DeviceNet Comment Lists (.csv)
1. Select a device in a DeviceNet network in the Network Configuration Window.
2. Select File – Export - Component - Comment Lists from the menu bar.
Device type
Master device
Slave device
Exported comment data
Comment for the master (if one exists) and comments for
devices registered in the scan list
If more than one connection is supported for a slave
device registered in the scan list, only the comment for
the connection used by the master device will be
exported.
Comment for the slave
If more than one connection is supported for a slave
device, the comments for all connections will be exported
even if they are not registered in the master device.
2-47
2-9
2-9-2
File Operations
Procedures
Note
Exporting Master Unit Device Parameters to Special Files
Device parameters for OMRON DeviceNet Master Units and DeviceNet Units
(CVM1-DRM21-V1, C200HW-DRM21-V1, and CS1W-DRM21(-V1)) can be exported to
files for NetXServer for DeviceNet or DRM_UNIT files for Open Network Controllers.
Use the following procedure to export device parameters for OMRON DeviceNet Master
Units and DeviceNet Units.
1 Select the Master Unit.
2 Select Network − Parameter − Save from the menu bar.
3 Select the export type.
The three export types listed in the following table are
supported.
Export type
NetXServer DDE setting file
NetXServer ONC setting file
ONC master setting file
Contents
Scan list information in NetXServer DDE Edition file format
Scan list information in NetXServer ONC Edition file format
Scan list information in ONC master parameter setting file
format
4 If valid devices are registered in the scan list, a dialog box will be
displayed to specify the folder and file name.
5 Specify the folder and file name and click the Save Button.
The data will be exported to a file.
Refer to the hardware and software manuals for the specific product for application
methods of the exported files.
Note
2-48
Some of the comment data exported in CSV format can be used in the
CX-Programmer's conversion tables by taking the data through spreadsheet software.
2-10
Target PLC Online Operations
2-10-1
2-10
Target PLC Online Operations
2-10-1
Overview
Overview
With the CX-Integrator, the following operations are possible for the target PLC.
• Creating, editing, and transferring I/O tables
• Displaying CPU Unit errors
• Changing the CPU Unit operating mode
2-10-2
Procedure
Right-click the target PLC online. The following pop-up menu will be displayed.
Popup menu
IO table
Error Log
Mode Setting
Start Routing Table
Echoback test
between PLC nodes
Function
Starts the I/O table component.
Starts the PLC Error Component.
Changes the operating mode of the CPU Unit
Starts the Routing Table Component.
Starts an echoback test to check the network communications
status.
I/O Tables (Online Only)
If IO table is selected, the PLC I/O Table Dialog Box (I/O Table Component) will be
displayed.
2-49
2-10
Target PLC Online Operations
2-10-2 Procedure
To upload the I/O tables, select Options − Transfer from the PLC from the menu
bar.
Displaying Current Errors and Error Logs (Online Only)
If Error Log is selected, the PLC Errors Dialog Box will be displayed.
Errors Tab: All current errors are displayed.
Error Log: A total of 20 error records will be registered in the error log (or up to the
maximum number of error records supported by the PLC).
Messages: Messages generated by execution of the MSG instruction will
be displayed.
Changing the Operating Mode (Online Only)
If Mode Setting is selected, the PLC Mode Setting Dialog Box will be displayed. The
operating mode of the CPU Unit can be changed.
Select Program, Run, or Monitor in the Operating Mode Field and click the Set Button.
Click the Read Button to display the current operating mode of the target PLC in the
Online Status field.
Starting the Routing Table Component
If Start Routing Table is selected, the Routing Table Component will start.
Echoback Test between PLC Nodes
Selecting Echoback test between PLC nodes starts an echoback test between the
PLC nodes. For details on this operation, refer to 9-2 Echoback Test between Nodes.
2-50
2-11
Starting Specified Applications
Overview
2-11
Starting Specified Applications
2-11-1
Overview
When starting specified applications, a dialog box is displayed for selecting
applications for individual components.
2-11-2
Procedure
1. Right-click the component in the Network Configuration Window, and select Start
Special Application – Start with Settings Inherited or Special Application –
Start Only from the pop-up menu.
2. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Select any of the applications to display an explanation of that application.
3. To start a special application, select it and click the OK Button.
2-51
2-12
Printing
Procedure
2-12
Printing
File − Print
This section describes the procedure for printing device parameters and comments
from the currently displayed network configuration.
Use the following procedure to print.
1 To print only part of the device parameters or comments, select the devices for
which to print.
2 Select File − Print.
If DeviceNet devices were selected, the following dialog box will be displayed.
3 For DeviceNet devices, select the range of devices for which to print.
All Devices:
Prints data for all devices in the network configuration.
Selected Device:
Prints data for only the selected devices.
Only one of these options can be selected.
4 Select the data to print.
Device Parameter: Prints the device parameters.
I/O Comments:
Prints device comments.
Only one of these options can be selected.
5 If necessary, click the Properties Button and set the printer.
The printer settings will depend on the printer being used.
6 Click the OK Button.
The data will be printed.
If comments are being printed, the following comments will be printed depending
on the device.
Device type
Master device
Slave device
2-52
Printed comment data
Comment for the master (if one exists) and comments for devices
registered in the scan list
If more than one connection is supported for a slave device registered
in the scan list, only the comment for the connection used by the
master device will be printed.
Comment for the slave
If more than one connection is supported for a slave device, the
comments for all connections will be printed even if they are not
registered in the master device.
Communications
Section 3 Routing Tables
This section describes how to set the routing tables.
3
3-1 Routing Table Overview
3-1-1 Definition of Routing Tables
3-1
Routing Table Overview
3-1-1
Definition of Routing Tables
To transfer data between networks, it is necessary to create tables that specify the
paths from the local PLC's Communications Units (such as a Controller Link Unit) to
the networks in which the other PLCs are connected. These tables are called routing
tables.
Routing tables consist of the following two tables.
1) Local network table
2) Relay network table
Note: Routing tables are required in any of the following cases.
1. Required when communicating (using message communications or remote
programming/monitoring from the CX-Programmer) with a PLC in a network other than
the local network.
2. Required when two or more Communications Units are mounted to a single PLC (i.e.,
under a single CPU Unit). Routing tables are not required when just one
Communications Unit is installed in each PLC and those Communications Units are
connected in a single network.
3. Required when routing tables are set in two or more nodes in the same network.
Local Network Table
The local network table lists the unit number and network address of the
Communications Units mounted in each PLC in the local network. A local network
table is required to distinguish between network addresses when two or more
Communications Units are mounted in a single PLC.
When data is being transferred from the PLC to a destination network address, the
local network table indicates which Communications Unit can be used to send data to
the destination network address.
Local Network Table
Unit number
Local network address
Unit number:
Local network address:
Unit number of the Communications Unit
Address of the network to which the Communications
Unit is connected
Unit number 00
Unit number 01
Unit number 02
Local Network Table
Unit number
Local network address
00
1
01
2
02
3
Network address 1
Network address 2
Network address 3
The unit number is the number (0 to 15) set on the rotary switch on the front of each Communications Unit.
The network address is the address of the network (1 to 127) of the network to which the Unit belongs.
Set these values when creating the local network table in the routing tables.
3-2
3-1 Routing Table Overview
3-1-1 Definition of Routing Tables
Relay Network Table
The relay network table indicates the network address and node address of the first
relay node when data is being sent to a destination network other than a network to
which the PLC is connected. The destination network is reached by following these
relay nodes.
Relay Network Table
Destination network address
Relay network address
Destination network address:
Relay network address:
Relay node address
Address (1 to 127) of the final destination network
Address (1 to 127) of the network containing the first relay node
in the path to the destination network
Node address of the first relay node in the path to the destination
network
Relay node address:
Example: The following example shows the routing tables that route communications
from PLC1 (network address 1, node address 1) to PLC4 (network address 3, node
address 2).
Relay node PLC2
Local node PLC1
Node address 3 (Unit number 0)
Node address 1
(Unit number 1)
Node address 1
(Unit number 0)
Relay node PLC3
Node address 2
(Unit number 0)
Network address 1
Target node PLC4 Node address 2
(Unit number 0)
Node
address 1
(Unit
number 1)
Network address 3 (destination network)
Network address 2
PLC1 Local Network Table
Local
network
Unit number
address
0
1
PLC1 Relay Network Table
Destination Relay
Relay
network
network
node
address
address
address
2
1
3
3
1
3
To go to network address 3, first it is
necessary to go to node address 3 in
network address 1.
PLC2 Local Network Table
Unit number Local
network
address
0
1
1
2
PLC3 LOCAL NETWORK TABle
Unit number
2
network
0
2
1
3
The local network table shows that it is
necessary to pass through unit number
1 in the local CPU Rack To go to
network address 3.
PLC3 Relay Network Table
PLC2 Relay Network Table
Destination Relay
Relay
network
network
node
address
address address
3
Local
address
2
To go to network address 3, it is
necessary to go to node address 2 in
network address 2.
Destination Relay
network
network
address
address
1
Relay
node
address
2
PLC4 Local Network Table
Unit number Local
network
address
0
3
PLC4 Relay Network Table
Destination Relay
Relay
network
network
node
address
address
address
1
2
3
3
1
1
1
Cases when a Relay Network Table Is Required (Local Network Table also Required)
No communications between networks:
Communications required between networks:
Set only local network tables.
Both local network tables and relay network
tables are required.
Multi-layer Network
Network 1
Network 2
Communications
Unit
Communications
Unit
Communications
Unit
Communications
Unit
When routing tables are required, both local network tables and relay network tables
must be set.
3-3
3-1 Routing Table Overview
3-1-2 Network Conditions That Require Routing Tables
3-1-2
Network Conditions That Require Routing Tables
Routing tables must be set for the following network conditions.
Mounting Two or More Communications Units (See Note) to a Single CPU Unit
Routing table required.
Communications
Unit
Communications
Unit
Routing tables are not required when just one Communications Unit is installed in
each PLC and those Communications Units are connected in a single network.
Routing table not required.
Communications
Unit
Communications
Unit
Communications
Unit
Note: Network Communications Units include Controller Link Units, Ethernet Units,
CS/CJ-series DeviceNet Units, SYSMAC LINK Units, and SYSMAC NET Link Units.
Communicating with a PLC in Another Network
Routing tables are required when transferring FINS messages between networks or
using the CX-Programmer's remote programming/monitoring functions between
networks.
Setting Routing Tables in Two or More Nodes in the Same Network
Note
3-4
The following, however, is an exception. In this case, a local network table does not
need to be registered even if there is more than one Network Communications Unit.
If a local network table is not registered, network access will be possible to only the
network of the Communications Unit with the smallest unit number when a direct serial
connection is made to a target PLC.
3-1 Routing Table Overview
3-1-3 Routing Table File Types Supported by the CX-Integrator
3-1-3
Routing Table File Types Supported by the CX-Integrator
The CX-Integrator supports the following two kinds of routing table files.
File type
Functions
FINS local routing
table files
Create or edit the routing table for the PLC connected
directly to the CX-Integrator. Create the file for the network
structure, read the created files, and transfer them to the
directly connected PLC.
These files are used when the network starts.
Note: It is also possible to read routing table files (*.rtg)
created with Support Software such as SYSMAC
Support Software, CV Support Software, and
Controller Link Support Software.
Create or edit routing tables for all of the PLCs in the
network containing the PLC connected directly to the
CX-Integrator.
After configuring the network (transferring the routing table
to each node, connecting to the network, and completing
settings), the routing tables can be read through the
network and edited to create the FINS network routing
table file.
These files are used for maintenance after the network is
configured.
FINS network
routing table files
Note
3-1-4
File name
extension
.rtg
.rt3
When connecting online through Ethernet, the FINS network routing table cannot be
set or transferred if there is even one node in the network that does not automatically
generate an Ethernet IP address from the FINS node address. Be sure that all of the
nodes will automatically generate IP addresses when using Ethernet.
Starting the Routing Table Component
The Routing Table Component can be started with either of the following methods.
Method 1:
While online, right-click the Communications Unit or Port in the Online Connection
Information Window select Start Routing Table from the popup menu.
Method 2:
While offline, select Tools - Start Routing Table from the menu bar.
Method 3:
While online, right-click the target PLC in the Online Connection Information Window
select Start Routing Table from the popup menu.
3-5
3-1 Routing Table Overview
3-1-5 Operating Procedures Prior to Routing Table Transfer
3-1-5
Operating Procedures Prior to Routing Table Transfer
This section describes the operating procedures necessary to create the routing tables
for the first time up to the point where the files are transferred to the PLCs.
Note
When configuring the network, connect the CX-Integrator directly to each node (CPU
Unit) that will participate in the network and set the routing tables (FINS local routing
tables).
Network Configuration Procedures
Creating the FINS Local Routing Tables Online
Connect online with the PLC directly connected to the CX-Integrator.
Select Network – Auto Online or Network – Work Online from the CX-Integrator's menu bar.
Start the Routing Table Component. (Start the PLC routing table.)
Right-click the Communications Unit or Port in the Online Connection Information Window select Start Routing Table from
the popup menu, or select Tools - Start Routing Table from the CX-Integrator's menu bar.
Create the FINS local routing tables (in the PLC routing tables).
Create the local network table.
Create the relay network table.
Set the gateway counter. (CS/CJ-series CPU Units must be unit version 3.0 or later.)
Click the SIOU Tab when the PLC routing tables are displayed, right-click the local PLC's icon, and select Set Gateway
Counter from the menu.
Check the routing tables for errors.
Select Options – Check Routing Table for errors from the PLC routing table menu.
Transfer the routing tables to the PLC (from the computer to the directly connected PLC).
Select Options – Transfer to PLC from the PLC routing table menu.
Save the created routing tables.
Select File – Save Local Routing Table File from the PLC routing table menu.
Update the display in the Online Connection Information Window.
In the Online Connection Information Window, select View – Update of Online Information Window .
3-6
3-1 Routing Table Overview
3-1-5 Operating Procedures Prior to Routing Table Transfer
Creating the FINS Local Routing Tables Offline
Start the Routing Table Component. (Start the PLC routing tables.)
Select Tools – Start Routing Table from the CX-Integrator's menu bar.
Select the type of routing table. (Select FINS local routing tables.)
Select FINS Local from the Select Network Dialog Box.
Create the FINS local routing tables (in the PLC routing tables).
Create the local network table.
Create the relay network table.
Set the gateway counter. (CS/CJ-series CPU Units must be unit version 3.0 or later.)
Click the SIOU Tab when the PLC routing table is displayed, right-click the local PLC's icon, and select Set Gateway
Counter from the menu.
Check the routing tables for errors.
Select Options – Check Routing Table for errors from the PLC routing table's menu.
Save the created routing tables.
Select File – Save Local Routing Table File from the PLC routing table's menu.
Connect online with the PLC that is directly connected to the CX-Integrator (making it the target PLC).
Select Network – Auto Online or Network – Work Online from the CX-Integrator's menu bar.
Start the Routing Table Component. (Start the PLC routing tables.)
Right-click the Communications Unit or Port in the Online Connection Information Window select Start Routing Table from
the popup menu, or select Tools - Start Routing Table from the CX-Integrator's menu bar.
Read the saved routing tables.
Select File – Open Local Routing Table File from the PLC routing table menu.
Transfer the routing tables to the PLC (from the computer to the target PLC).
Select Options – Transfer to PLC from the PLC routing table menu.
Update the display in the Online Connection Information Window.
In the Online Connection Information Window, select View – Update of Online Information Window .
3-7
3-1 Routing Table Overview
3-1-5 Operating Procedures Prior to Routing Table Transfer
Procedures after Network Configuration
Connect the CX-Integrator online to each node (CPU Unit) in the network, and read
and edit each node's FINS local routing table in the FINS Network Routing Table
Window.
All of the FINS local network tables read from the network's PLCs can be saved
together in the FINS network routing table file.
Note: After the network is configured, use the FINS network routing table when reading and
editing (via the network) the routing tables of all nodes in the network.
Connect the CX-Integrator online with a PLC in the network.
Select Network – Communication Settings – Network Settings from the CX-Integrator's menu bar and specify the
network address and node address of the PLC to be connected online.
Start the Routing Table Component. (Start the PLC routing tables.)
Select Tools – Start Routing Table from the CX-Integrator's menu bar.
Select the type of routing tables. (Select FINS network routing tables.)
Select FINS Network from the Select Network Dialog Box.
Read the routing tables from the network (from a PLC on network to the computer).
Select Options –Transfer from PLC from the PLC routing table menu.
Edit the FINS local routing tables (in the PLC routing tables) of each PLC in the network.
Check the routing table for errors.
Select Options – Check Routing Table for errors from the PLC routing table menu.
Transfer the routing tables to the PLC (from the computer to a PLC in the network).
Select Options – Transfer to PLC from the PLC routing table menu.
Save the FINS local routing tables as a FINS network routing table file.
Select File – Save Network Routing Table File from the PLC routing table menu.
Update the display in the Online Connection Information Window.
In the Online Connection Information Window, select View – Update of Online Information Window .
3-8
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-1 Routing Table Setting Example
3-2
Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-1
Routing Table Setting Example
This section explains how to create and transfer the FINS local routing tables for the
following network structure.
Example: Routing from PLC1 to PLC3
Local node PLC1
Relay node PLC2
Node address 1
(Unit number 0)
Node address 3
(Unit number 4)
Target node PLC3
Node address 1
(Unit number 5)
Node address 2 (Unit number 0)
Network address 1
Send to node address 2 in
network address 2 to send
to target node.
Network address 2
Transfer routing
table required in
PLC1.
Transfer routing
table required in
PLC3.
Transfer routing
table required in
PLC2.
PLC1 Local Network Table
Unit number
0
PLC3 Local Network Table
PLC2 Local Network Table
Local network address
1
Go through unit number 0 to send to
network address 1.
Unit number
4
5
Unit number
0
Local network address
1
2
Go through unit number 5 to send to network
Local network address
2
Shows that communications frames from
network address 2 go to unit number 0.
address 2.
PLC3 Relay Network Table
PLC1 Relay Network Table
Destination
network
address
2
Relay network
address
Relay node
address
1
3
Destination
network
address
1
Relay network
address
Relay node
address
2
1
To go to network address 2, it is necessary to go
The communications result must be returned to
to node address 3 in network address 1.
PLC1 as a response. To go to network address
1, first it is necessary to go to unit number 0 in
network address 2.
All of the following routing tables must be created and transferred for this example
network.
PLC1
Local Network Table
Unit number
Local network address
0
1
Relay Network Table
Destination network
address
Relay network address
Relay node
address
2
1
3
PLC2
Local Network Table
Unit number
4
5
Local network address
1
2
PLC3
Local Network Table
Unit number
Local network address
0
2
Relay Network Table
Destination network
address
Relay network address
Relay node
address
1
2
1
3-9
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-2 Creating the FINS Local Routing Tables
3-2-2
Creating the FINS Local Routing Tables
This section shows how to set the routing tables (FINS local routing tables) for PLC1,
which is connected directly to the CX-Integrator.
Online Operations
Creating the Local Network Table Online
Create PLC1's local network table online.
1. Verify that PLC1 is connected directly to the CX-Integrator and select Tools – Start
Routing Table.
Alternately, right-click the Communications Unit or Port in the Online Connection
Information Window select Start Routing Table from the popup menu.
2. The PLC Routing Table Window will be displayed in the Main View format.
3. Click the Table View Tab at the bottom of the PLC Routing Table Window to switch
to the Table View format.
3-10
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-2 Creating the FINS Local Routing Tables
4. Input the corresponding unit number and network address and click the OK Button.
For PLC1, input unit number 0 and local network address 1.
PLC1 Local Network Table
Unit number
0
Local network address
1
Input the appropriate settings in the local network tables for PLC2 and PLC3, as
shown below.
PLC2
PLC3
Local Network Table
Local Network Table
Unit number
4
5
Local network address
1
2
Unit number
0
Local network address
2
Menu Items in the PLC Routing Table Window
Main menu
File
Edit
Options
Sub-menu/command
New
Open Local Routing Table File
Save Local Routing Table File
Open Network Routing Table
File
Save Network Routing Table
File
Add Remote Network
Add SIOU
Always On Top
Main View
Zoom Out
Zoom In
Transfer to PLC
Transfer from PLC
Delete Routing Table
Active Routing Table
Deactive Routing Table
Verify Routing Table
Check Routing Table for errors
Automatic Network Search
Show File Information
Help
Help Topics
About
Functions
Initializes (clears) the FINS local routing table.
Opens a FINS local routing table file (.rtg extension).
Saves a FINS local routing table file (.rtg extension).
Opens a FINS network routing table file (.rt3
extension).
Saves a FINS network routing table file (.rt3
extension).
Adds a relay network table.
Adds a local network table.
The PLC Routing Dialog Box will always be
displayed in the front of the windows.
Reduces the Main View display.
Enlarges the Main View display.
Transfers the edited routing tables to the PLC that is
directly connected online.
Reads the edited routing tables from the PLC that is
directly connected online.
Deletes the routing tables in the registered PLC that
is directly connected online.
Enables the routing tables. (See note.)
Disables the routing tables. (See note.)
Compares the edited routing tables to the routing
tables in the PLC that is directly connected online.
Checks the created routing tables.
(Cannot be used.)
Inputs the author, title, and comment information to
be saved in the routing table file.
Displays help.
Displays the Routing Table Component's version
information.
Note: The Enable/Disable function is supported by C-series PLCs (Controller Link) only.
3-11
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-2 Creating the FINS Local Routing Tables
Note
The local network table can also be set using the following procedure.
1. Click the Main View Tab and select Edit – Add SIOU.
2. The Enter SIOU Details Dialog Box will be displayed.
Input the CPU SIOU (unit number) and local network address.
Input the unit number.
Input the
address.
local
network
The local network table will be added to the PLC Routing Table Window (Main View).
Note
Creating the Serial Port's Local Network Table:
A local network table can be created for the serial port in the CPU Unit or a Serial
Communications Board or Unit (Version 1.2 or later) so that the serial port can be
specified instead of the Communication Unit's unit number. Creating the local network
table allows the serial port to be managed in the network.
Example 1:
When an NS-series PT is connected to a serial port, the PT's screen data can be
transferred from NS-Designer (Version 3 or later) through Ethernet.
Example 2:
The serial gateway to Host Link FINS can be used across networks.
1. Click the SIOU Tab in the PLC Routing Table Window.
The CPU Unit's serial port and the serial ports of Serial Communications
Boards/Units (Unit version 1.2 or later) will be displayed in the directory tree.
2. The following steps show how to set the local network table for each serial port.
Serial Communications Board or Unit:
For a Serial Communications Unit, right-click the Port 1 or Port 2 Icon below the
unit number and select Insert PORT. For a Serial Communications Board,
right-click the Port 1 or Port 2 Icon below unit 225 and select Insert PORT.
3-12
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-2 Creating the FINS Local Routing Tables
When the local network table is set for the
CPU Unit's built-in serial port, the serial
port can be set instead of the
Communications Unit's unit number.
Click the SIOU Tab
Note:
For an Inner Board, the Special I/O Unit number of the Board itself is 225, but the
Special I/O Unit numbers of the ports are 228 for port 1 and 229 for port 2.
CPU Unit's Built-in Serial Port:
Right-click the Unit 225 or Unit 252 icon and select Insert CPU SIOU.
When the local network table is set for the
Serial Communication Board/Unit's serial port,
the serial port can be set instead of the
Communications Unit's unit number.
Click the SIOU Tab.
3. The Enter SIOU Details Dialog Box will be displayed.
Set the serial port's local network address in the Local Network Number Field and
click the OK Button.
The local network table will be registered for the serial port.
3-13
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-2 Creating the FINS Local Routing Tables
Note
The serial port's CPU SIOU value (unit number) is allocated automatically, so it cannot
be changed. The following FINS unit addresses (decimal) are allocated.
Serial Communications Unit
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
Serial Communications Board
CPU Unit
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
80 hex + 04 hex ×
unit number
81 hex + 04 hex ×
unit number
E4 hex (228 decimal)
E5 hex (229 decimal)
FD hex (253 decimal)
FC hex (252 decimal)
A Unit and the Unit's serial port cannot be registered in the local network table at the
same time.
Setting the Relay Network Table Online
Set the relay network table for PLC1 online.
1. Click the Table View Tab at the bottom of the PLC Routing Table Window to switch
to the Table View format.
2. Input the destination (remote) network address, relay network address, and relay
node address and click the OK Button.
3-14
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-2 Creating the FINS Local Routing Tables
3. When the relay network table is set in the PLC Routing Table Window, the display
automatically changes to the Main View format.
Local node's
unit number: 0
Relay node address: 3
Destination network address: 2
Local network address: 1
Note
The relay network table can also be set using the following procedure.
1. Click the Main View Tab and select Edit – Add Remote Network.
2. The Enter SIOU Details Dialog Box will be displayed.
Input the CPU SIOU (unit number) and local network address.
Input the relay node
address.
Input
the
remote
network address.
The relay network table will be added to the PLC Routing Table (Main View).
3-15
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-2 Creating the FINS Local Routing Tables
Offline Operations
Creating the Local Network Table Offline
Create the local network table for PLC1 offline.
1. Select Tools - Start Routing Table from the menu bar.
2. The Select Network Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select FINS Local from the list and click the OK Button.
3. The PLC Routing Table Window will be displayed in its Main View format.
Refer to steps 3 and 4 in Creating the Local Network Table Online for the rest of the
procedure.
Creating the Relay Network Table Offline
After the local network table has been created offline, the next step is creating the
PLC1 relay network table offline.
Refer to Setting the Relay Network Table Online on page 3-14 for details on creating
the relay network table.
3-16
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-3 Setting the Gateway Counter
3-2-3
Setting the Gateway Counter
Use the following procedure to set the gateway counter in the PLC.
To set the gateway counter, the routing tables must be displayed in the PLC Routing
Table Window. The gateway counter can be set offline or online.
Function of the Gateway Counter
In a FINS network, a GCT value (gateway counter: number of allowed bridge passes)
is set in each FINS command frame's FINS header when a FINS command is sent or
a FINS response is returned. When a FINS response is received, this GCT is
automatically decremented by the number of times that the message passed across
network layers. The following examples illustrate the function of the GCT value.
When GCT = 02 hex, up to 3 network layers can be crossed.
When GCT = 07 hex, up to 8 network layers can be crossed. (The network must be
configured for PLC models with the GCT set to 07 hex.)
Setting the Gateway Counter
Setting the Gateway Counter Value for each PLC Model
The allowed settings for the GCT value depend upon the PLC model.
CS/CJ-series Units Version 3.0 and Later
The GCT value can be set to 02 hex or 07 hex.
Set the GCT value in the Gateway Counter Setting Dialog Box when creating the
routing tables.
Setting the Gateway Counter in a FINS Local Routing Table:
1. Click the SIOU Tab at the bottom of the PLC Routing Table Window and right-click
the local PLC's icon.
3-17
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-3 Setting the Gateway Counter
Setting the Gateway Counter in a FINS Network Routing Table:
1. Click the Network Tab at the bottom of the PLC Routing Table Window, right-click
the icon of a PLC in the network, and select Set Gateway Counter.
2. The Gateway Counter Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select Standard or Expand and click the OK Button.
Standard: Up to 3 level crossings (GCT = 02 hex)
Expand: Allows 4 to 8 level crossings (GCT = 07 hex)
The gateway counter value is displayed in the Main View, Overview, and Table
View windows.
Main View
Overview
Table View
CS/CJ-series Units Version 2.0
The GCT (gateway counter) is fixed at 07 Hex. The GCT cannot be set for a maximum
of 3 network layer crossings. The maximum number of network crossings is always 8
layers max.
When CX-Programmer version 5.0 or a later version is being used, the
Standard/Expand setting in the Gateway Counter Setting Dialog Box is ignored. When
the routing tables are transferred to a Version 2.0 CS/CJ-series Unit, the GCT value is
always set to 07 Hex and operates in Expand Mode.
Pre-Version 2.0 CS/CJ-series Units
The GCT (gateway counter) is fixed at 02 Hex. In this case, the maximum number of
network crossings is always 3 layers max.
When CX-Programmer version 5.0 or a later version is being used, the setting in the
Gateway Counter Setting Dialog Box is ignored and the Standard setting is always
selected. If the Expand setting has been set, the routing tables cannot be transferred.
3-18
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-3 Setting the Gateway Counter
Note
More than 3 network layer crossings (8 max.) are allowed with CS/CJ-series Units with
Version 2.0 or later ratings.
However, up to 8 network layer crossings are allowed only when the destination of the
FINS command is a CPU Unit. If the destination of the FINS command is not a CPU
Unit, the maximum number of network layer crossings is 3.
Note
When the maximum number of network layer crossings is set to 3, it is possible to
combine Version 2.0 or later CS/CJ-series Units with other models.
If the maximum number of network layer crossings is set between 4 and 8, only
Version 2.0 or later CS/CJ-series Units can be used in the network. (Models other than
Version 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series Units cannot be included.) If other models are
used, a routing error (end code 0501 to 0504 Hex) may occur in a relay PLC or the
response may not be returned properly to the source node.
Note
The connection between the computer and relay node can be checked with the Check
connection to Relay Node command.
The checking procedure is as follows:
1. Display the PLC Routing Table Window in Main View format and move the cursor
over the relay node's icon, as shown above.
2. Right-click over the icon and select Check connection to Relay Node from the
pop-up menu.
3. The check results will be displayed in a Routing Table Dialog Box, like the one
below.
If you click the Overview Tab, the following display will appear.
Relay node address: 3
This example completes the procedure for creating a directly connected PLC's routing
tables.
3-19
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-4 Checking Routing Tables for Errors
Crossing Network Layers with Version 2.0 and Later CS/CJ-series Units
With Version 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series Units, FINS commands can cross over up to
8 network layers (see note), including the local network.
Applicable Networks:
Not all networks can be crossed up to 8 times. Only the following two kinds of
networks can be crossed up to 8 times. (The networks can be crossed in any
combination.)
Controller Link
Ethernet
Note: Operation through DeviceNet networks may not be dependable.
Configuration of Compatible Models:
Both the node sending the FINS command and the target node must be Version 2.0 or
later CS/CJ-series Units. Intermediate nodes may be PLC models other than Version
2.0 or later CS/CJ-series Units, i.e., PLC models that support a maximum of 3 network
layer crossings.
Node
sending
FINS command
or
Network layers = 2
Network layers = 1
Network layers = 3
Network layers = 3
Network layers = 7
Network 2
Network 4
FINS command
destination
Network 7
Serial
connection
Network 1
Network 3
This does not count as a layer crossing.
3-2-4
Network 8
Checking Routing Tables for Errors
The error check function checks whether the created local network table and relay
network table have been set correctly.
1. Select Options – Check Routing Table for errors in the PLC Routing Table
Window.
The results of the error check will be displayed.
Normal Result:
Results when Errors Were Detected:
For details on error messages displayed in the routing table Error List Check Dialog
Box.
3-20
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-5 Transferring Routing Tables
3-2-5
Transferring Routing Tables
Use the following procedure to transfer the routing tables that were created online or
offline to PLC1. The computer must be directly connected to PLC1 and online.
1. Verify that PLC1 is connected directly to the CX-Integrator and online, display the
PLC Routing Table Window, and select Options – Transfer to PLC.
2. The following dialog box will be displayed to confirm the transfer. To proceed with
the transfer to the PLC, click the Yes Button.
3. The routing tables (local network table and relay network table) will be transferred
from the computer (CX-Integrator) to PLC1.
The following dialog box will be displayed after the transfer is completed.
Note
When transferring the FINS local routing tables, the tables can be transferred only to
the directly connected PLC (with node address 0). The tables cannot be transferred to
any other PLC in the network (i.e., to a node address other than node 0).
This step completes the transfer of the routing tables to PLC1. Use the procedure
outlined above to transfer the routing tables to PLC2 and PLC3.
Note: The following message will be displayed if a CS/CJ-series Unit with no version
number is being used and the gateway counter was set to Expand in the Gateway
Counter Setting Dialog Box.
Click the Yes Button to change the gateway counter setting to Standard and transfer the
routing tables.
Click the No Button to cancel the routing table transfer.
4. After the routing tables have been transferred, update the Online Connection
Information Window by either selecting Update of Online Information Window
from the View Menu in the Online Connection Information Window or pressing the
F5 Key.
!Caution When changing or removing a routing table (see note), be sure to update
the display for the Online Connection Information Window. The display
for the Online Connection Information Window could possibly be different
from the actual network status. If operations are executed without first
updating the display, particularly online operations in the Network
Configuration Window, it could cause data to be mistakenly read or
written for the wrong network or node address or unit number.
Note: Changing or removing a routing table refers to using the
CX-Integrator (or a CX-Integrator for another personal computer) to start
the Routing Table Component and then changing or removing a routing
table for the target PLC (either a local network table or a relay network
table).
3-21
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-5 Transferring Routing Tables
3-22
Note
If routing tables are transferred to the PLC from a Programming Device, the CPU Bus
Unit will be reset. The Unit is reset in order to read and enable the routing tables that
were transferred. Before executing the routing table transfer, verify that no equipment
will be damaged and it is safe for the CPU Bus Unit to be reset.
Note
The routing tables cannot be transferred to another network layer. When transferring
to a different network layer, directly connect the CX-Integrator to a PLC in that network
and transfer the routing tables.
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-6 Saving Routing Tables
3-2-6
Saving Routing Tables
Use the following procedure to save the created FINS local routing tables. The FINS
local routing tables are saved in a file with the ".rtg" filename extension.
1. Select File – Save Local Routing Table File in the PLC Routing Table Window.
The Save As Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Input the desired filename ("Sample" is input in this example), specify the directory
where the file will be saved, and click the Save Button.
The file will be saved with the ".rtg" filename extension attached ("Sample.rtg" in
this example).
3-2-7
Reading Routing Tables
Use the following procedure to read FINS local routing tables that were previously
saved.
1. Select File – Open Local Routing Table File in the PLC Routing Table Window.
The Open Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select a FINS local routing table file (.rtg) and click the Open Button.
The FINS local routing tables will be read.
Once the file is read, the PLC can be connected online and the file can be
transferred to the PLC.
3-2-8
Verifying Routing Tables
Use the following procedure to compare routing tables created in the CX-Integrator to
the routing tables in the PLC.
1. Select Options – Verify Routing Table in the PLC Routing Table Window.
The results of the verification will be displayed.
Normal Result
Error Detected
Click the OK Button to display detailed verification results.
Local Network Table Results
Relay Network Table Results
3-23
3-2 Setting the Routing Tables
3-2-9 Printing Routing Tables
3-2-9
Printing Routing Tables
Use the following procedure to print the created routing tables.
1. Select File – Print in the PLC Routing Table Window.
Example Printout (PLC1 Table View)
Example Printout (PLC1 Main View)
3-24
3-3 Maintenance after Network Configuration
3-3-1 FINS Network Routing Tables
3-3
Maintenance after Network Configuration
3-3-1
FINS Network Routing Tables
When the routing tables have been set and transferred to the nodes (CPU Units of the
PLCs) in the network, it is possible to connect online to the PLCs through the network
from the CX-Integrator and read the network configuration.
This capability allows the FINS local routing table set in each PLC to be read and
edited through the network.
In addition, the FINS local network tables set in each PLC can be saved together in a
FINS network routing table file.
These operations are performed in the FINS Network Routing Table Window.
3-3-2
Editing the FINS Local Network Tables
The following procedure explains how to read the FINS local routing tables set in each
PLC. The computer must be directly connected to PLC1 and online.
1. Verify that the PLC is connected directly to the computer (CX-Integrator) and select
Tools – Start Routing Table from the PLC Routing Table Window's menu.
2. The PLC Routing Table Window will be displayed.
3-25
3-3 Maintenance after Network Configuration
3-3-2 Editing the FINS Local Network Tables
Note
When the PLC is connected online, the display will show green and red indicators on
the Units that indicate errors with Units registered in the routing tables.
Green Indicator:
Unit exists in
tables.
routing
Red Indicator:
Error with Unit
Note:
These
indicators are
not related to
the actual LED
Indicators on
The following table shows the meaning of the display's indicators.
Green indicator
Red indicator
3-26
The Unit with the unit number set in the routing tables is
actually mounted in the PLC Backplane.
One of the following errors was detected in the Unit with the
unit number set in the routing table.
1. The Unit's node address is duplicated.
2. The Unit's node address is out-of-range.
3. There is an error in the routing table settings.
3-3 Maintenance after Network Configuration
3-3-2 Editing the FINS Local Network Tables
Reading Routing Tables through the Network
1. Click the Network Tab in the workspace on the left side of the Window.
2. When each node (in the same network) is specified, the node's icon will indicate the
present connection status between the CX-Integrator and that PLC, as shown in the
following diagram.
Indicates that the node is in the
routing tables and is currently
directly connected to the
CX-Integrator.
Indicates that the node is in the
routing tables and actually exists
in the PLC network.
Indicates that the node is set in
the routing tables, but does not
actually exist in the PLC
network.
3. Select Options – Transfer from PLC.
The routing tables will be read through the network from each PLC and displayed.
Note
Before executing Option Menu operations such as transferring, deleting, or verifying
a node's routing tables, check the node's connection status by clicking the Network
Tab and checking the node's icon in the project workspace. When the CX-Integrator
is connected to a PLC on an Ethernet network, it may not be possible to read the
routing tables from nodes other than the connected PLC. In this case, directly
connect the CX-Integrator to the PLC to read and edit the local routing table.
3-27
3-3 Maintenance after Network Configuration
3-3-2 Editing the FINS Local Network Tables
Editing Routing Tables that Were Read
1. Click the Table View Tab and edit the local network table and relay network table.
Transferring Edited Routing Tables
1. Specify each node (in the same network) and select Options – Transfer to PLC.
The routing tables will be transferred to each PLC through the network.
Saving the FINS Network Routing Table File
1. Select File – Save Network Routing Table File in the PLC Routing Table Window.
2. Input the filename, specify the directory where the file will be saved, and click the
Save Button.
Note
3-28
When transferring the routing tables to a PLC, all CPU Bus Units in that node will be
reset except for SYSMAC BUS/2 Masters. Verify that there will be no adverse effects
on the system's equipment before transferring the routing tables.
Communications
Section 4 Data Links
for Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK
This section describes how to set data links for Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK
networks.
4
4-1
Overview
4-1-1
What Are Data Links?
4-1
Overview
4-1-1
What Are Data Links?
Data links automatically exchange data in preset areas between nodes (PLCs and/or
computers) on a network. Settings can be made either manually or automatically.
CX-Integrator operations can be used for all operations from setting up the PLC
network to controlling data exchange.
Manual Settings
Manual settings enable more flexible allocations, including the send size for each
node, the sequence of nodes for sending and receiving, and the setting of nodes for
sending only or receiving only. Use manual settings to create flexible data links to
meet the requirements of the individual system (e.g., efficient utilization of memory,
restrictions on allocated addresses, etc.).
Data link tables (i.e., tables that define data link area allocations) are generated by
CX-Integrator or network support software (such as Controller Link Support Software),
and sent to all nodes for use.
Automatic Settings
Automatic settings can be used for simple data exchanges involving fixed allocations,
when all nodes are set for the same send size and the same data is to be shared
among all nodes in order of node address.
Using a Programming Device (such as the CX-Programmer or a Programming
Console), set the data exchange method in the DM parameter area of the startup
node.
4-2
4-1
4-1-2
4-1-2
Overview
Overview of Procedure by Data Link Setting Method
Overview of Procedure by Data Link Setting Method
Step 1: Selecting the Data Link Setting Method
Either of the following methods can be used.
1) Select either user-set data links or automatically set data links after selecting
Online - Automatic Data Link Setup from the Data Link Component.
2) Directly set the software switches in the allocated DM Area words.
Note: The settings in the DM Area can also be made from the Special I/O Unit settings in the
I/O Table Window for CX-Programmer Ver.6.0 or higher.
1. Right-click the Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit in the I/O Table Window, select
Unit Setup from the popup menu, and then select Data Link mode from the Edit
Parameters Dialog Box.
Controller Link Unit: Select Manual setting, Automatic setting (equality layout), or
Automatic setting (1:N allocation)
SYSMAC LINK Unit: Manual setting, Automatic setting (CIO Area only), Automatic setting
(DM Area only), or Automatic setting (CIO + DM Areas).
2. Place the CX-Programmer online and transfer the parameters to the PLCs. (The
Compare Button can be clicked to set the parameters which verifying against the setting
data in the actual PLCs.
Step 2: Data Link Allocation Area Settings
Manual:
Automatic:
Select Table - Wizard from the Data Link Component online or
select File - New, create the data link tables, and then go online and
transfer the tables to all nodes in the network.
Use one of the following methods.
1) Select Online - Automatic Data Link Setup from the Data Link
Component and set the parameters for automatically setting
data links.
2) Directly set the parameter area for automatically allocating data
links in the allocated DM Area words.
Note: The Special I/O Unit settings in the I/O Table Window can also be
used to set parameters for automatically allocating data links and then
these parameters can be transferred to the startup node.
Step 3: Starting the Data Links
Automatic or
manual:
Use one of the following methods.
1) Select Online - Data Link Operation/Status from the Data Link
Component, select the RUN Option under Operation and then
click the Set Button.
2) Turn ON the Data Link Start Bit in the DM Area words allocated
to the start node and then cycle the power to the PLC.
(Alternately, leave the power to the PLC ON and turn the Data
Link Start Bit OFF and then back ON.)
Note: The Special I/O Unit settings in the I/O Table Window can also be
used to set parameters for automatically allocating data links, the Data
Link Start Bit can be set to be turned ON and then these parameters
can be transferred to the startup node.
4-3
4-2
User Interface Overview
4-2-1
Starting the Data Link Component
4-2
User Interface Overview
4-2-1
Starting the Data Link Component
The Data Link Component can be set with either of the following methods.
Method 1: While online, right-click the Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit in
the Online Connection Information Window and select Start Data Link
from the popup menu. Alternately, select Tools - Start Data Link from the
menu bar and then select Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK.
Start Data Link cannot be selected if there is not a Controller Link Unit or
SYSMAC LINK Unit mounted in the PLC that is connected online.
Method 2: While offline, select Tools - Start Data Link from the menu bar and then
select Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK.
4-2-2
Datalink Component
The following illustration shows the window used when constructing Controller Link or
SYSMAC LINK data links manually.
Toolbar
Data Link Configuration
window
Node Editing
window
Function Bar
Data Link Component Menu
Menu
File
Sub-menus
/Commands
New
Open
Controller
Link
SYSMAC
LINK
Save
Save As
Controller
Link
SYSMAC
LINK
4-4
Function
Creates new data link tables.
Opens data link tables, Files with any of the file name extensions
shown below can be opened.
When a file is opened, the proper editor starts up.
cl2 – Controller Link/CLKSS data link tables
cl3 – Controller Link data link tables
clk – CLKSS data link tables
csv – Controller Link data link tables (tab-delineated text file)
.sl3 – SYSMAC LINK data link tables
.slk – SYSMAC LINK data link tables for SYSMAC Support
Software
.csv – SYSMAC LINK data link tables (tab-delineated text file)
Saves the data link tables that are being edited.
Saves data link tables, Files with any of the file name extensions
shown below can be saved.
.cl2 – Controller Link/CLKSS data link tables
.cl3 – Controller Link data link tables
.clk – CLKSS data link tables
.csv – Controller Link data link tables (tab-delineated text file)
.sl3 – SYSMAC LINK data link tables
.csv – SYSMAC LINK data link tables (tab-delineated text file)
4-2
User Interface Overview
4-2-2
Menu
File
View
Sub-menus
/Commands
Print
Print Preview
Exit
Move Right
Move Left
Move Up
Move Down
Change Window
Zoom Out
Zoom In
Zoom Original
Show in List
Show in Table
Show Func Bar
Table
Online
Options
Help
Show Offset
Wizard
Add Source Link
Add Destination
Delete
Validate Table
Table Information
Show Node List
Redraw
Transfer from PLC
Transfer to PLC
Verify Node
Data Link
Operation/Status
Automatic Data
Link Setup
Set All Nodes for
Network Operation
Show All Network
Nodes
Delete
Cycle Time
Datalink Component
Function
Prints data link information.
Previews the data to be printed.
Exits the Datalink Component Window.
Moves the cursor to the right in the Data Link Configuration
Window.
Moves the cursor to the left in the Data Link Configuration
Window.
Moves the cursor up in the Data Link Configuration Window.
Moves the cursor down in the Data Link Configuration Window.
Changes the active window.
Zooms out from within the Data Link Configuration Window.
Zooms in within the Data Link Configuration Window.
Returns the Data Link Configuration Window to its initial scale.
Shows the Data Link Area settings in list format.
Shows the Data Link Area settings in table format.
Shows function key guides at the bottom of the Datalink Component
Window. (Enabled for table format only.)
Shows the specified offset value on the Node Editing Window.
Executes the Datalink Wizard.
Adds a node to the data links.
Adds the receive area of a participating node to the data links.
Deletes nodes.
Checks data link tables.
Edits data link table information.
Displays a list of nodes.
Resets colored displays.
Uploads online data link tables to the computer.
Downloads online data link tables from the computer to a PLC.
Compares data link tables generated by CX-Integrator with data link
tables stored in the PLC. If they do not match, an error dialog box is
displayed.
Displays the operation and data link status of manually set data links.
Sets parameters for automatically set data links, and transfers them
to the startup node.
Executes transfer, verify, and delete operations for all nodes.
Reads data link tables from all nodes.
Deletes data link tables.
Sets the communications cycle time (for SYSMAC LINK data link
tables only).
Displays help.
4-5
4-2
User Interface Overview
4-2-2
Datalink Component
Toolbar
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
No.
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8) (9)
(12) (13) (14) (15)
(16) (17)
(18)
(19) (20)
Function
(1)
New
Creates new data link tables.
(2)
Show All Network Nodes
Shows all nodes in the network.
(3)
Open
Opens a data link tables, Files with any of the file name
extensions shown below can be opened.
When a file is opened, the proper editor starts up.
.cl2 – CX-Net Controller Link/CLKSS data link tables
.cl3 – CX-Net Controller Link data link tables
.clk – CLKSS data link tables
.csv – CX-Net Controller Link data link tables
(tab-delineated text file)
.sl3 – SYSMAC LINK data link tables
.slk – SYSMAC LINK data link tables for SYSMAC
Support Software
.csv – SYSMAC LINK data link tables (tab-delineated
text file)
Saves the data link tables that are being edited.
Controller Link
SYSMAC LINK
(4)
Save
(5)
(6)
Toggle Network/Single
Node Operation
Transfer to PLC
(7)
Transfer from PLC
Specifies either all nodes or a single node for data
transfers.
Downloads online data link tables from the computer to a
PLC.
Uploads online data link tables to the computer.
(8)
Delete
Deletes data link tables.
(9)
Verify Node
(10)
Data Link Operation/Status
(11)
Automatic Data Link Setup
(12)
Validate Table
Compares data link tables generated by CX-Integrator with
data link tables stored in the PLC. If they do not match, an
error dialog box is displayed.
Displays the operation and data link status of manually set
data links.
Sets parameters for automatically set data links, and
transfers them to the startup node.
Checks data link tables.
(13)
Wizard
Executes the Datalink Wizard.
(14)
Add Source Link
Adds a node to the data links.
(15)
Add Destination
(16)
(19)
Set Source or Destination
Link Area Properties
Delete Link Destination
Service Area
Zoom In/Zoom Out/Zoom
Original
Print
Adds the receive area of a participating node to the data
links.
Displays the Node Settings dialog box. This dialog box is
used to modify the node properties.
Deletes nodes selected in the Data Link Configuration
Window, or deletes a receive area.
Zooms the Data Link Configuration Window in or out, or
returns it to the initial scale.
Prints data link information.
(20)
Help
Displays help.
(17)
(18)
4-6
(10) (11)
Icon
4-2
User Interface Overview
4-2-2
Datalink Component
Function Bar
(1)
(2)
No.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Icon
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Function
(1)
F1: Help
Displays help.
(2)
F2: Node<->Table
Moves the focus between nodes and tables.
(3)
F3: Link Start Address
(4)
F4: Move Up Area
Moves the focus between settings for the link start addresses
(status, Area 1, Area 2).
Moves a node up the node refresh sequence.
(5)
F5: Move Down Area
Moves a node down the node refresh sequence.
(6)
F6: Show/Hide Offset
Shows or hides the offset for the node being displayed.
(7)
F7: Insert Area
Inserts a new receive area (new node).
(8)
F8: Delete Node
(9)
F9: Show Prev Node
Deletes a node or communications area.
To delete a node or link area from a node list, select the item
from the list and then click F8: Delete Node.
To delete a node or link area from a table, select the item from
the table and then click F8: Delete Node.
Shows the previous node.
(10)
F10: Show Next Node
Shows the next node.
4-7
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-1
Procedure through Data Link Startup
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
Follow the procedure described below to create data link tables manually for
Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK data links.
Note: There is no need to create a data link tables when data links are set automatically. For
details on automatic setup, refer to Automatically Set Data Links.
4-3-1
Procedure through Data Link Startup
Set the data link type to manual.
Use one of the following methods.
• Select Online - Auto Online and select manually set data links.
• Make the setting directly in the allocated DM Area words.
Note: This setting can also be made in the Special I/O Unit settings in the CX-Programmer I/O
Table Window.
Start the Data Link Component.
Select Tool - Start DataLink offline.
(Alternately, go online, right-click the Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit in the
CX-Integrator's Online Connection Information Window, and select Start DataLink from the
pop-up menu.
Select the network type.
Select Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK (not required online).
Create the data link tables offline.
1) Datalink Wizard Settings (Table - Wizard). Use the manual setting function if the data link
tables are to be created manually.
2) Node Edit Window Settings
Check the data link tables.
Datalink Component Window: Table - Validate Table.
Save the data link tables.
Datalink Component Window: File - Save
Connect the CX-Integrator online to the PLC.
CX-Integrator: Network - Work Online (or Auto Online)
Read the data link tables that were saved and transfer them to the PLC from the
Data Link Component Window.
1) Right-click the Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit in the CX-Integrator's Online Connection
Information Window, and select Start DataLink from the pop-up menu.
2) Select File - Open from the Data Link Component Window to read the data link tables.
3) Select Online - Transfer to PLC to transfer the data link tables from the computer to the PLC.
Start the data links from the Data Link Component Window.
1) Select Online - DataLink Operation/Start.
2) Select the RUN Option from the Operation Field and click the Set Button.
Reference Create data link tables manually when any of the following conditions is present:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4-8
The send area size differs for nodes participating in the data link.
The sequence of send nodes differs from the sequence of node addresses.
There are nodes that receive only part of the send data (Controller Link only).
There are nodes that receive data with an offset specified (Controller Link only).
There are nodes that do not send data (Controller Link only).
There are nodes that do not receive data.
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-2
4-3-2
Creating Data Link Tables
Creating Data Link Tables
Create a data link table for each node registered in the CX-Server file that is read.
Make the settings for (1) to (8) below.
(1) Participating data link nodes
(7) Receive
Node 2
sizes
from PLC
remote nodes
Node 1
(receive)
(3)
Area setting
(area/start
address)
(2) Node 1
PLC type
(4) Send size
Node 1
(send)
Node 2
(send)
Node 2
(receive)
Node 3
(receive)
Node 3
(receive)
Node 3
(send)
Node 2
(receive)
(5) Node refresh sequence:
2, 1, 3
(6)
Status area
Data link
status
1,
2,
Node 3
PLC
Node 1
(receive)
3
2,
Data link
status
1,
(8) Offsets
3
Data link
status
To create a data link table, make the following settings in order.
1. Datalink Wizard Settings
(2) Set the PLC type.
(3) Set the areas.
(4) Set the send size.
(6 ) S e t th e status a re a.
(1) Set participating data link nodes.
(5) Set the refresh node sequence.
4-9
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-2
Creating Data Link Tables
2. Node Editing Window Settings
(7) Set receive sizes from remote nodes.
(8) Set offsets.
Note 1. It is possible to add or delete nodes from the participating data link nodes (1) using the
Datalink Wizard.
Add
Delete
Adding nodes
Select Table - Add Source Link.
Adding link words
Select Table - Add Destination.
Deleting specified nodes or link areas
Select the node from the node list, and
then click F8: Delete Node.
Select the node from the table, and
then click F8: Delete Node.
Deleting link areas from specified nodes
Note 2. It is possible to change the following items set by the Datalink Wizard for each node: (2)
PLC type, (3) Area (memory area and start address), (4) Send size, (5) Node refresh
sequence (see note 3), and (6) Status area.
Note 3. The node refresh sequence is set using F4: Move Up Area and F5: Move Down Area.
Note
The operations differ for Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK when creating data
links.
The following table shows the points on which the manually set data link functions
are different.
Function
(1) Offset setting
Controller Link
Supported
SYSMAC LINK
Not supported
(2) Receive size setting
Supported
Not supported. (It is only possible
to specify whether all of none of
the data sent is to be received.)
(3) Memory area
Area 1: Can be selected.
Area 1: CIO
Area 2: Can be selected.
Area 2: DM
(CIO, LR, DM, EM, etc.,
according to PLC type)
(Fixed.)
Not supported
Supported
(4) Communications cycle time
setting
These four differences apply even to data link setup operations using the
CX-Integrator. Aside from these points, other operations are basically the same.
4-10
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-3
4-3-3
System Configuration Example
System Configuration Example
The procedure is described below, from data link creation through startup, taking a
Controller Link data link system as an example.
CX-Integrator
Peripheral Bus or Host Link
Data link
Data link
Controller Link network
PLC type
CS1G-CPU45
Node address
CS1G-CPU45
1
CS1G-CPU45
2
3
Data Link Setup Example
Area 1
Node 1
Node 2
CIO 1200
CIO 1000
Send
(#1)
CIO 1030
Receive
(#2)
CIO 1060
CIO 1230
CIO 1100
Receive
(#1)
Send
(#2)
CIO 1260
Receive
(#3)
Receive
(#3)
CS1G
CIO 1300
Node 3
CS1G
IR
300
IR
320 Receive
(#1)
350
Send
(#3)
Offset
IR
10 words
Size
20 words
IR
390
Receive
(#2)
C200HX
Area 2
Node 1
DM500
DM530
Send
(#1)
Receive
(#2)
DM630
Receive
(#3)
DM600
Receive
(#1)
Send
(#2)
DM700
Receive
(#2)
DM730
Send
(#3)
Receive
(#3)
DM700
Receive
(#1)
DM760
DM660
DM560
Node 3
Node 2
DM600
DM800
The refresh sequence for nodes 1 and 2 is as follows: #1, #2, #3. For node 3, the
order is #2, #1, #3. Node address 03 does not receive all of the data sent from node
address 02. Rather, data from the 20 words (CIO 1240 to CIO 1259) beginning from
the start address +10 words (i.e., the offset) is received in IR 300 to IR 319. Other
data is received with no offset.
4-11
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
First create manually set data link tables offline.
Datalink Wizard Operations
1 While offline, select Tools - Start Data Link.
The Select Network Dialog Box will be displayed.
2 Select either Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK, and then click the OK Button.
The Datalink Component Window will be displayed.
4-12
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
3 Select Table - Wizard. If data link tables have already been input, the following
dialog box will be displayed. (It will not be displayed if these are the first data link
tables being created.)
4 Click the Yes Button. The Datalink Wizard Dialog Box will be displayed for setting
the participating data link nodes.
If this box is selected, fast
default table generation will
be set when the Defaults
button is clicked. In that case,
all nodes will be set as a
group, using the initial values
that have been set.
Addresses of nodes to
participate in the data links.
Clicking the Defaults button
sets the initial values used for
fast default table generation.
5 Set the addresses of the nodes that are to participate in the data links. In this case,
input 1-3 to set node addresses 01 to 03. (To set node addresses 01, 02, and 04,
for example, input 1,2,4.)
6 Click the Next Button or press the Enter key. The following dialog box will be
displayed.
(1 )
(2 )
(4)
(3 )
(5)
(6 )
(7 )
(8 )
(9 )
4-13
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
No.
(1)
(2)
Node
PLC
Item
Displays node address to set.
Sets the PLC type.
Function
(3)
Memory area
(4)
Start Address
(5)
Size
(6)
(7)
Status
Ordered Destination
Nodes
(8)
Make Default
(9)
Next >>
Area 1 memory area
Area 2 memory area
Area 1 start address
Area 2 start address
Area 1 local node send size (in words)
Area 2 local node send size (in words)
Data link status memory area (See note.)
Node Refresh Sequence
Beginning with the data link start address above, specify which nodes
are to have data refreshed at the local node address and the order in
which data is to be refreshed (i.e., the node refresh sequence). This
order will be the same for Area 1 and Area 2.
(For the local node address, data is sent from the local node area. For a
remote node address, data is received from the remote node address to
the local area.)
Note:
• The local node must be included in the refresh nodes.
• If the address of any node participating in the data links is not entered
here, data will not be received from that node.
Example: If 1, 2, 3 is input, node addresses 1, 2, and 3 will be allocated
in order, beginning with the start address.
Click this button to make the values set for the above items the default
values for new data link settings.
Click to proceed to the next dialog box.
Note: The default setting for data link status depends on the PLC being used. For details, refer
to the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309).
PLC
CS/CJ Series
Data link status
The data link status is contained in the 16 words (fixed) from CIO 1500 + 25 × unit
number + 7 to 22 in the CPU Bus Unit Area.
+7 words
15
Node 2
...
+22 words
8 7
Node 1
...
Node 32
0
...
Node 31
7 Set node address 01 as shown in the following table, and then click the Next
Button or press the Enter key. Set node addresses 02 and 03 in the same way.
Item
Node address
PLC type
Area 1
Area 2
4-14
Memory area
Start address
Send size
Data set
1
CS1G-CPU45
CIO
1000
30
Memory area
Start address
Send size
D
500
30
Ordered destination nodes
1, 2, 3
Status
CIO
1100
Memory area
Start address
Description
−
−
Sets CIO 1000 as the data link start
address for the Area 1 local node.
Sets 30 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 1 local node.
Sets D00500 as the data link start
address for the Area 2 local node.
Sets 30 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 2 local node.
Specifies the node refresh sequence.
Beginning with the start addresses,
nodes 01, 02, and 03 are set in order.
(The local node address is 1, so
transmission is first, followed by
reception from node 02, and finally
reception from node 03.)
Sets CIO 1100 as the data link status
start address.
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
8 Set node address 02 as shown in the following table.
Item
Node address
PLC type
Area 1
Memory area
Start address
Send size
Data set
2
CS1GCPU45
CIO
1200
30
Area 2
Memory area
Start address
Send size
D
600
30
Ordered destination nodes
1, 2, 3
Data link status
start address
CIO
1300
Memory area
Start address
Description
−
−
Sets CIO 1200 as the data link start
address for the Area 1 local node.
Sets 30 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 1 local node.
Sets D00600 as the data link start
address for the Area 2 local node.
Sets 30 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 2 local node.
Specifies the node refresh sequence.
Beginning with the start addresses,
nodes 01, 02, and 03 are set in order.
(Reception from node 01 is first,
followed by transmission from the local
node, and finally reception from node
03.)
Sets CIO 1300 as the data link status
start address.
9 Set node address 03 as shown in the following table, and then click the Next
Button or press the Enter key.
Item
Area 1
Memory area
Start address
Send size
Data set
3
CS1GCPU45
IR
300
40
Area 2
Memory area
Start address
Send size
DM
700
40
Node address
PLC type
Ordered destination nodes
2, 1, 3
Data link status
start address
LR
0
Memory area
Start address
Description
−
−
Sets IR 300 as the data link start
address for the Area 1 local node.
Sets 40 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 1 local node.
Sets DM 700 as the data link start
address for the Area 2 local node.
Sets 40 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 2 local node.
Specifies the node refresh sequence.
Beginning with the start addresses,
nodes 02, 01, and 03 are set in order.
(Reception from node 02 is first,
followed by reception from node 01, and
finally transmission from the local node
address.)
Sets LR0 as the data link status start
address.
4-15
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
Note
Fast Datalink Wizard Settings
It is possible to generate a table with all nodes set for the same PLC type and the
same areas (using Fast Default Table Generation), and then to modify individual
nodes in the Node Editing Window as required.
Make the settings as follows:
1 Click the Defaults Button and then set the default values in the following dialog
box.
2
4-16
Select the Fast Default Table Generation Option, and then click the Next Button
or press the Enter key.
The settings for all participating nodes will be generated at the above default
values.
• PLC type
• Memory area, data link start address, communications data size
• Status memory area
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
Node Editing Window Settings
10 The following Datalink Component Window will be displayed.
Data Link
Configuration
window
Node Editing
window
Data Link Configuration Window
Indicates the data link memory
area.
Participating data link
node address
Indicates the data link
memory area.
1: Area 1
2: Area 2
The ovals indicate the
send areas (Area 1 and
Area 2).
The rectangles indicate the receive
areas (Area 1 and Area 2).
The same color indicates that
data is shared among nodes.
: The arrows indicate the direction of data transfer.
Send areas are indicated by ovals in order of the addresses of nodes participating in
the data links. The same color indicates that data is shared among nodes. Therefore,
with the number of participating nodes represented by n, one oval and n-1 rectangles
are shown for each node.
This window can be used to check the data sent and received between nodes.
4-17
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
Node Editing Window Settings
Set the data link details for each node (i.e., send size, receive size, reception offset) in
the Node Editing Window.
Note: The Node Edit Window appears in table format by default, as shown below. To convert it
back into the earlier list format, select View - Show in List.
(1)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
The settings for each active node
shown in the node field to the left are
displayed here.
(3)
(10)
No.
(1)
Node
(2)
PLC
(3)
Status
The status memory area and start address set by the Datalink Wizard are displayed
and can be changed here.
(4)
Area 1/Area 2
The Area 1 and Area 2 classifications and start addresses set by the Datalink Wizard
are displayed and can be changed here.
(5)
Node
(Display only.
Order can be
changed.)
(6)
Link Addr.
(Automatic
display)
(7)
Size
(Setting/Display)
(8)
Offset
(Setting/Display)
• Node addresses are displayed from top to bottom, in order of node refreshing at the
local node (in order of allocated node address).
• To change the refresh sequence set by the Datalink Wizard, click either F4: Move Up
Area or F5: Move Down Area in the Function Bar, or press the corresponding
Function key.
• For the local node send area, the start address of the data sent from the local node is
automatically displayed.
• For the receive area from remote nodes, the local node start address for storing data
received from remote nodes is automatically displayed.
• For the local node send area, the send size set by the Datalink Wizard is displayed
and can be changed here.
• For the receive area from remote nodes, the receive size from remote nodes is set
here in word units. (It can only be set here.) The default is the entire send size from
remote nodes.
The reception offset from the source start address displayed at “Src. Addr.” is set here.
(The default is 0.)
(9)
Src. Addr.
(Automatic
display)
F4: Move Up
Area
F5: Move Down
Area
(10)
Name
(4)
Description
Selects the address of the node to be edited.
) are displayed to the right.
The settings for an active node (selected with
The PLC type set by the Datalink Wizard is displayed and can be changed here.
• For the local node send area, “Send” is automatically displayed.
• For the receive area from a remote node, the remote node’s source start address (the
value before the offset) is automatically displayed.
Changes the node refresh sequence.
Note: The areas and start addresses that can be set for Controller Link data link status depend on the
model of CPU Unit. If the start address is not set correctly, a data link table error will occur and
the LNK indicator on the Controller Link Unit will flash. Refer to the Controller Link Unit
Operation Manual for details.
4-18
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
Node Editing Window (Edited Node Address: Node 01)
Address at local node
Function
Address at remote node
(1)
(1)
(2)
(3)
Indicates that the node refresh sequence
Note
(2)
(3)
Indicates that 20 words (D00000 to
D00019) from a remote node (node 03)
are received into the area starting from
CIO 01000 (i.e., CIO 01000 to CIO
01019) at the local node (node 01).
Indicates that 30 words starting from
CIO 01020 (i.e., CIO 01020 to CIO
01049) from the local node (node 01)
are sent to a remote node.
Indicates that 40 words (CIO 00200 to
CIO 00239) from a remote node (node
02) are received into the area starting
from CIO 01050 (i.e., CIO 01050 to CIO
01089) at the local node (node 01).
It is also possible to display the Node Editing Window in list format, as before.
Select View - Show in List from the menu. The change will go into effect the next
time the window is opened.
Node Editing
window
Setting Size (Send or Receive) and Offset
• The send size can be set for the local node row by double-clicking in the Size cell.
(The default is the size set by the Datalink Wizard.) For remote node rows, the
receive size can be set. (The default is the entire send size from remote nodes.)
• The reception offset can be set by double-clicking the Offset cell. (The default is 0.)
Size and offset can be set.
Automatically displayed.
4-19
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
Note
Size modifications and offsets can be set in the Area Specify Dialog Box that is
displayed by double-clicking on the data link configuration icon (oval for send area
or rectangular for receive area
).
Area Specify Dialog Box (Send Area)
Specify send size.
Offset cannot be changed.
Area Specify Dialog Box (Receive Area)
Specify send size.
Offset cannot be changed.
Note: With SYSMAC LINK, the send size can be set, but the receive size and the reception
offset cannot. Therefore, the Area Specify Dialog Boxes are as shown in the following
example diagrams.
• Send Area
Can be set.
4-20
• Receive Area
Cannot be set.
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
Changing Node Refresh Sequences
The node refresh sequence set for each node by the Datalink Wizard can be changed
in the Node Editing Window.
In the Node Editing Window, select the node for which the refresh sequence is to be
changed.
Change the node refresh sequence by either clicking F4:
Move Up Area or F5: Move Down Area in the Function Bar,
or pressing the F4 or F5 function keys.
Note
The node refresh sequence for individual nodes cannot be checked in the Data Link
Configuration Window. Node refresh sequence checking and changes must be
performed in the Node Editing Window.
Adding Participating Nodes to Data Links
In the Node Editing Window, it is possible to add nodes aside from the participating
nodes set by the Datalink Wizard’s Network Nodes setting.
The following window is displayed by selecting Table - Add Source Node from the
Datalink Component Menu or by clicking the
Button in the Toolbar.
Specify the node address, PLC type, and the Area 1 and Area 2 memory areas, and
then click the OK Button.
4-21
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-4
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
The node will be added.
Added.
Deleting Nodes Added to the Data Links
Select the node to be deleted from the Node Editing Window.
Delete the node by clicking the F8: Delete Node Button in the Function Bar.
!Caution If the node is deleted by clicking the
be executed immediately.
Button in the Toolbar, the deletion will
Setting to Not Receive Data
Set the receive size to 0 in the Node Editing Window.
Setting to Not Send Data
Set the send size to 0 in the Node Editing Window.
4-22
4-3-5
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-5
Procedure Using Setup Example
Procedure Using Setup Example
Set Area 1 for each node, based on the data link setup example in the example
system configuration.
Note: The receive size and reception offset can only be set for Controller Link, and not for
SYSMAC LINK.
Setting Node Address 01
1 Select node address 01 from the node address list on the left. Node 01 will be
highlighted.
Select node address 01 as the object to be edited.
The data link data for the selected node
address is displayed here.
The data link table for node address 01, the node to be edited, is displayed as a list
in the Node Editing Window on the right.
Sends 30 words from the local node (node
address 01), starting with CIO 01000 (i.e., CIO
01000 to CIO 01029).
Receives 30 words from node 02, starting with
CIO 01230 (i.e., CIO 01230 to CIO 01259) into
the local node area starting with CIO 01030 (i.e.,
CIO 01030 to CIO 01059).
Local node send area
Receive area from remote
nodes
Note
Indicates the node refresh
sequence. (In this example,
for node address 01, no
change is required.)
Receives 40 words from node 03, starting with
CIO 00350 (i.e., CIO 00350 to CIO 00389) into
the local node area starting with CIO 01060 (i.e.,
CIO 01060 to CIO 01099).
With node address 01, the node refresh sequence matches the default (order of
addresses), so no change is required.
With node address 01, the size and offset are both automatically displayed as the
defaults, so no changes are required.
The size and offset can be set.
Automatically displayed.
2 With node address 01, the node refresh sequence matches the default (order of
addresses), so no change is required.
With node address 01, the size and offset are both automatically displayed as the
defaults, so no changes are required.
Settings for area 2 are made using the same method.
4-23
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-5
Procedure Using Setup Example
Setting Node Address 02
Node address 02 is set in the same way as node address 01.
Local node send area
Receive area from remote nodes
Setting Node Address 03 (Setting an Offset)
For node address 03, the procedure for setting the node refresh sequence and the
offset is as follows:
1 Select node address 03 from the node address list on the left.
2 With node address 03, the node refresh sequence does not match the default, so
the order of addresses must be changed. Change the node refresh sequence by
either clicking F4: Move Up Area or F5: Move Down Area in the Function Bar, or
pressing the F4 or F5 function keys.
F5: Move Down Area
3 Double-click on the Offset cell, and input the data size to be offset. In this example,
set the offset size to 10 words.
With this setting, 20 words sent from node 01 will be received, starting from CIO
1000, and with an offset of 10 words (i.e., CIO 1010 to CIO 1030).
4-24
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-6
4-3-6
Checking Data Link Tables
Checking Data Link Tables
1 Select Table - Validate Table in the Data Link Editor (Controller Link or SYSMAC
LINK). The results of the check will be displayed as shown in the following
illustration.
4-3-7
Printing Data Link Tables
Follow the procedure below to print data link tables that have been generated.
1 Select File - Print in the Data Link Editor (Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK).
Printing Example:
4-25
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-8
Saving Data Link Tables
4-3-8
Saving Data Link Tables
Follow the procedure below to save data link tables that have been generated. Data
link tables are saved with a .cl2 file name extension as the default. It is also possible
to save them in .csv format.
1 Select File - Save As in the Data Link Editor (Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK).
The Save As Dialog Box will be displayed.
2 Input the file name (“Sample” in this example), and specify the location where the
file is to be saved. Then click the Save Button. The data will be saved to a file with
a .cl2 extension added to the file name (i.e., “Sample.cl2” in this case).
4-3-9
Creating, Reading, and Writing CSV Files (Saving)
Creating CSV Files
Based on the CSV-format template file (Sample1.csv) provided with this software, it is
possible to create files in CSV format for data link tables created manually using
spreadsheet software (such as MS Excel).
Including the Sample1.csv file, there are three types of files provided as reference
material. The other two, in addition to Sample1.csv, are Sample1.xls (which describes
tags and data), and Sample1.cl2 (data link table file format).
(Sample1.xls window)
4-26
4-3
4-3-9
Manually Setting Data Links
Creating, Reading, and Writing CSV Files (Saving)
Reading CSV Files
Files in CSV format can be read to data link tables.
1 While offline, select Tools - Start Data Link from the CX-Integrator menu bar. The
Select Network Dialog Box will be displayed.
2 Select Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK and click the OK Button. The Datalink
Component Dialog Box will be displayed.
4-27
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-9
Creating, Reading, and Writing CSV Files (Saving)
3 Select File - Open menu bar, and then select *.csv from the File of Type Field.
Writing CSV Files (Saving)
Once data link tables have been created, they can be written to CSV-format files.
1 Select File - Save As from the menu bar in the Datalink Component Dialog Box,
and then select *.csv from the File of Type Field.
Note
The following illustration provides an example of a written CSV file.
(1)
Network ID
parameters
(2) Participating
node parameters
(3) Area 1
parameters
(4) Area 2
parameters
Note: When displayed by spreadsheet software (such as MS Excel).
Types of Data Written to CSV Files
Tag name
(1)
<netparam>
<network-type>
Description
The network type (CLK/SLK).
The communications cycle
time.
<cycletime>
<author>
<information>
(Title or node
information)
<comment>
4-28
The name of the author
SLK: (Table information)
author
Input file information.
CLK: Node information
SLK: (Table information) title
Comment.
SLK: (Table information)
comment
Set value
CLK network: CLK
SLK network: SLK
5 to 255. Enabled only when
<network –type> is set to SLK,
and ignored when <network-type>
is set to CLK. An error will be
generated if an out-of-range value
is set when a file is loaded.
Set any text string (with up to 30
characters). Enabled only when
<network –type> is set to SLK.
Set any text string (with up to 30
characters).
Set any text string (with up to 255
characters). Enabled only when
<network –type> is set to SLK,
and ignored when <network-type>
is set to CLK.
4-3
4-3-9
Tag name
(2)
<nodeparam>
<node>
(Node No.)
Manually Setting Data Links
Creating, Reading, and Writing CSV Files (Saving)
Description
The node No. for the link.
The PLC type for the node.
<cpu>
(PLC type)
The CPU model for the node.
<cpu-type>
(CPU model)
The status start address and
the memory area.
<status-starttype>
(Status start
address, memory
area)
<status-start-ch>
(Status area start
address)
The start address for the
status area.
Set value
1 to 62. An error will be generated
if an out-of-range value is set
when a file is loaded.
CS1G, CS1G-H, CS1H, CS1H-H,
CJ1G, CJ1G-H, CJ1H-H, CJ1M,
CS1D-H, CS1D-S, CV500,
CV1000, CV2000, CVM1,
CVM1-V2, CQM1H, C200HE,
C200HE-Z, C200HG, C200HG-Z,
C200HX, C200HX-Z, NSB, CS/CJ
CS1G: CPU42, CPU43, CPU44,
CPU45
CS1G-H: CPU42, CPU43,
CPU44, CPU45
CS1H: CPU63, CPU64, CPU65,
CPU66, CPU67
CS1H-H: CPU63, CPU64, CPU65,
CPU66, CPU67
CS1G/CJ1G: CPU44, CPU45
CJ1G-H: CPU42, CPU43, CPU44,
CPU45
CJ1H-H: CPU65, CPU66, CPU67
CJ1M: Not specified.
CS1D-H: CPU65, CPU67
CS1D-S: CPU42, CPU44, CPU65,
CPU67
CV500: Not specified.
CV1000: Not specified.
CV2000: Not specified.
CVM1: CPU01, CPU11, CPU21
CVM1-V2: Not specified.
CQM1H: CPU51, CPU61
C200HE: Not specified.
C200HE-Z: Not specified.
C200HG: Not specified.
C200HG-Z: Not specified.
C200HX: Not specified.
C200HX-Z: Not specified.
C200HX-Z: CPU65, CPU85
NSB: Not specified.
CS/CJ: Not specified.
Any of the following memory areas
can be specified, regardless of the
PLC type.
Initial value: Default (See note.)
CIO: Blank, CIO, or IR
DM: D or DM
LR: L or LR
EM: E + Bank No.
HR: H or HR
AR: A or AR
T/C: T/C
Note: Data link status is stored in
the default area. For details, refer
to the Unit's operation manual.
The range differs depending on
the status area type.
4-29
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-9
Creating, Reading, and Writing CSV Files (Saving)
(3)
<area1>
Tag name
<start-type>
(Link Area 1
type)
<start-ch>
(Link Area 1 start
address)
Description
Specify the area type for Link
Area 1.
Set value
Same as for status area type.
The beginning word for Link
Area 1.
Same as for status area start
address.
Node address
1 to 62
Node
No.
<linkarea>
Link
start
address
Link size
Link word
Size (Unit:
words)
Offset
Offset
size
(4)
<area2>
<start-type>
(Link Area 2
type)
<start-ch>
(Link Area 2 start
address)
<linkarea>
Link size
Offset
size
4-30
Set the link start address + link
size for the above link node.
Set any value.
Set any value. If no offset is
required, set 0.
The area type for Link Area 2.
Same as for status area type.
The beginning word for Link
Area 2.
Same as for status area start
address.
Node address
1 to 62
Node
No.
Link
start
address
The node
address for
linking at
Link Area 1.
The
beginning
link word for
Link Area 1.
The link size
for Link Area
1.
The offset
size for Link
Area 1.
Link word
Size (Unit:
words)
Offset
The node
address for
linking at
Link Area 2.
The
beginning
link word for
Link Area 2.
The link size
for Link Area
2.
The offset
size for Link
Area 2.
Set the link start address + link
size for the above link node.
Set any value.
Set any value. If no offset is
required, set 0.
4-3
4-3-9
Manually Setting Data Links
Creating, Reading, and Writing CSV Files (Saving)
An example text data configuration for a CSV file is shown below.
Note: Commas are used for delineation. (They are added when there are blank cells.)
4-31
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-10
Reading and Data Link Tables
4-3-10
Reading and Data Link Tables
After a data link table has been created, follow the procedure below for reading it.
1 Select Network - Work Online or Network - Auto Online from the menu bar to
connect online to the target PLC.
2 Right-click the Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit in the Online Connection
Information Window and select Start Data Link from the popup menu. Either the
Datalink Component (Controller Link) or Datalink Component (SYSMAC LINK)
Window will be displayed.
Note: Start Data Link cannot be selected if there is not a Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC
LINK Unit mounted in the PLC that is connected online.
3 Select File - Open.
The Open Dialog Box will be displayed.
4 Select the data link table file (Sample.cl2 in this example) and then click the Open
Button.
4-32
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-10
Reading and Data Link Tables
The data link tables will be read as shown below.
Note: Be careful of the following point when reading a SYSMAC LINK data link table file (.slk
extension) created by SYSMAC LINK Support Software.
With SYSMAC LINK data link table files created by SYSMAC LINK Support Software
(SLK files), there is no distinction made between C200H and CV-series PLC models.
Immediately after opening an SLK file, be sure to set the PLC model for each node. Then
save the file as a default data link table file (.sl2 extension).
4-33
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-11
Transferring the Data Link Table
4-3-11
Transferring the Data Link Table
There are two methods that can be used to transfer data link tables.
• Transfer data link tables to all PLC nodes on the network at the same time.
• Transfer data link tables to all PLC nodes on the network at the same time.
Transferring to All Nodes on the Network
1 Select Set All Nodes for Network Operation from the Datalink Component’s
Online Menu. Selecting this operation allows the data link tables to be transferred
simultaneously to multiple PLCs.
Confirm that there is a
check mark.
2 Select Online - Transfer to PLC. The following dialog box will be displayed.
3 Click the Yes Button.
An error list will be displayed.
4 If there are no errors, click the OK Button. The data link tables will be transferred to
all PLC nodes and then the transfer results will be displayed.
4-34
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-11
Transferring the Data Link Table
Operation If Errors Are Displayed
OK Button clicked
Ignore Errors Button clicked
Note:
The data link tables will not be transferred.
An error message will be displayed if a node does not
actually exist on the network. If the Ignore Errors
Button is clicked, data link tables will be transferred to
the nodes that do exist.
As long as all the data link tables can be transferred to all of the PLCs attempted,
Set All Nodes for Network Operation can be selected to transfer the data link
tables simultaneously to multiple PLCs. If there are any PLCs with the power
turned OFF, or with disconnected cables, use the following method to transfer the
data link table to one PLC at a time.
Transferring to Individual Nodes on the Network
1 Make sure that Set All Nodes for Network Operation is not selected in the Online
Menu.
Confirm that there is no
check mark.
2 Select the transfer destination node address from the Node list in the Datalink
Component.
3
Select Online - Transfer to PLC. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Final confirmation of link table
transfer nodes (PLCs)
3
Click the Yes Button.
4
The data link tables will be transferred to node 2.
5
The transfer results will be displayed. Click the OK Button.
Changes in Transferring Data Link Tables during Data Link Operation
Nodes can be added while data links are running if the following Controller Link
Units/Boards and Repeater Units (CS1W-RPT01) are used (CX-Programmer version
3.2 or higher).
• CS1W-CLK21-V1
• 3G8F7-CLK21-V1(-EV1)
• CS1W-CLK12-V1
• 3G8F7-CLK12-V1(-EV1)
4-35
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-11
Transferring the Data Link Table
• CS1W-CLK52-V1
• CJ1W-CLK21-V1
• 3G8F7-CLK52-V1(-EV1)
Note: Refer to the Controller Link Operation Manual for the procedure to add nodes and
details on changing data link tables while data links are running.
Use the following procedure to transfer data link tables while data links are running.
1. Create the new data link tables offline and save them in a file.
2. Place the CX-Integrator online with the PLC.
3. Select Tools - Start Data Link from the menu bar. The Data Link Component will
be displayed.
4. Open the data link table file saved in step 1, above.
5. Select the node for which the data link table is to be changed.
6. Select Online - Transfer to PLC while datalink active from the menu bar. The
following dialog box will be displayed.
7. Click the Yes Button.
Yes Button
No Button
The data link tables open on the CX-Integrator will be compared with
the data link tables in the node to be changed.
The data link tables will not be compared.
The results of comparison will be displayed in the following dialog box.
Click the OK Button to check the differences. The differences between the data link
tables open in the CX-Integrator and the data link tables in the node to be changed
will be displayed.
4-36
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-11
Transferring the Data Link Table
8. Check the difference to be sure they are appropriate and then click the OK Button.
A dialog box will be display to confirm data link table transfer.
9. Click the Yes Button. The data link tables will be transferred.
If the No Button is clicked, the transfer will be canceled. (The data link tables
currently running will not be changed.
The following dialog box will be displayed if the transfer is completed normally.
Note
Transfer the data link tables for only one node at a time when the data links are
running.
If Online - Transfer to PLC has been selected, the following dialog box will be
displayed. Clear the selection and repeat the procedure.
Comparing Data Link Tables
1. In the node list in the Data Link Component, select the node address of the PLC for
which data link tables are to be compared with those in the computer.
2. Be sure that Online - Set All Nodes for Network Operation is not selected.
3. Select Online - Verify Node.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
4. Click the Yes Button.
A message will appear to tell you if there are any differences between the two sets
of data link table.
5. If differences are found and the OK Button is clicked, the Verification Result Dialog
Box will be displayed.
4-37
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-11
Transferring the Data Link Table
Select the node address to display the data link area data for both the PLC and in
the computer for the specified node address: Area 1 Size, Area 1 Offset, Area 2
Size, and Area 2 Offset. The size of this dialog box can be changed.
The data for the PLC is display on top and that for the computer (i.e., the data
being edited on the CX-Integrator) is displayed on bottom. Inconsistencies are
displayed between pointed brackets < >.
Click the Copy Button to place a copy of the verification results on the clipboard for
use in other programs, e.g., text editors, as shown below.
4-38
4-3
4-3-12
4-3-12
Manually Setting Data Links
Starting and Stopping Data Links (Including Status Displays)
Starting and Stopping Data Links (Including Status Displays)
Before performing the operations described below, connect online to a node where the
data link table has been transferred. As long as the data link table is stored there, data
link starting and stopping can be executed from any node.
Note
When starting data links with manual setup, the data link mode for the startup node
must be set to manual.
Starting Data Links
1 Select Tools - Start Data Link from the menu bar.
The Select Network Dialog Box will be displayed. (For local network only, i.e., when
network address is 0.)
2 Select Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK, and then click the OK Button.
Either the Datalink Component (Controller Link) or Datalink Component (SYSMAC
LINK) Window will be displayed.
4-39
4-3
Manually Setting Data Links
4-3-12
Starting and Stopping Data Links (Including Status Displays)
3 Select Online - Datalink Operation/Status from the menu bar.
The Datalink Status Dialog Box will be displayed. As shown below, the status of
various items is displayed. The communications cycle time and refresh cycle time
are updated only when this window is opened or when the PLC operating status is
changed.
Select either the Run or
Stop option and then click
the Set button.
4 Select the Run Option in the Operation Field.
5 Click the Set Button.
The data links will start, and the Operational Status box will be displayed.
Note
• The data link mode (manual/automatic) and data link operation are determined by
the data link setup at the startup node. With manual setting the links, it is necessary
to set, for the startup node, the data link table and the data link mode (manual
setting) in the DM parameter area. If these are not set correctly, the data links will not
start.
• Check the following points before starting the data links.
With manual setting, the appropriate data link table must be set for each node
executing the data links. Data link tables must be deleted for nodes that are not
participating in the data links. Also, even when the correct data link tables are set,
make sure that there will be no effect on the equipment before starting or stopping
the data links.
Stopping Data Links
1 Click the Stop Option in the Operation Field in the Datalink Status Dialog Box.
2 Click the Set Button.
The data links will be stopped.
4-40
4-4
4-4-1
4-4
Automatically Set Data Links
Procedure Through Data Link Startup
Automatically Set Data Links
This section explains how to make the settings for automatically set data links.
Make the settings in the Automatic Datalink (Controller Link) or Automatic Datalink
(SYSMAC LINK) Dialog Box.
First make the settings for data link operation at PLC startup, and for the automatic
data link setup parameters, and then transfer the data to the startup node.
When using automatically set data links, there is no need to create data link tables
with the Data Link Editor.
Note: With CX-Programmer Ver.6.0 or higher, data links can also be set by setting parameters
for automatically set data links in the Special I/O Unit settings in the I/O Table Window.
4-4-1
Procedure Through Data Link Startup
Connect online to the startup PLC as the target PLC.
Select Network - Work Online (or Auto Online) from the menu bar.
Start the Data Link Component.
While online, right-click the Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit in the Online Connection
Information Window and select Start DataLink from the menu bar (or while offline, select Tools Start DataLink).
Set the automatic data link setup parameters.
1) Select Online - Automatic Datalink Setup from the DataLink Component Window.
2) Select the Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit mounted to the PLC.
3) Select Automatic in the Generation Type Field in the Automatic Datalink Dialog Box,
and make the settings for the automatically set data link areas (start words, sizes, and
nodes participating in data links for Area 1 and Area 2).
4) To have the data links started when
the PLC is started, set Start for the
status at startup.
Transfer the automatic data link setup parameters to the startup node. (Click the
Write Button.)
Turn ON the power to the PLC.
Start the data links.
Datalink Component Window:
1) Online - Status
2) Select the Run option in the Operation
field, and then click the Set button.
4-41
4-4
Automatically Set Data Links
4-4-2
Controller Link Automatic Setup
4-4-2
Controller Link Automatic Setup
1 Before executing the following operations, connect online to the PLC that is serving
as the startup node (making it the target PLC).
Select Network - Work Online or Network - Auto Online from the menu bar.
2 Right-click the Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit in the Online Connection
Information Window and select Start Data Link from the popup menu. Either the
Datalink Component (Controller Link) or Datalink Component (SYSMAC LINK)
Window will be displayed.
Note: Start Data Link cannot be selected if there is not a Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC
LINK Unit mounted in the PLC that is connected online.
3 Select Automatic Datalink Setup from the Online Menu.
The Automatic Datalink Dialog Box will be displayed.
4-42
4-4
4-4-2
Automatically Set Data Links
Controller Link Automatic Setup
Set the following items.
Setting field
Generation Type
Automatic Datalink Type
Power Up Run State
Automatic Data Link
Area
Setting
Select Automatic.
Select Equality layout, Common type, 1 to 1 type, or Chain type to
set the data link areas. Refer to Automatically Set Data Link Areas
for details.
Select Start or Stop. Select Start to automatically start the data
links when power is turned ON without performing a specific
startup operation. If Start is set, it will be set in the Controller Link
startup node.
Set the area, start word, and
size for area 1.
Set the status start word.
Set the area, start word, and
size for area 2.
Set
the
nodes
to
participate in the data
links.
Automatically Set Data Link Areas
If the following Controller Link Units/Support Boards are used, data links can be set
between a master and slaves using 1:N allocations. Any of the following four link
patterns can be used.
• Equality (same a previous automatic settings)
• Common type
• 1 to 1 type
• Chain type
Applicable Models:
• CS1W-CLK21-V1
• CS1W-CLK12-V1
• 3G8F7-CLK21-V1(-EV1)
• 3G8F7-CLK12-V1(-EV1)
• CS1W-CLK52-V1
• 3G8F7-CLK52-V1(-EV1)
• CJ1W-CLK21-V1
Note: Automatically set 1:N allocations are not possible for any models other than those
listed above. Refer to the Controller Link Unit Operation Manual for details.
4-43
4-4
Automatically Set Data Links
4-4-2
Controller Link Automatic Setup
Equality Layout (Previous Method)
This is the previous automatic data link type where all nodes are allocated the same sizes of data
links.
Settings Common to All Automatic Data Link Types
B
C
D
A
No.
A
Item
Generation
Type
Description of function
Select Automatic. (If Manual is selected, data links will be
run using data link tables set separately.)
B
C
Power Up
Run State
Close
Select Start to automatically start data links when power is
turned ON to the PLC.
Closes the Automatic Datalink Dialog Box.
D
E
Read
Write
Reads the settings from the PLC.
Writes the settings to the PLC.
(If the Power Up Run State is set to Start, the data links
will start running when the settings are written to the PLC.)
F
G
Help
Automatic
Datalink
Type
H
Result
Displays help.
Select the type of data links to be automatically set up
from the following.
Equality Layout (Previous method)
Common Type (1:N settings)
1 to 1 Type (1:N settings)
Chain Type (1:N settings)
The status is displayed when the Read or Write Button is
clicked.
E
F
(1)
(2 )
(3)
(4)
(6)
(5)
H
Equality Layout Settings
Area 1
(1) Area and Start Word
(5) Participating nodes
1
1
No.
(1)
1
Description of function
Set the area and the start data link word
to use for area 1.
Set the send size per node for area 1.
Set the area and the start data link word
to use for area 2.
Set the send size per node for area 2.
Set the nodes to participate in the data
links.
Set the first word to store data link status.
(If 0 words is set, the default area will be
used.)
(2) Size
1
(Same as (2).)
2
2
2
2
(3)
3
3
3
3
(4)
Area and Start Word
for Area 2
Size of Area 2
(5)
Nodes
4
4
4
4
(6)
Status start word
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
(2)
Area 1
(Same as (2).)
(Same as (2).)
Area 2
(3) Area and Start Word
(4) Size
Area 2
(Same as (4).)
4-44
Item
Area and Start Word
for Area 1
Size of Area 1
Features of Equality Layout
• The send data sizes is the same for all nodes for each area.
• Area 1 is selected from the bit-access areas (e.g., CIO Area) and area 2 is
selected from word-access areas (e.g., DM Area).
• Data link areas are allocated in ascending order of node addresses.
• Data link participation can be specified for each node.
• The same data link areas are shared by all nodes participating in the data links.
4-4
4-4-2
Automatically Set Data Links
Controller Link Automatic Setup
Common Type
Common Type Settings
No.
(1)
(2)
Item
Area and Start Word
for Area 1
Master size
(3)
Slave size
(2)
Description of function
Set the area and the start data link word
to use for area 1.
Set the area 1 send size for the master
node.
Set the area 1 send size for the slave
node.
Set the area and the start data link word
to use for area 2.
Set the area 2 send size for the master
node.
Set the area 2 send size for the slave
node.
(1 )
(3)
(4)
(4 )
(6 )
(5)
Area and Start Word
for Area 2
Master size
(6)
Slave size
(7)
Nodes
Set the nodes to participate in the data
links.
(8)
Status start word
Set the first word to store data link status.
(If 0 words is set, the default area will be
used.)
(5 )
(8 )
(7 )
Features of Common Type 1:N Allocation
• Data communications are 1:1 between the master node and slave nodes.
• All slave nodes receive the data sent by the master node.
• The master node receives all data sent by the slaves. The reception size
for the master node is thus the node send data size times the number of
slave nodes.
• Slaves do not send or receive data with other slaves.
• Area 1 is selected from the bit-access areas (e.g., CIO Area) and area 2 is
selected from word-access areas (e.g., DM Area).
• Data link areas are allocated in ascending order of node addresses.
• Data link participation can be specified for each node.
• The same area classification can be used for both Area 1 and Area 2,
provided that the same addresses are not used (CS/CJ-series Controller
Link Units with unit Ver. 1.2 or later).
(7) Participating nodes
Area 1
(1) Area and Start Word
Area 1
(2) Master size
(3) Slave size
Master node
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
(Same as (3).)
3
(Same as (3).)
4
Area 2
(4) Area and Start Word
(5) Master size
Area 2
Slave node
(6) Slave size
(Same as (6).)
3
(Same as (6).)
4
1 to 1 Type
1 to 1 Type Settings
No.
Item
Description of function
(1)
Link Area and
Start Word
Set the area and start data link word.
(2)
Master, Common
Send Words
Set the send size of the data to send
from the master node to all slave
nodes. The same size of data is sent to
all nodes.
(3)
Master, Individual
Send Words
Set the send size for the master node
to sent individually to each slave node.
(4)
Slave, Send
Words
Set the send size of the data sent from
each slave node to the master node.
(5)
Nodes
Set the nodes participating in the data
links.
(6)
Status start
word
Set the start word to store data link
status. (If 0 words is set, the default
area will be used.)
(1 )
(2 )
(3 )
(4 )
(6 )
(5 )
4-45
4-4
Automatically Set Data Links
4-4-2
Controller Link Automatic Setup
Features of 1 to 1 Type 1:N Allocation
• Data communications are 1:1 between the master node and slave nodes.
• All slave nodes receive part of the data sent by the master node. In addition,
each slave node receives unique data from the master node (see a to d in
figure).
• The master node receives all data sent by the slaves. The data sizes are
fixed for all nodes.
• Slaves do not send or receive data with other slaves.
• One area is selected from the bit-access areas (e.g., CIO Area) or
word-access areas (e.g., DM Area).
• Data link areas are allocated in ascending order of node addresses.
• Data link participation can be specified for each node.
(5) Participating nodes
Master node
Slave node
(1) Area and Start Word
1a
1a
1a
1a
1b
1b
1c
1d
1c
2
3
4
(2) Master, Common Send Words
(3) Master, Individual Send Words
(Same as (3).)
1d
(Same as (3).)
(4) Slave, Send Words
2
3
(Same as (4).)
4
(Same as (4).)
Chain Type
Chain Type Settings
No.
(1)
(2)
Item
Link Area and Start
Word
Master, Common
Send Words
(1)
(2)
(3)
(3)
(4)
Each Node,
Receive and Send
Nodes
(5)
Status start word
(5)
(4)
(4) Participating nodes
(1) Area and Start Word
Slave node
Master node
1a
1a
1a
1a
1b
1b
2
3
(2) Master, Common
Send Words
(3) Each Node, Received
and Sent
2
2
(Same as (3).)
3
(Same as (3).)
4
(Same as (3).)
4-46
3
4
Description of function
Set the area and the start data link
word.
Set the send size of the data to send
from the master node to all slave
nodes. The same size of data is sent
to all nodes.
Set the send size of data for each
node to send to the next node.
Set the nodes participating in the data
links.
Set the start word to store data link
status. (If 0 words is set, the default
area will be used.)
Features of Chain Type 1:N Allocation
• Data communications are 1:1 between the master node and slave nodes.
• All slave nodes receive part of the data sent by the master node (1a in figure).
• The master node receives all data sent by the slaves. The data sizes are fixed
for all nodes.
• Each slave nodes receives data from the previous node and then sends data
to the next node. Data is thus passed in ascending order of the nodes
participating in the data link.
• One area is selected from the bit-access areas (e.g., CIO Area) or
word-access areas (e.g., DM Area).
• Data link areas are allocated in ascending order of node addresses.
• Data link participation can be specified for each node.
4-4
4-4-3
4-4-3
Automatically Set Data Links
SYSMAC LINK Automatic Setup
SYSMAC LINK Automatic Setup
1 Before executing the following operations, connect online to the PLC that is serving
as the startup node (making it the target PLC).
Select Network - Work Online or Network - Auto Online from the menu bar.
2 Right-click the SYSMAC LINK Unit in the Online Connection Information Window
and select Start Data Link from the popup menu. The SYSMAC LINK Datalink
Component Window will be displayed.
Note: Start Data Link cannot be selected if there is not a Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC
LINK Unit mounted in the PLC that is connected online.
3 Select Online - Automatic Datalink Setup from the menu bar.
The Automatic Datalink (SYSMAC LINK) Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select for manual setup.
For automatic setup,
select CIO only, DM only,
or CIO and DM.
Reads settings data from
the PLC.
Transfers settings data to
the PLC.
For automatic setup, select
from among the following
areas and words.
• CIO 04CH, DM 08CH
• CIO 08CH, DM 16CH
• CIO 16CH, DM 32CH
• CIO 32CH, DM 64CH
4 Select the memory area for automatic setup (CIO Area only, DM Area only, or CIO
and DM Areas), and select the area and word settings from the following list.
4-47
4-4
Automatically Set Data Links
4-4-4
Transferring Automatic Data Link Setup Parameters to the Startup Node
Note
Word Allocations for SYSMAC LINK Automatic Setup (Example: CS/CJ Series)
CIO Area (words)
CIO 1000 to CIO
1003
CIO 1004 to CIO
1007
CIO 1008 to CIO
1011
CIO 1012 to CIO
1015
CIO 1016 to CIO
1019
CIO 1020 to CIO
1023
CIO 1024 to CIO
1027
CIO 1028 to CIO
1031
CIO 1032 to CIO
1035
CIO 1036 to CIO
1039
CIO 1040 to CIO
1043
CIO 1044 to CIO
1047
CIO 1048 to CIO
1051
CIO 1052 to CIO
1055
CIO 1056 to CIO
1059
CIO 1060 to CIO
1063
4-4-4
DM Area (words)
Area and word settings
CIO: 8
CIO: 16
words
words
DM: 16
DM: 32
words
words
CIO: 4
words
DM: 8
words
D00000 to D00007
#1
D00008 to D00015
#2
D00016 to D00023
#3
D00024 to D00031
#4
D00032 to D00039
#5
D00040 to D00047
#6
D00048 to D00055
#7
D00056 to D00063
#8
D00064 to D00071
#9
D00072 to D00079
#10
D00080 to D00087
#11
D00088 to D00095
#12
D00096 to D00103
#13
D00104 to D00111
#14
D00112 to D00119
#15
D00120 to D00127
#16
CIO: 32
words
DM: 64
words
#1
31
#2
#1
#3
#2
#4
#5
#3
#6
#2
#7
#4
#8
Transferring Automatic Data Link Setup Parameters to the
Startup Node
The automatic data link parameters that have been set are then sent to the connected
startup node PLC. It is also possible to read the automatic data link parameters that
have been set for the PLC.
Transferring Data to the Startup Node PLC
1 Click the Write Button in the Automatic Datalink Setup Dialog Box.
The following dialog box will be displayed for confirmation.
2 Click the Yes Button.
The set data will be transferred to the startup node PLC.
4-48
4-4
4-4-4
Note
Automatically Set Data Links
Transferring Automatic Data Link Setup Parameters to the Startup Node
• The data link mode (manual/automatic) and data link operation are determined by
the data link setup at the startup node. With automatic setup, it is necessary to set,
for the startup node, the data link mode (automatic) and the number of data link
words in the Automatic Datalink Setup Dialog Box. If these are not set correctly, the
data links will not start.
• Before starting the data links with automatic setup, make sure that the correct
automatic data link setup parameters are set for the data link startup node. If
incorrect automatic data link setup parameters are set, it may cause the equipment
to operate unpredictably. Even when the correct parameters are set, make sure that
there will be no adverse effect on the equipment before starting or stopping the data
links.
Reading Data from the Startup Node
Perform this operation to check or change settings.
1 Click the Read Button in either the Automatic Datalink (Controller Link) or the
Automatic Datalink Setup Dialog Box.
The following dialog box will be displayed for confirmation.
2 Click the Yes Button.
The set data will be transferred from the PLC and displayed at the Automatic
Datalink (Controller Link) or the Automatic Datalink Setup Dialog Box.
4-49
4-4
Automatically Set Data Links
4-4-5
Monitoring Data Link Status
4-4-5
Monitoring Data Link Status
Monitoring Data Link Status, Such as Communications Cycle Time
1 Select Network - Work Online from the menu bar to connect online.
2 Select Tools - Start Data Link.
3 Select Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK, and then click the OK Button. The
Datalink Component Dialog Box will be displayed.
4 Select Online – Datalink Operation/Status. The Data Link Status Dialog Box will
be displayed.
4-50
4-4
Automatically Set Data Links
4-4-5
Monitoring Data Link Status
The following information is displayed in the Network Properties Area.
Data link start node
Polling node number
Network cycle time
Current and maximum data link refresh
times
The following information is displayed in the Operational Status Area.
CPU Unit errors
Data link status
CPU Unit’s operating mode
Communications status
Checking Automatically Set Data Link Tables
The Data Link Component Window is designed for manually setting data links. If data
link status is read from the Data Link Component while automatically set data links are
running, the data links may not be displayed properly. Furthermore, if the data link
tables that were read are then downloaded to a PLC, the data link tables that were
originally in the PLC will be overwritten. To prevent these problems, use the following
method to check automatically set data link tables.
1. Place the CX-Integrator online with the network PLC from which automatically set
data link tables are to be read.
2. Select Tools - Start Data Link from the menu bar to open the Data Link
Component.
3. Select Online - Datalink Operation/Status from the Data Link Component menu
bar.
4. The Datalink Status Dialog Box will be displayed.
Check the data link start node.
Confirm the data
link start node here.
4-51
4-4
Automatically Set Data Links
4-4-5
Monitoring Data Link Status
5. Place the CX-Integrator online with the data link start node displayed above.
6. Reconnect the CX-Integrator online and open the Data Link Component.
7. Select Online - Start Data Link from the Data Link Component menu bar. The
Automatic Datalink Dialog Box will be displayed and the settings will be
automatically uploaded.
4-52
Communications
Section 5 Ethernet
This section describes the operations specific to Ethernet.
5
5-1
Broadcast Node Search
5-1-1
Overview
5-1
Broadcast Node Search
5-1-1
Overview
The IP broadcast function can be used to search for all OMRON nodes within the
same segment of an Ethernet network, and to display them in a list. Any of the
OMRON nodes displayed on the list can be selected for online connection.
As shown in the following table, however, there are restrictions on the execution of this
function depending on the types of devices connected to the network and the
operating status of the network.
Devices connected in the
same segment of the
Ethernet network
When configured with OMRON
Ethernet Units and
FinsGateway only
When there are devices other
than OMRON Ethernet Units
and FinsGateway
Ethernet network in
operation
Can be executed.
Ethernet network not in
operation (during trial
operation)
Can be executed.
Cannot be executed.
Can be executed.
!Caution Do not execute a broadcast node search if a node exists for something
other than an OMRON Ethernet Unit or FinsGateway within the same
segment on Ethernet, and when the Ethernet network system is in
operation. When a broadcast node search is executed, an OMRON FINS
command is sent to all nodes in the segment. Therefore, if a node exists
for something other than an OMRON Ethernet Unit or FinsGateway, the
FINS command will not be received at that node and unexpected
operation may occur.
5-1-2
Procedure
Node Search
1. Select Tools – Ethernet tool – Broadcast node search is selected. The following
dialog box will be displayed.
5-2
5-1
Broadcast Node Search
5-1-2
2.
Procedure
Check to confirm that no nodes other than OMRON Ethernet Units or
FinsGateway exist in the same segment, and then click the OK Button. A list of
nodes in the same segment will then be displayed in the Ethernet Search Result
Dialog Box.
Online Connection
1. To connect online any of the nodes that have been found, select the node from the
list in the Ethernet Search Result Dialog Box and then click the Connect Button.
Note
When the IP conversion for any node on Ethernet (i.e., an Ethernet Unit or personal computer) is
set for either the IP address table method or the combined method, the IP address table at the
CX-Integrator (personal computer) must be preset. (For details on setting IP address tables, refer
to Setting the IP Address Table at the CX-Programmer (Computer) in 2-2-2 Procedures.
5-3
5-2
Ping Test
5-2-1
Overview
5-2
Ping Test
5-2-1
Overview
The connection status of a target PLC can be checked by executing a ping test from a
PLC node connected on an Ethernet network. In the example shown here, PLC1 is
serially connected and a ping test is executed to check whether PLC3 is connected to
the Ethernet network.
Computer (CX-Integrator)
PING
Ethernet
HUB
Toolbus
PING Test 192.168.200.185
Example: CJ-series CJ-series PLC1
IP address: 192.168.200.104
Network address: 10
Node address: 104
5-2-2
CJ-series PLC2
IP address: 192.168.200.105
Network address: 10
Node address: 105
CS-series PLC3
IP address: 192.168.200.185
Network address: 1
Node address: 185
Procedure
1. After PLC1 is serially connected by an automatic online connection, right-click the
Ethernet Unit and select Connect.
2. After connecting to Ethernet, right-click the Ethernet Unit in the Online Connection
Information Window and select Ethernet tool - Ping test.
5-4
5-2
Ping Test
5-2-2
Procedure
3. The Ping Test Dialog Box will be displayed. Input 192.168.200.185 as the target IP
address, and then click the Ping Button.
4. The test result will be displayed in the Status field. In this case, “Node pinged
successfully” is displayed to confirm that PLC3 is connected to the Ethernet
network.
5-5
Communications
Section 6 DeviceNet
This section describes the settings and operations unique to DeviceNet networks,
including registering slaves in the master, I/O allocations, and device monitoring.
6
6-1 DeviceNet Setting Procedures
6-1-1 Designing Networks Offline
6-1
DeviceNet Setting Procedures
This section describes the setting operations that are unique to DeviceNet networks.
Refer to Section 2 Basic Operations for operation that are the same as those for other
networks.
The following flowcharts show the overall flow of DeviceNet settings.
6-1-1
Designing Networks Offline
Prior to constructing the actual network, it can be designed and the master and slave
parameters can be set with the CX-Integrator.
The set parameters can be saved as a network configuration file. The network
configuration file contains the parameters of all of the devices on the network.
Start the CX-Integrator.
Create the virtual network offline.
2-5 Creating Virtual Network Structures Offline
6-2 Setting Slave Parameters
Set the slave parameters
(only for the slaves that require parameter setting).
Register the slaves with the master.
Set the master’s parameters.
6-3 Adding Slaves to the Master
6-5 Editing Master Parameters
Save the settings in a CX-Integrator project file (.cin). 2-9 File Operations
6-1-2
Downloading Saved Parameters
The parameters for all of the devices on the network can be set (downloaded) from a
network configuration file saved in advance.
Start the CX-Integrator.
Read the CX-Integrator project file (.cin).
Connect to the network (online).
Download to the network or download
parameters to each device.
6-2
2-9 File Operations
2-2 Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
2-6 Manipulating Component Parameters
2-7 Uploading, Downloading, and Comparing Network
Parameters
6-1 DeviceNet Setting Procedures
6-1-3 Saving the Parameters for the Entire Existing Network
6-1-3
Saving the Parameters for the Entire Existing Network
The parameters for all of the devices on the network can be saved for use in
maintenance.
Start the CX-Integrator.
Connect to the network (online).
Upload from the network.
Save the settings as a CX-Integrator
project file (.cin).
2-2 Connecting Online to the Relay PLC
2-7 Uploading, Downloading, and Comparing Network
Parameters
2-9 File Operations
6-3
6-2 Setting Slave Parameters
6-2-1 Editing Slave Parameters
6-2
Setting Slave Parameters
6-2-1
Editing Slave Parameters
Component - Parameter - Edit
The parameters of some slaves can be set. However, doing so may cause the I/O size
to change. Because of this, the slave parameters must all be set before setting the
master’s parameters.
EDS files are required for setting the parameters. If there are no EDS files available,
they must be obtained from the device manufacturer.
Note
Slaves must be added to the Network Configuration Window to edit the parameters.
Refer to 2-5 Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline for information on creating
a virtual network.
To edit the parameters, use the following procedure.
1. Select the device.
2. Select Component - Parameter -Edit.
3. The following warning dialog box will be displayed if there are no editable
parameters.
Slaves for which this message is displayed do not require parameter setting.
The following dialog box will be displayed if editable parameters exist.
6-4
6-2 Setting Slave Parameters
6-2-1 Editing Slave Parameters
4. Select the parameter and press the Enter Key or double-click the parameter.
If a push-pin icon is displayed next to a parameter name, it is a read-only parameter
and cannot be edited.
The set value will be changed as shown below according to the parameter input
type.
Numerical Input within Certain Range
Set the value between the maximum and minimum values.
Selection from Limited Items
Select the set value from the set value list.
ON/OFF Settings
Select the item and turn it ON or OFF.
5. Press the Enter Key to input the set value.
Press the ESC Key to cancel the change.
6. Click the OK Button when all the items have been edited.
6-5
6-2 Setting Slave Parameters
6-2-2 Checking and Setting I/O Size
6-2-2
Checking and Setting I/O Size
Checking I/O Size
View - Property - I/O Information
The I/O size of this slave can be checked with the I/O Information Tab Page of the
Property Window. Check to make sure that the I/O size listed is correct. To change it,
use the following procedure.
Setting the I/O Size
For slaves in which the I/O size can be changed by switches, or by tools other than the
CX-Integrator, the CX-Integrator cannot be used to confirm that the I/O size is correct.
For these slaves, use the following procedure to directly input the I/O size.
1. Select the desired slave, then select View - Property.
2. Click the I/O Information Tab.
3. Click the Edit Button. The Edit I/O Size Dialog Box will be displayed.
4. Input the correct I/O size for each connection. If the connection is not known, input
the correct I/O size in the Poll settings.
5. Click the OK Button.
Note
6-6
The following are OMRON slaves.
• DRT1-AD04 Analog Input Terminal
Input (4-word/2-word) can be changed by DIP switch.
• GT1-AD08MX Analog Input Unit for MULTIPLE I/O TERMINAL.
Input (8-word/4-word) can be changed by DIP switch.
• NT-DRT21 Programmable Terminal DeviceNet Interface Unit
The I/O data area can be set from 1 to 64 words with the PT system menu.
• E3X-DRT21 Fiber Amplifier Communications Unit
Status and light levels can be added to input data.
Use the same kind of input procedure for slaves of other manufacturers that allow the
I/O size to be changed.
6-2 Setting Slave Parameters
6-2-2 Checking and Setting I/O Size
Obtaining I/O Size Information from the Master Scan List
When connecting the CX-Integrator to a network that is already operating, for example
using OMRON Master Units with fixed allocation, the slave I/O size can be obtained
from the master scan list for use in setting.
However, this is possible only with OMRON masters. Also, the slave I/O size cannot be
obtained from the slave function of the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) and CJ1W-DRM21.
Use the following procedure to obtain the I/O size from a master scan list.
1. Select the desired slave, then select View - Property.
2. Click the I/O Information Tab.
3. Click the Get I/O Size from the Scanlist Button.
Parameter Auto Update When I/O Size Changed
The function to automatically update the I/O size registered on the master scan list
when the I/O size is changed can be switched ON or OFF.
To automatically update the I/O size registered on the master scan list, select Tools DeviceNet tool - Parameter Auto Update when I/O Size Changed.
When this function is enabled, the
mark will be displayed in the menu. The default
is set to not automatically update.
Note
If the function to automatically update the I/O size is enabled and there is no EDS file,
some operations will cause the I/O size in the master scan list to be updated to zero.
For this reason, the function to automatically update the I/O size should normally be
disabled.
6-7
6-3 Adding Slaves to the Master
6-3-1 Automatic I/O Area Allocation with Registration
6-3
Adding Slaves to the Master
6-3-1
Automatic I/O Area Allocation with Registration
When a slave is registered to the master, it can automatically be allocated to the
memory block set for I/O allocation.
The allocation, for both Out Size and In Size, will be made in the order of registration
beginning with the unoccupied area of memory block 1. When memory block 1 is filled,
the allocation will be made to memory block 2. Before adding slaves, set the area and
range of the allocation memory block.
Note
The allocated words can be changed later if desired.
Setting the Allocation Memory Block
1. Select the master, then select Component - Parameter - Edit. The Edit Device
Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Click the I/O Allocation (OUT) Tab.
3. Click the Setup Button for Memory Block 1.
6-8
6-3 Adding Slaves to the Master
6-3-1 Automatic I/O Area Allocation with Registration
4. Set the area, start word, and the number of words for the block.
5. Set Memory Block 2 in the same way.
6. Click the I/O Allocation (IN) Tab, and make the memory block settings in the same
way as for the I/O Allocation (OUT).
Note
• If a block is not to be used, select Not Used for the area setting.
• Display Words refers to the number of words in the block displayed on the
CX-Integrator. This value is not downloaded to the master.
If the occupied area of the block is less than 100 words when uploaded, Display
Words will be set to 100 and displayed as such.
6-9
6-3 Adding Slaves to the Master
6-3-2 Adding Slaves
6-3-2
Adding Slaves
The following three methods are supported for adding slaves.
Dragging and Dropping
Select the slave from the Network Configuration Window on the right and drag and
drop it on the master icon.
When slaves are registered with the master, I/O words will be automatically allocated
to the slaves in the order they are registered.
Drag and drop the slave icon on
the master icon.
After Registration
When the slave is registered with
the master, the master’s node
address will be displayed.
6-10
6-3 Adding Slaves to the Master
6-3-2 Adding Slaves
Master Node Address Displayed after Registration
Register to Other Device
A slave can also be added by selecting the slave in the Network Configuration
Window, clicking the right mouse button, selecting Register to other Device or
selecting Component - Register to other Device, and then selecting the master from
the menu. The menu will appear on the right-hand side.
At the time of I/O allocation, the registered slave can be deleted or settings can be
made for the registered slave by using the Parameter Wizard or by editing the
parameters of the master.
Note
To select a device from the menu and register it, use the following procedure.
1. Select the device from the Network Configuration Window.
2. Select Component - Register to other Device.
The following master candidates will be displayed in the Register to other Device
Menu.
3. Select the device with which the slave is to be registered.
The slave registered will be automatically added to the scan list of the master and
I/O will be allocated.
If the user attempts to register a slave that has already been registered with
another device, the following confirmation window will be displayed. By clicking the
Yes Button, the duplicated registration of the slave will be possible.
However, if the registration is duplicated, the slave will only be able to communicate
with one device. If the same slave is registered to multiple masters, it will lead to
communications errors.
6-11
6-3 Adding Slaves to the Master
6-3-2 Adding Slaves
Registering in the Edit Device Parameters Window
Slaves can be added and I/O areas allocated in the Edit Device Parameters Window.
Refer to 6-7 Master Parameter Editing Details (Tab Descriptions) for details.
6-12
6-4 Setting Master Properties
6-4-1 CS1W-DRM21(-V1) and CJ1W-DRM21
6-4
Setting Master Properties
This section describes how to set properties for OMRON masters. The Master Unit is
right-clicked and Property is selected from the popup menu.
6-4-1
CS1W-DRM21(-V1) and CJ1W-DRM21
To set the master and slave functions, use the following procedure.
1. Right-click the master from the Network Configuration Window on the right and
select View - Property from the popup menu. The following dialog box will be
displayed.
2. Click the Unit Function Tab.
3. Select Enable Master Function and/or Enable Slave Function.
6-13
6-4 Setting Master Properties
6-4-2 CVM1-DRM21-V1 or C200HW-DRM21-V1
6-4-2
CVM1-DRM21-V1 or C200HW-DRM21-V1
To set the PLC model on which the Unit is mounted, use the following procedure.
1. Right-click the Master Unit in the Network Configuration Window and select
Property from the popup menu. The following dialog box will be displayed.
2. Click the PLC Information Tab.
3. Click the Change Unit Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
4. Specify the PLC model. Click the OK Button.
Note
6-14
When the PLC model is changed, all the settings presently made will be cleared and
default values will be set.
6-5 Editing Master Parameters
6-5
Editing Master Parameters
Device parameters are classified into master device parameters and slave device
parameters. This section description provides information on how to edit master device
parameters.
The master device parameters that can be edited include slave device I/O allocations
to the master, communication cycle time settings, and connection settings.
The following two methods can be used to edit parameters for the master.
1) Parameter Wizard
The Parameter Wizard is an interactive interface that makes I/O allocations
possible in order of node addresses.
2) Editing Parameters
Parameters can be edited to allocate I/O and make settings as required,
including the communication cycle time, connection, and device information
check settings.
The CX-Integrator allows settings, such as the following function settings, for the
OMRON CS1W-DRM21(-V1) DeviceNet Unit, CJ1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit,
CVM1-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit, and C200HW-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master
Unit.
When transferring parameters edited for the CVM1-DRM21-V1,C200HW-DRM21-V1,
or 3G8F7-DRM21, however, they can be transferred from the CX-Integrator only by
going through a CS/CJ-series PLC.
Setting method
Parameter Wizard
Parameter editing
(Component - Parameter
(Component - Wizard)
Parameter - Edit)
I/O Allocations
Parameter Wizard
I/O Allocation (OUT) and
I/O Allocation (IN) Tabs
Communication Cycle --Communication Cycle
Time
Time Tab
Connections
Advanced Setup Button
in General Tab
Device Information
Compare
Message Timer
Message Timer Tab
Slave Function
Slave Function Tab
General Tab
Startup Remote I/O
Communications
Explicit Message
Communications
Function
CS1W-DRM21 (-V1) or
CJ1W-DRM21
C200HW-DRM21-V1 or
CVM1-DRM21-V1
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
No
OK
No
OK
OK
No
No
(See note 1.)
OK
(See note 2.)
OK
Note 1. The same function can be achieved with the setting to enable/disable the master
function.
2. Explicit message communications is possible whether or not registration has been
made on the scan list.
Note
When editing parameters on the CX-Integrator for the CVM1-DRM21-V1,
C200HW-DRM21-V1, or 3G8F7-DRM21, download them to the Master Unit by going
through a CS/CJ-series PLC.
Note
Before making device I/O allocations to the master, the device must be added to the
Network Configuration Window, regardless of whether or not it has been registered as
a slave with the master. Refer to 2-5 Creating Virtual Network Configurations Offline for
information on creating a virtual network.
6-15
6-6 Parameter Wizard
6-6
Parameter Wizard
Component - Parameter - Wizard
• The Parameter Wizard is an interactive function making it possible to allocate I/O with
ease.
• This function ensures easy I/O allocations in order of node addresses beginning with
block 1.
When block 1 is full, the remaining I/O will be allocated to block 2. Each block consists
of a maximum of 100 words.
Note After I/O allocations are made with the Parameter Wizard, node addresses or I/O
allocations can be changed by editing the parameters individually.
The following procedure uses the Parameter Wizard with the
CS1W-DRM21(-V1)/CJ1W-DRM21 as an example. The same method can be used for
the CVM1-DRM21-V1 and C200HW-DRM21-V1.
Specify the first address of each block (fixed to 100 words in size), the allocation
method (i.e., allocation in blocks of words or minimum required number of words), and
the registration or deletion of slaves.
Note
• To make allocations in excess of 100 words per block, use Parameter - Edit.
• To allocate I/O of slave devices to the master with the Parameter Wizard, use the
following procedure.
1. Select the master.
2. Select Component - Parameter - Wizard.
3. When settings are made with the Parameter Wizard, the present settings will be
cleared and default values will be set. The following confirmation dialog box will be
displayed. Click the Yes Button.
4. The following Scan List Wizard-Set Memory Block’s Start Word Dialog Box will be
displayed.
Set the memory area to be used and the start word and click the Next Button. I/O
will be automatically allocated to block 1. When block 1 is full, I/O will be allocated
to block 2. Each block consists of a maximum of 100 words.
Note It is not possible to go to the next step if there is any duplication between blocks or
the first word is not within the permissible set range.
6-16
6-6 Parameter Wizard
5. The Scan list Wizard-Set How to Allocate I/O Date to PLC Memory Block Dialog
Box will be displayed.
Specify the allocation method and click the Next Button.
6-17
6-6 Parameter Wizard
The following two allocation methods are supported.
Allocate each node by word.
Slaves are always allocated memory starting with the seven
rightmost bytes in the word. Even slaves that require just one
byte of I/O memory will be allocated one word.
Example:
15
High
to
8
7
Low
to
0
#0
#1
Node address order
#3
#4
#6
: Not used
If there are slaves that require just one byte of I/O memory,
they are allocated the rightmost seven bits or leftmost seven
bits so that the total number of occupied words is minimized.
Example:
Allocate so that total number of
allocated words is minimized.
15
High
to
8
7
Low
to
0
#0
#1
#3
Node address order
#4
#6
: Not used
An allocation example is shown below.
I/O Example:
#00
1 byte
#01
2 bytes
#02
1 bytes
#03
4 bytes
#04
1 byte
#05
1 byte
Allocation in Units of Words
High
15
Low
8
+0 word
+1 word
+2 word
+3 word
+4 word
+5 word
+6 word
7
0
#00
#01
#02
#03
#03
#04
#05
Allocation with Allocated Words Minimized
High
15
+0 word
+1 word
+2 word
+3 word
+4 word
6-18
Low
8
7
#02
0
#00
#01
#03
#03
#05
#04
6-6 Parameter Wizard
6. Slave Registration/Deletion
The following Scan List Wizard - Set Memory Block’s Start Word Dialog Box will be
displayed.
Specify the slave to be registered with the master and click the Next Button.
The devices on the network are shown in the Registered Device List.
To cancel the registration of a device, click the following icon:
The user cannot go to the next step if no devices are registered.
7. The following Scan List Wizard-Allocated Result Dialog Box will be displayed after
remote I/O allocations have been made as specified.
Click the Finish Button if the displayed details are OK. The Parameter Wizard will
finish. The user can click the Back Button to return to the previous dialog box.
The displayed details will be set as device parameters.
6-19
6-6 Parameter Wizard
8. If the CX-Integrator is online, the following dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Yes Button and edit the master parameters. Remote I/O communications
according to the new settings will start.
Note
6-20
Device parameters set with the Parameter Wizard can be edited by individually if
necessary.
6-7 Master Parameter Editing Details (Tab Descriptions)
6-7
Master Parameter Editing Details (Tab
Descriptions)
Component - Parameter - Edit
The user can individually edit allocations for remote I/O communications and make
advanced settings, such as the communication cycle time and connection settings.
Possible setting items vary with the master model.
The following description provides information on editing individual parameters. Refer
to 6-8 Manual I/O Allocations and 6-9 Advanced Settings (Connection, Communication
Cycle Time, Slave Function Settings, Etc.) for further information on editing
parameters manually.
To edit the parameters, use the following procedure.
1. Select the device for which parameters are to be edited.
2. Select Component - Parameter -Edit.
3. The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed.
Note
• If the I/O size of the device displayed in the Network Configuration Window does not
coincide with the I/O data size of the device registered with the scan list, the following
warning dialog will be displayed along with the Edit Device Parameters Window. In this
case, the I/O size in the scan list will take priority.
If an EDS file has not been installed in the slave, obtain the EDS file and install it.
Also, set the correct I/O size in all slaves that require changes in the I/O size.
• If the slave device registered with the scan list has already been registered with
another master, the following warning will be displayed along with the Edit Device
Parameters Dialog Box.
Revise the slaves registered in the scan list.
6-21
6-7 Master Parameter Editing Details (Tab Descriptions)
6-7-1 Edit Device Parameters on CS1W-DRM21(-V1)/CJ1W-DRM21
6-7-1
Edit Device Parameters on CS1W-DRM21(-V1)/CJ1W-DRM21
Note
When the CS1W-DRM21(-V1)/CJ1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit is used, select the device
and then select Component - Property and turn ON Enable Master Function in the
Properties Dialog Box.
The following dialog box will be displayed when the CS1W-DRM21(-V1)/
CJ1W-DRM21 is selected.
The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box consists of the following six tab pages.
Tab
General
I/O Allocation (OUT)
I/O Allocation (IN)
Communication Cycle Time
Slave Function
Message Timer
6-22
Description
Registers the device with the scan list and makes I/O allocations
automatically.
Allocates the output data and sets the output memory block for the
CPU Unit with the advanced setup function.
Allocates the input data and sets the input memory block in the CPU
Unit with the advanced setup function.
Sets the communication cycle time.
Makes necessary settings that enable the slave function.
Makes monitor timer settings for message communications (both
explicit and FINS message
communications).
6-7 Master Parameter Editing Details (Tab Descriptions)
6-7-1 Edit Device Parameters on CS1W-DRM21(-V1)/CJ1W-DRM21
General Tab Page of CS1W-DRM21(-V1)/CJ1W-DRM21
Unregistered Device List
Device Register button
Device Unregister button
Automatic allocation as registered
An asterisk (*) appears when
advanced settings have been
made for the connection.
Registered Device List
Register/Unregistered Button
Advanced Setup Button
Compare parameters (Usable only when online.)
Download parameters (Usable only when online.)
Upload parameters (Usable only when online.)
Item
Unregistered Device List
Registered Device List
Device Register and Unregister
Buttons
Auto allocation as is registered
Register/Unregister Buttons
Advanced Setup Button
Upload
Download
Compare
Description
Displays unregistered devices. Unregistered devices refer to
slaves that are displayed in the
Network Configuration Window but have not been registered
with a master.
Displays slaves that are presently registered with a master.
: By pressing this button, the selected device will move
from the Unregistered Device List to the Registered Device
List.
: By pressing this button, the device will move from the
Registered Device List to the Unregistered Device List.
Check this box when registering the slaves with the master in
the Edit Device Parameters Window so that the slaves will be
allocated to an unused area in blocks of words in order of
registration.
Click this button to unregister the I/O allocation of the selected
slaves or to make the I/O reallocation of the slaves in the order
of earlier addresses.
Click this button to set the connections or display the device
information.
Uploads the parameters of the network device online.
Downloads the parameters to the network device on line.
Compares the parameters of the selected network device with
the parameters stored in the CX-Integrator.
6-23
6-7 Master Parameter Editing Details (Tab Descriptions)
6-7-2 Editing Device Parameters on CVM1-DRM21-V1 and C200HW-DRM21-V1
6-7-2
Editing Device Parameters on CVM1-DRM21-V1 and
C200HW-DRM21-V1
The following dialog box will be displayed when the CVM1-DRM21-V1 or
C200HW-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit is selected.
The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box consists of the following four tab pages.
Tab
General
I/O Allocation (OUT)
I/O Allocation (IN)
Communication Cycle
Time
6-24
Description
Registers the device with the scan list and makes I/O allocations
automatically.
Allocates the output data and sets the output memory block the CPU Unit
with the advanced setup function.
Allocates the input data and sets the input memory block in the CPU Unit
with the advanced setup function.
Sets the communication cycle time.
6-7 Master Parameter Editing Details (Tab Descriptions)
6-7-2 Editing Device Parameters on CVM1-DRM21-V1 and C200HW-DRM21-V1
General Tab of CVM1-DRM21-V1 or C200HW-DRM21-V1
Unregistered Device List
Device Register button
Device Unregister button
Automatic allocation as registered
An asterisk (*) appears when the
slave is registered to allow explicit
message only.
Registered Device List
Register/Unregistered Button
Explicit Message Communication
Only
Start Remote I/O Communication at
Start-Up
Compare parameters (Usable only when online.)
Download parameters (Usable only when online.)
Upload parameters (Usable only when online.)
Item
Description
Unregistered Device List Displays unregistered devices. Unregistered devices refer to slaves that
are displayed in the Network Configuration Window but have not been
registered with the master.
Registered Device List
Displays slaves that are presently registered with the master.
Device Register and
: By pressing this button, the selected device will move from the
Unregister Buttons
Unregistered Device List to the Registered Device List.
: By pressing this button, the device will move from the Registered
Device List to the Unregistered Device List.
Auto allocation as is
Check this box when registering the slaves with the master in the Edit
registered
Device Parameters Window so that the slaves will be allocated to an
unoccupied area in blocks of words in order of registration.
Allocate/Unallocated
Click this button to unregister the I/O allocations or to make the I/O
Button
reallocations.
Explicit Message
Check this button to enable explicit message communications
Communication Only
(transmission only) without remote I/O communications.
Button
Start Remote I/O
Check this box to enable remote I/O communications automatically when
Communication at
the master starts up.
Start-Up
Upload
Uploads the parameters of the network device online.
Download
Downloads the parameters to the network device on line.
Compare
Compares the parameters of the selected network device with the
parameters stored in the CX-Integrator.
6-25
6-7 Master Parameter Editing Details (Tab Descriptions)
6-7-3 Editing Device Parameters on 3G8F7-DRM21 DeviceNet PCI Board Scanner
6-7-3
Editing Device Parameters on 3G8F7-DRM21 DeviceNet PCI
Board Scanner
The following dialog box will be displayed when the 3G8F7-DRM21 DeviceNet PCI
Board Scanner is selected.
The Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box consists of the following four tab pages.
Tab
General
Communication Cycle Time
Slave Function
Message Timer
6-26
Description
Registers the device with the scan list and makes I/O allocations
automatically.
Sets the communication cycle time.
Makes necessary settings that enable the slave function.
Makes monitor timer settings for message communications (both
explicit and FINS message
communications).
6-7 Master Parameter Editing Details (Tab Descriptions)
6-7-3 Editing Device Parameters on 3G8F7-DRM21 DeviceNet PCI Board Scanner
General Tab of 3G8F7-DRM21
Unregistered Device List
Device Register button
Device Unregister button
An asterisk (*) appears when
advanced settings have been
made for the connection.
Registered Device List
Advanced Setup Button
Compare parameters (Usable only when online.)
Download parameters (Usable only when online.)
Upload parameters (Usable only when online.)
Item
Unregistered Device List
Registered Device List
Device Register and Unregister
Buttons
Advanced Setup Button
Upload
Download
Compare
Description
Displays unregistered devices. Unregistered devices refer to
slaves that are displayed in the
Network Configuration Window but have not been registered
with the master.
Displays slaves that are presently registered with the master.
: By pressing this button, the selected device will move
from the Unregistered Device List to the Registered Device
List.
: By pressing this button, the device will move from the
Registered Device List to the Unregistered Device List.
Click this button to set the connections or display the device
information.
Uploads the parameters of the network device online.
Downloads the parameters to the network device on line.
Compares the parameters of the selected network device with
the parameters stored in the CX-Integrator.
6-27
6-7 Master Parameter Editing Details (Tab Descriptions)
6-7-4 Canceling Slave Registration with the Master
6-7-4
Canceling Slave Registration with the Master
Component - Parameter - Edit - General Tab - Register/Unregistered
(Allocate/Unallocated) Button
Note: This procedure is the same for the CS1W-DRM21(-V1), CJ1W-DRM21,
CVM1-DRM21-V1, C200HW-DRM21-V1, and 3G8F7-DRM21.
The General Tab Page is used to register slaves with the master or unregister slaves.
To register or unregister a slave, use the following procedure.
1. Select the slave to be registered or unregistered.
2. Click the
Register or
Unregister Button.
An unregistered slave will be displayed in the Unregistered Device List.
A registered slave will be displayed in the Registered Device List.
6-7-5
Automatic Allocation with Registration
Component - Parameter - Edit - General Tab - Auto allocation as is
registered - Register/Unregistered (Allocate/Unallocated) Button
Note: This procedure is the same for the CS1W-DRM21(-V1), CJ1W-DRM21,
CVM1-DRM21-V1, and C200HW-DRM21-V1.
• If the Auto allocation as is registered Box is checked when the slaves are registered
with the master in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box, the I/O allocation of the
slaves will be made in units of words automatically in order of registration. This
checkbox will be enabled in the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box only. The
automatic allocation of the slaves will be made in units of words automatically in order
of registration beginning with the unoccupied area of block 1 of the corresponding
memory block.
• It is possible to unregister the I/O allocation of the selected slaves or to make the I/O
reallocation of the slaves in the order of earlier addresses anytime by clicking on
Register/Unregistered Button. The advanced setup function (explained later) will not
be available if automatic allocation is selected.
6-28
6-8 Manual I/O Allocations
6-8-1 I/O Allocation Tab Page
6-8
Manual I/O Allocations
Component - Parameter - Edit - I/O Allocation Tab
Manual I/O allocation is possible with no restrictions on node address order or block
size 1 or 2.
Note: This procedure is the same for the CS1W-DRM21(-V1), CJ1W-DRM21,
CVM1-DRM21-V1, and C200HW-DRM21-V1. In the following setting example, the
CS1W-DRM21(-V1) is used.
6-8-1
I/O Allocation Tab Page
Make the following settings on the I/O Allocation Tab Page.
1. I/O allocation of each OUT/IN memory block (1/2) to the I/O memory area of the
CPU Unit
2. Click the I/O Allocation (OUT) or I/O Allocation (IN) Tab. The following dialog box
will be displayed.
Registered Device List
Automatically allocates I/O to selected slave.
Deletes I/O allocation to selected slave.
Display window to manually edit allocations.
Displays slave information.
Bytes: Word address and first bit
address
Product names of allocated slaves
Memory block
Updates block 1.
Updates block 2.
Block 1 allocations
Item
Registered Device List
Auto Button
Delete Button
Edit Button
Information Button
Memory Blocks
Ch
Product Name
Setup Button
Block 2 allocations
Description
Only devices with valid output or input data among all devices registered with
the General Tab Page will be displayed.
Allocates in units of words the slaves selected from the Registered Device List
to an unoccupied area in the order of earlier addresses.
Unregisters the I/O allocations of the selected slaves in the Registered Device
List.
Allows manual allocation through the Edit Window.
Displays slave information items (i.e., the allocation area and I/O comment
data).
Displays the allocation status of each slave (product name) of block 1 and block
2.
Bit address where allocation starts. The first bit address will be displayed after
the word address.
Block 1 and block 2
Sets the first address and first address size (i.e., the number of words) of block
1 or block 2.
6-29
6-8 Manual I/O Allocations
6-8-2 Changing the First Address of Output/Input Block
Allocation Status of Blocks 1 and 2
The block allocation status list displays the words of the CPU Unit and the product
names of devices allocated in the respective areas of the CPU Unit.
The start bit and the word address for each device are indicated in the Ch column.
Example:
3300:Bit00: Starts with bit 00 (LSB) of word CIO 3300.
3300:Bit08: Starts with bit 08 (MSB) of word CIO 3300.
Word address (Example 3300)
First bit address (Bit00)
Example: Allocation starts with bit 00 (LSB)
of word CIO 3300.
Product name of slave
Allocated the bytes beginning with
bit 08 of word CIO 3300.
Therefore, the product name for
3300:Bit08 is left blank.
No words in the CPU Unit will be displayed for any memory block that is not in use.
6-8-2
Changing the First Address of Output/Input Block
Component - Parameter - Edit - I/O Allocation Tab - Setup Button
To change the output/input block allocation areas in the I/O memory of the CPU Unit,
use the following procedure.
1. Click the Setup Button of the block to be changed.
2. The following dialog box will be displayed.
6-30
6-8 Manual I/O Allocations
6-8-2 Changing the First Address of Output/Input Block
3. Set the area, start word, and the number of words for the block.
The number of words to be displayed in a block by the CX-Integrator is set in the
Words field. For the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) or CJ1W-DRM21, the maximum number
of words that can be allocated to one block is 500. For the C200HW-DRM21-V1
and CVM1-DRM21-V1, the maximum number of words that can be allocated to one
block is 100.
The ranges that can be set are shown below.
• CS1W-DRM21(-V1) or CJ1W-DRM21
PLC model
CS Series or
CJ Series
Data area
CIO Area
DM Area
Work Area
HR Area
EM Area
Range
0000 to 32767
DM 0000 to DM 8191
WR 000 to WR 511
HR 000 to HR 511
EM 00000 to EM 32767
Banks 0 to 12 of the EM area can be used.
• C200HW-DRM21-V1
PLC model
C200HS
C200HE-CPU11
C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE(-Z) other than
the above
• CVM1-DRM21-V1
PLC model
CV500,CVM1-CPU01
CV Series and CVM1
other than the above
Note
Data area
IR/SR Area
HR Area
LR Area
DM Area
IR/SR Area
HR Area
LR Area
DM Area
IR/SR Area
HR Area
LR Area
DM Area
Range
000 to 511
HR 00 to HR 99
LR 00 to LR 63
DM 0000 to DM 5999
000 to 511
HR 00 to HR 99
LR 00 to LR 63
DM 0000 to DM 4095
000 to 511
HR 00 to HR 99
LR 00 to LR 63
DM 0000 to DM 5999
Data area
IR/SR Area
CPU Bus Link Area
DM Area
IR/SR Area
CPU Bus Link Area
DM Area
Range
0000 to 2555
G 000 to G 511
DM 0000 to DM 8191
0000 to 2555
G 000 to G 511
DM 00000 to DM 24575
•Words refers to the number of words in the block displayed on the CX-Integrator. This
value is not downloaded to the master.
• If the occupied area of the block is less than 100 words when uploaded, Words will be
set to 100 and displayed as such.
4. Click the OK Button. The memory block will be changed by clicking on OK.
If a device has already been allocated, it will be allocated to a new memory block. If
an area-over error occurs, however, the allocation of the device will be canceled.
Reallocate the device, if necessary.
6-31
6-8 Manual I/O Allocations
6-8-3 Allocating I/O
6-8-3
Allocating I/O
Component - Parameter - Edit - I/O Allocation Tab
The following three methods are supported for I/O allocation.
1) Manual Allocation through the Edit Window
Select the slave from the Registered Device List, click the Edit Button and use the
Edit Window to manually allocate the slave.
2) Drag-and-drop Allocation
Drag the slave from the Registered Device List and drop the slave at the desired
work position in the memory block.
3) Automatic Allocation
Select the slaves from the Registered Device List and click the Auto Button. The
slaves will be automatically allocated in units of words in the order of earlier
addresses. If the user has made connections settings in the General Tab Page
with the advanced setup function, automatic allocation will not be possible.
Note The I/O data size of devices will be displayed in the Size column of the Registered
Device List as shown below if connections settings have been made for the devices.
To allocate the I/O data on the left-hand side with the mouse, drag and drop the I/O data
with the left mouse button. To allocate the I/O data on the right-hand side, drag and drop
the I/O data with the right mouse button. If there is only a single connection, use the left
mouse button.
6-32
6-8 Manual I/O Allocations
6-8-3 Allocating I/O
Manual Allocation through the Edit Window
I/O Allocation Tab - Edit Button
To make allocations through the Edit Window, use the following procedure.
1. Select the device to edit the I/O allocations of the device.
2. Click the Edit Button.
3. The following I/O Allocation Dialog Box will be displayed.
Specify block 1 or block 2, allocation word, start byte (LSB: Low or MSB: High), and
the number of allocated bytes.
Connections are specified in the General tab with
the advanced setup function.
Specify the first word to allocate and the number of allocated words. The MSB
(high) or LSB (low) position can be set for the first word to allocate. The user must
set the byte position to LSB if the number of bytes allocated is 2 or more.
• Example: Device with 1 byte allocated in the LSB.
High
15
Low
8
7
+0 word
+1 word
+2 word
0
#00
• Example: Device with 1 byte allocated in the MSB.
High
15
+0 word
+1 word
+2 word
Low
8
7
0
#00
4. Click the OK Button to start I/O allocation.
6-33
6-8 Manual I/O Allocations
6-8-3 Allocating I/O
Drag and Drop
Drag and Drop on I/O Allocation Tab Page
1. Display the Memory Block List.
2. Select the slave from the Registered Device List.
3. Drag the slave to the first byte of the desired position.
Allocation by dragging
and dropping.
•Memory Block List
In the Memory Block List, the Ch column displays each byte address (the word
and first bit addresses). The Product Name column displays the product name for
the slave.
•Registered Device List
The # column of the Registered Device List displays the node address, the
Product Name column displays the product name of the slave, and the Size
column displays the number of allocated bytes for the slave. The Ch column
displays the first byte (the word and first bit addresses) of the slave allocated.
To unregister the allocations of slaves, select the slaves in the Registered Device
List, and click the Delete Button.
Note To register in units of words the slaves in the order of earlier addresses, select the
slaves in the Registered Device List, and click the Auto Button.
Automatic Allocation
I/O Allocation Tab - Register/Unregistered (Allocate/Unallocated) Button
Note This procedure is the same for the CS1W-DRM21(-V1),
CJ1W-DRM21, CVM1-DRM21-V1, and C200HW-DRM21-V1.
• To allocate in units of words the selected slaves to an unoccupied area in the order of
earlier addresses, click the Auto Button.
• To unregister the allocations of the selected slaves, click the Delete Button.
The advanced setup function (to be explained later) is not possible while automatic
allocation is specified.
6-34
6-8 Manual I/O Allocations
6-8-4 Slave Information
6-8-4
Slave Information
I/O Allocation Tab - Information Button
Device information on registered slaves, such as I/O comments, can be checked with
the I/O Allocation Tab Page. The I/O comment is set to the I/O data of a slave by
selecting Edit I/O Comment from the Device Menu.
To display information on the slave, use the following procedure.
1. Select the device.
2. Click the Information Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
When the registered device is selected in the above dialog box, the slave information
will be refreshed to information on the selected device.
6-35
6-9 Advanced Settings (Connection, Communication Cycle Time, Slave Function
Settings, Etc.)
6-9-1 Advanced Settings
6-9
Advanced Settings (Connection,
Communication Cycle Time, Slave Function
Settings, Etc.)
The following description provides information on the connection, device information
display and check, communication cycle time, message timer, and slave function
settings.
6-9-1
Advanced Settings
Select Component - Parameter - Edit, and click the General Tab. Select the
slave and click the Advanced Setup Button.
Make advanced setup settings (such as device information display/compare and
connections settings) for remote I/O communications.
Note: These settings are supported for the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) and CJ1W-DRM21 only.
Device Information Display/Compare Settings
Device Information Tab Page
The following settings make it possible to display or compare device information on
slaves.
Use the following procedure.
1. Select the slave from the Registered Device List.
2. Click the Advanced Setup Button.
3. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Device Information Tab.
The device information on the
selected slave will be displayed.
If these boxes are checked, the
device
information
will
be
compared with the corresponding
data in the scan list during remote
I/O
communication.
If
the
information does not coincide with
the data, a verify error will result.
The device information (consisting of vendor, device type, and product code data)
on the selected slave is displayed.
By checking the above boxes, the device information will be compared with the
corresponding data in the scan list when I/O communication connections are
established.
6-36
6-9 Advanced Settings (Connection, Communication Cycle Time, Slave Function
Settings, Etc.)
6-9-1 Advanced Settings
Connections
Connection Tab Page
When the user specifies the connections for remote I/O communications, up to two
connections can be set for each slave.
Use the following procedure.
1. Select the slave in the Registered Device List.
2. Click the Advanced Setup Button.
3. The following dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Connection Tab.
Automatic connections are set by default. To specify the connections, use the following
procedures.
1. Select User Setup.
Possible connections are ready for selection.
2. Select the connections.
Up to two connections can be selected.
Note Both COS and Cyclic cannot be specified at the same time.
3. Set the connection path as needed.
4. Set the COS/Cyclic heart beat timer.
5. Click the OK Button.
An asterisk (*) will be displayed in the C column at the right edge of the Registered
Device List. If the connections of a device already allocated with I/O are changed,
the previous I/O allocations will be canceled. Make the I/O allocations again.
6-37
6-9 Advanced Settings (Connection, Communication Cycle Time, Slave Function
Settings, Etc.)
6-9-2 Communication Cycle Time Settings
Note
6-9-2
• Both COS and Cyclic settings cannot be made at the same time.
•If Poll and COS settings or Poll and Cyclic settings are used in combination, check
that the output settings of the both connections are the same.
•The automatic allocation function is not possible for devices if the user already made
connections settings for the devices with the advanced setup. 3. Unregister and
register the devices so that the automatic allocation function will be available for the
devices.
Communication Cycle Time Settings
Component - Parameter - Edit - Communication Cycle Time Tab
Note: This procedure is the same for the CS1W-DRM21(-V1), CJ1W-DRM21,
CVM1-DRM21-V1, and C200HW-DRM21-V1.
It is possible to set the communication cycle time on the Communication Cycle Time
Tab Page. Furthermore, it is possible to check the present communication time
calculated from the registered device information.
The following dialog box will be displayed by clicking on the Communication Cycle
Time Tab.
Set the communication cycle time between 1 and 500 ms. To set the communication
cycle time automatically, click the Default Setup Button or set the communication
cycle time to 0 ms.
The communication cycle time set will be automatically calculated and displayed
according to the registered device information and the baud rate.
6-38
6-9 Advanced Settings (Connection, Communication Cycle Time, Slave Function
Settings, Etc.)
6-9-3 Setting Message Timers
Note
6-9-3
Communication cycle time refers to the required time of remote I/O communications
between the master and a slave. Communication cycle time settings properly made will
prevent the fluctuation of the time of remote I/O communications with the slave.
Furthermore, by setting the communication cycle time to a larger value, the prolonged
processing operation of the slave will not be treated as a communications error. If the
actual remote I/O communications time is shorter than the set communication cycle
time, the remote I/O communications will keep pace with the communication cycle time.
If actual I/O communications take longer than the set communication cycle time, the I/O
communications will be continued regardless of the set communication cycle time.
Setting Message Timers
Component - Parameter - Edit - Message Timer Tab
Note: This procedure is supported by the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) and CJ1W-DRM21 only.
A message timer is by default set to 2 s (2000 ms). They can be set 1-ms increments
to between 500 and 30,000 ms.
To change a message timer value, use the following procedure.
1. Double-click the node address (#) or select the node address and click the Edit
Button. The following dialog box will be displayed.
2. Set the value and click the OK Button.
Note To set the same value for all the devices, select the node addresses and click the
Copy to All Device Button.
6-39
6-9 Advanced Settings (Connection, Communication Cycle Time, Slave Function
Settings, Etc.)
6-9-3 Setting Message Timers
Note
6-40
The message timer is used to monitor the time of message communications (explicit
message communications time and FINS message communications time). The
message timer can be set for each destination device independently. If the response of
a destination device is slow, the timer value must be set to a larger value. The
response may be slow for multilevel FINS message communications. The next
message cannot be sent to the same device until the response is returned. The
DeviceNet master monitors the time-out period of the message with this timer. The
CPU Unit, however, is responsible for monitoring the response time with the CMND,
SEND, and RECV instructions. Therefore, it is meaningless if only the timer value or
monitor time is changed for the CMND, SEND, RECV instructions. Set the response
monitor time with the CMND, SEND, and RECV instructions to a value larger than the
timer value. Set both of them to larger values but the value of response monitor time
must be still longer than the timer value if a time-out error occurs frequently.
6-9 Advanced Settings (Connection, Communication Cycle Time, Slave Function
Settings, Etc.)
6-9-4 Slave Function Settings
6-9-4
Slave Function Settings
Component - Parameter - Edit - Slave Function Tab
Note: This procedure is supported for the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) and CJ1W-DRM21 only.
The slave function is enabled through settings made in the Slave Function Tab Page.
Note
To enable the slave function with the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) or CJ1W-DRM21, select the
device first, and then select Device – Property, and select Enable slave Function in
the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) or CJ1W-DRM21 Properties Dialog Box.
To set the slave function, use the following procedure.
1. Click the Slave Function Tab.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
2. Specify the connections.
Automatic settings are by default set. If the user specifies the connections, click the
User Setup Button.
3. Set the output and input areas used for remote I/O communications.
Set each area type for IN (the slave to the master) and OUT (the master to the
slave), start words, and allocated sizes.
If the user’s connections settings are used, make all connections settings.
Up to two connections can be set.
Note
• Both COS and Cyclic settings cannot be made at the same time.
• If Poll and COS settings or Poll and Cyclic settings are used in combination, check
that the OUT settings of the both connections are the same.
6-41
6-9 Advanced Settings (Connection, Communication Cycle Time, Slave Function
Settings, Etc.)
6-9-5 Setting/Canceling Explicit Message Communications
6-9-5
Setting/Canceling Explicit Message Communications
Component - Parameter - Edit - General Tab - Explicit Message
Communications Box
Note: This procedure is supported for the CVM1-DRM21-V1 and C200HW-DRM21-V1 only.
Specify whether or not to enable explicit message communications (transmissions
only) without remote I/O communications. Check the box to enable explicit message
communications only.
Note
6-9-6
For the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) and CJ1W-DRM21, slaves with explicit message
communications only do not have to be registered. Explicit message communications is
possible regardless of the scan list registration.
Starting Remote I/O Communications
Component - Parameter - Edit - General Tab - Start Remote I/O
Communication at Start-Up Box
Note: This procedure is supported for the CVM1-DRM21-V1 and C200HW-DRM21-V1 only.
Specify whether or not to enable remote I/O communications automatically. Check the
box to start remote I/O communications automatically when the master is started.
Note
6-42
For the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) and CJ1W-DRM21, remote I/O communications upon
start-up can be disabled by disabling the master function.
Select Component then click the Unit Function Tab of the Property Window, and
remove the check mark from Enable Master Function.
6-10 Creating and Editing I/O Comments
6-9-6 Starting Remote I/O Communications
6-10
Creating and Editing I/O Comments
Component - Edit I/O Comment
The CX-Integrator can be used to add comments to I/O data of slaves.
The I/O comments can be checked while making I/O allocations to the master.
Note
No I/O comments can be created or edited for a device if the device is not designed to
have I/O data.
To edit I/O comments, use the following procedures.
1. Select the device.
2. Select Component - Edit I/O Comment (or select the slave, click the right mouse
button, and select Edit I/O Comment).
The following dialog box will be displayed.
An I/O comment can be created for each connection supported by the device. If
areas have been already allocated to the master, they will be displayed.
Note
• If an area is not allocated to a master, the display will show 0000, the default area.
• Edited I/O comments can be exported in the CSV format by selecting Export and I/O
Comment List. Part of I/O comment data exported in the CSV format can be opened
in spreadsheet software and used for CX-Programmer variable tables.
6-43
6-10 Creating and Editing I/O Comments
6-9-6 Starting Remote I/O Communications
3. Select the bit where the I/O comment should be set and press the Enter Key (or
click the bit position).
Data can be input into the comment area as shown below.
4. Input the comment and press the Enter Key.
To cancel the input, press the ESC Key.
5. Set all comments and click the OK Button.
6-44
6-11 Displaying Device Properties
6-11-1 Property Dialog Box Common to All Devices
6-11
Displaying Device Properties
Component - Property
This section explains device information on network devices.
Device properties are classified into those common to all devices and those inherent to
each device.
To display the device properties, use the following procedure.
1. Select the device.
2. Select Component - Property.
3. The Property Dialog Box will be displayed.
6-11-1
Property Dialog Box Common to All Devices
The following window will be displayed for device properties.
This dialog box has the name of the vendor of the device and the device type.
By clicking the Change Icon Button, the icons displayed by the CX-Integrator can be
customized.
To change the icon to standard ones, click the Default Icon Button.
6-45
6-11 Displaying Device Properties
6-11-2 I/O Information Inherent to Each Slave Device
6-11-2
I/O Information Inherent to Each Slave Device
The following I/O Information Tab Page will be displayed.
Supported I/O connection information defined by the EDS file will be displayed as slave
I/O information properties. If the I/O allocations are made to another master, the I/O
allocation information will be displayed together.
The following icon will be displayed next to I/O connection information items registered
as default I/O connections in the EDS file.
Setting I/O Sizes
If there is no EDS file or the slave’s I/O size is variable, the I/O size can be changed
using the following procedure.
1. Click the Edit Button. The Edit I/O Size Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select the default connection type.
The size of each connection can be set by selecting Poll, Bit-Strobe, COS, or
Cyclic.
6-46
6-11 Displaying Device Properties
6-11-2 I/O Information Inherent to Each Slave Device
3. Click the OK Button.
Obtaining I/O Size Information from the Master Scan List
When connecting the CX-Integrator to a network that is already operating, for example
using OMRON Master Units with fixed allocation, the slave I/O size can be obtained
from the master scan list for use in setting.
However, this is possible only with OMRON masters. Also, the slave I/O size cannot be
obtained from the slave function of the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) or CJ1W-DRM21.
Use the following procedure to obtain the I/O size from a master scan list.
1. Select the desired slave, then select Component - Property.
2. Click the I/O Information Tab.
3. Click the Get I/O Size from the Scanlist Button.
Parameter Auto Update when I/O Size Changed
The function to automatically update the I/O size registered on the master scan list
when the I/O size is changed can be switched ON or OFF.
To automatically update the I/O size registered on the master scan list, select Tools DeviceNet tool - Parameter Auto Update When I/O Size Changed.
When this function is enabled, the
mark will be displayed in the menu. The default
is set to not automatically update.
Note
If the function to automatically update the I/O size is enabled and there is no EDS file,
some operations will cause the I/O size in the master scan list to be updated to zero.
For this reason, the function to automatically update the I/O size should normally be
disabled.
6-47
6-11 Displaying Device Properties
6-11-3 Information for Master
6-11-3
Information for Master
OMRON’s CVM1-DRM21-V1, C200HW-DRM21-V1, CS1W-DRM21(-V1) and
CJ1W-DRM21 have an Master I/O Information Tab Page and PLC Information Tab
Page.
CS1W-DRM21(-V1) and CJ1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit
• Master I/O Information
The following master I/O information will be displayed.
Item
I/O Communication
Register Counts
OUT/IN Allocated Words
OUT/IN Bits
Communication Cycle
Time
6-48
Description
The number of devices registered as remote I/O communications
devices in the scan list.
The number of allocated words including the unused words from the
first memory block set in the scan list.
The number of actual I/O bits for remote I/O communications devices.
The communication cycle time based on the device information in the
scan list. If the user has set the communication cycle time, the user’s
set value will be
displayed.
6-11 Displaying Device Properties
6-11-3 Information for Master
• PLC Information
The name of the PLC model in use and the unit number of the master will be displayed
as PLC Information. The operating mode of the PLC will be displayed online. To
change the PLC mode, click the Change Button.
CVM1-DRM21-V1 and C200HW-DRM21-V1
• Master I/O Information
The following master I/O information will be displayed.
Item
Description
I/O Communication Register
Counts
The number of devices registered as remote I/O communications devices in the scan list.
Message Communication
Register Counts
The number of devices registered as message communications devices with the scan list.
OUT/IN Allocated Words
The number of allocated words including the unused words from the first memory block set
in the scan list.
OUT/IN Bits
The number of actual I/O bits for remote I/O communications devices.
Communication Cycle Time
The communication cycle time based on the device information in the scan list. If the user
has set the communication cycle time, the user’s set value will be displayed.
6-49
6-11 Displaying Device Properties
6-11-3 Information for Master
• PLC Information
The name of the PLC model in use and the unit number of the master as PLC
Information will be displayed. To change the PLC model, click the Change Unit
Button. If the network configuration is read from the actual network, the PLC model
cannot be changed.
3G8F7-DRM21
• Master I/O Information
The following master I/O information will be displayed.
Item
I/O Communication
Register Counts
OUT/IN Allocated Words
OUT/IN Bits
Communication Cycle
Time
6-50
Description
The number of devices registered as remote I/O communications devices
in the scan list.
The number of allocated words including the unused words from the first
memory block set in the scan list.
The number of actual I/O bits for remote I/O communications devices.
The communication cycle time based on the device information in the
scan list. If the user has set the communication cycle time, the user’s set
value will be displayed.
6-12 Downloading the Network Configuration/Device Parameters to Devices
6-12-1 Downloading the Network Configuration
6-12
Downloading the Network Configuration/Device
Parameters to Devices
This section explains how to write the master and slave parameters that were created
on the CX-Integrator to the actual network devices. This process is called
downloading.
The following two methods are used to write parameters to network devices.
1) Downloading the network configuration
2) Downloading parameters for specific devices
6-12-1
Downloading the Network Configuration
Network - Transfer [PC to Network]
The network configuration download function makes it possible to write and reset the
device parameters in the order of node addresses, and enable the new settings.
Note
When downloading the network configuration, each of the devices is reset. If the
Master Unit is reset first, it may cause errors in writing parameters to the subsequent
slaves. For that reason, this method (downloading the network configuration) should be
used only when the Master Unit has been given the highest address.
To download the network configuration, use the following procedure.
1. Place the CX-Integrator online.
2. Select Network - Transfer [PC to Network].
The following conformation dialog box will be displayed.
3. Click the Yes Button.
The following progress window will be displayed and the downloading of the
network configuration will be started.
Note 1. The downloading can be canceled by clicking the Abort Button.
2. If an error occurs while the network configuration is downloaded, the following
confirmation window will be displayed.
Click the Continue Button to continue the process. Click the Abort Button to cancel
the process.
The downloading of the network configuration will be automatically continued if the
user does not click the Abort Button for 15 s after the above window is displayed.
6-51
6-12 Downloading the Network Configuration/Device Parameters to Devices
6-12-1 Downloading the Network Configuration
The following window with information on device errors or missing devices will be
displayed after the network configuration has been downloaded.
The new settings will be valid when the network configuration is downloaded properly.
Note
6-52
•Because the devices are reset in order, communications errors will temporarily occur
in the master and slaves. For this reason, do not download the network configuration
while the master-side PLC (CPU Unit) is operating.
•Parameters cannot be downloaded to the master unless the CPU Unit is in Program
Mode. If the message Device state conflict. Going to change PLC Mode. OK? is
displayed, check the operation mode of the CPU Unit.
6-12 Downloading the Network Configuration/Device Parameters to Devices
6-12-2 Downloading Device Parameters
6-12-2
Downloading Device Parameters
Device parameters are downloaded through the Network Configuration Window or Edit
Device Parameters Dialog Box.
Note
•Downloaded device parameters will be valid only after the devices are reset unless
they are the OMRON CVM1-DRM21-V1, C200HW-DRM21-V1, CS1W-DRM21, or
CJ1W-DRM21.
•The parameters in the CX-Integrator will differ from the actual parameters if the No
Button is clicked to quit the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box after the parameters
have been downloaded.
Downloading Parameters through the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box
Component - Parameter - Edit - Download Button
To download the parameters through the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box, use the
following procedure.
1. Place the CX-Integrator online.
2. Select the device.
3. Select Component - Parameter - Edit.
4. Click the Download Button.
5. The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
6. Click the Yes Button.
The progress dialog box will be displayed while the parameters are being
downloaded.
Note
When downloading parameters with the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box, the
following dialog box will appear if the operation mode of the CPU Unit is set to anything
other than PROGRAM Mode.
Click the Yes Button to change the operation mode of the CPU Unit to PROGRAM
Mode and start downloading.
After downloading, this dialog box makes it possible to return to the original operation
mode.
6-53
6-12 Downloading the Network Configuration/Device Parameters to Devices
6-12-2 Downloading Device Parameters
Downloading through the Network Configuration Window
Component - Parameter - Download
To download the parameters through the Network Configuration Window, use the
following procedure.
1. Place the CX-Integrator online.
2. Select the device or devices. (More than one device can be selected by holding
down the Ctrl Key while clicking the devices.)
3. Select Component - Parameter - Download.
The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
4. Click the Yes Button.
The following progress window will be displayed and the downloading of the
parameters will start.
To cancel the downloading, click the Abort Button.
The following confirmation window will be displayed if there is an error while the
parameters are downloaded.
Click the Continue Button to continue the process. Click the Abort Button to cancel
the process.
The downloading of the network configuration will be automatically continued if the
user does not click the Abort Button for 15 s after the above window is displayed.
The following dialog box with information on device errors or missing devices will be
displayed after the parameters have been downloaded.
6-54
6-12 Downloading the Network Configuration/Device Parameters to Devices
6-12-2 Downloading Device Parameters
Note
Parameters cannot be downloaded to the master through the Network Configuration
Window unless the CPU Unit is in Program Mode. If the message Device state conflict.
Going to change PLC Mode. OK? is displayed, check the operation mode of the CPU
Unit.
6-55
6-12 Downloading the Network Configuration/Device Parameters to Devices
6-12-3 Resetting the Device
6-12-3
Resetting the Device
Component - Reset
To enable the new settings, use the following procedure to reset the network device.
1. Place the CX-Integrator online.
2. Select the device in the Network Configuration Window.
3. Select Device - Reset.
The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
4. Click the Yes Button.
The progress window will be displayed and the devices will be reset.
The new settings will be valid after the devices have been reset.
Note
6-56
When the devices are reset, communications errors will temporarily occur. For this
reason, do not reset the devices while the master-side PLC (CPU Unit) is operating.
6-13 Uploading and Verifying Device Parameters
6-13-1 Uploading the Network Configuration
6-13
Uploading and Verifying Device Parameters
Uploading device parameters refers to writing the parameters from the actual network
devices to the virtual network in the CX-Integrator. Verifying device parameters refers
to comparing the parameters in the actual network devices with those in the
CX-Integrator.
This section explains how to do both of these operations.
Note
6-13-1
When the network configuration is uploaded, the parameters for each device will all be
read.
Uploading the Network Configuration
Network - Transfer [Network to PLC]
To read the actual network configuration, use the following procedure.
1. While online, right-click the DeviceNet Unit below TargetPLC in the Online
Connection Information Window and select Connect from the popup menu.
2. Right-click the DeviceNet Unit and select Transfer [Network to PLC] from the
popup menu.
Uploaded devices will be displayed in the Network Configuration Window.
6-13-2
Uploading Device Parameters
The following two methods can be used to read parameters from network devices.
1) Reading parameters from the Network Configuration Window
2) Reading parameters from the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box
Using Network Configuration Window
Component - Parameter - Upload
To upload the parameters through the Network Configuration Window, use the
following procedure.
1. Select the device or devices in the Network Configuration Window. (More than one
device can be selected by holding down the Ctrl Key while clicking the devices.)
2. Select Component - Parameter - Upload.
The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
3. Click the Yes Button.
The progress window will be displayed and the parameters will be uploaded.
Using Parameter Edit Window
Component - Parameter - Edit - Upload Button
To upload the parameters through the Edit Device Parameters Window, use the
following procedure.
1. Select the device from the Network Configuration Window.
2. Select Component - Parameter - Edit.
3. Click the Upload Button.
6-57
6-13 Uploading and Verifying Device Parameters
6-13-2 Uploading Device Parameters
The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
4. Click the Yes Button.
The progress dialog box will be displayed and the parameters will be uploaded.
Note
6-58
•The uploaded parameters will be discarded if the No Button is clicked to quit the Edit
Device Parameters Dialog Box after the parameters have been uploaded.
•When parameters are uploaded from the Network Configuration Window, an asterisk
may be display to the lower left of some devices. This indicates that the I/O size of the
device is not consistent with the I/O size in the scan list in the Master Unit. Either
select View - Property, click the I/O Information Tab, click the Edit Button, and
correct the I/O size, or click the Get from Scan List Button and correct the I/O size. If
the I/O size registered in the scan list is incorrect, correct the I/O size for the device in
the Edit Device Parameter Dialog Box.
6-13 Uploading and Verifying Device Parameters
6-13-3 Verifying the Network Configuration
6-13-3
Verifying the Network Configuration
Use the following procedure to compare the actual network configuration with the
network configuration created on the CX-Integrator.
1. Select the Network Configuration Window to be verified.
2. Select Network - Compare.
The progress window will be displayed and the comparison will begin.
3. If there are any comparison errors, the following dialog box with the details of the
errors will be displayed.
Note
This function compares only the network configurations. It does not compare the
parameters of each device.
6-59
6-13 Uploading and Verifying Device Parameters
6-13-4 Verifying Device Parameters
6-13-4
Verifying Device Parameters
The following two methods can be used to compare the parameters of network
devices for verification with corresponding parameters in the CX-Integrator.
1) Comparing the parameters of devices selected from the Network Configuration
Window
2) Comparing the parameters through the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box
Using the Network Configuration Window
Component - Parameter - Compare
To compare the parameters through the Network Configuration Window, use the
following procedure.
1. Place the CX-Integrator online.
2. Select the device.
3. Select Component - Parameter - Compare.
The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
4. Click the Yes Button.
The progress dialog box will be displayed and the parameters will be compared for
verification.
If there are any comparison errors, the following dialog box with the details of the
errors will be displayed.
6-60
6-13 Uploading and Verifying Device Parameters
6-13-4 Verifying Device Parameters
Using the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box
Component - Parameter - Edit-Compare Button
To compare the parameters through the Edit Device Parameters Dialog Box, use the
following procedure.
1. Place the CX-Integrator online.
2. Select the device.
3. Edit Component - Parameter - Edit.
4. Click the Compare Button.
5. The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
6. Click the Yes Button.
The progress dialog box will be displayed and the comparison results will be
displayed.
6-61
6-14 Monitoring Devices
6-14-1 Setting Monitor Refresh Timer
6-14
Monitoring Devices
The following description explains how to use monitor the device or communications.
Note
6-14-1
The device to be monitored through the Network Configuration Window must exist on
the actual network. Before monitoring the status of the monitor, upload the network
configuration.
Setting Monitor Refresh Timer
Tools - DeviceNet tool - Setup Monitor Refresh Timer
Set the interval to refresh the device monitor display. This setting will be applied to the
monitoring of any network device.
Note
If the refresh timer is set to too small a value, the DeviceNet network will be overloaded
and the CX-Integrator may experience timeout errors (device access errors).
To set the monitor refresh timer, use the following procedure.
1. Select Tools - DeviceNet tool - Setup Monitor Refresh Timer.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
2. Select the new timer value and click the OK Button.
The set value will be enabled for the next device monitor operation.
6-62
6-14 Monitoring Devices
6-14-2 Monitoring Devices
6-14-2
Monitoring Devices
Component - Monitor
To monitor the device, use the following procedure.
1. Place the CX-Integrator online.
2. Select the device.
3. Select Component - Monitor.
A monitor dialog box for the device will be displayed.
Note
•A Slave can be monitored only if the slave has parameters that can be monitored in
the EDS file.
•Monitor cannot be selected if the device selected has no monitoring function.
4. To quit the monitor function, click the Close Button.
CS1W-DRM21(-V1) or CJ1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit
The monitor window for the CS1W-DRM21(-V1) or CJ1W-DRM21 makes it possible to
monitor the following items.
Tab
Status
Unit Status
Communication Cycle Time
Error History
Monitor item
Status of the master and slaves
Status of the functions of the Unit
Communication cycle time
Error history
6-63
6-14 Monitoring Devices
6-14-2 Monitoring Devices
Status Tab Page
The Status Tab Page displays the status of the master and slaves in remote I/O
communications.
Master status
Starts remote I/O
Stops remote I/O
communications.
Slave status
Node address for detailed
slave status
Detailed slave status
Remote I/O communications between the master and slaves can be started or stopped
by clicking the Start Remote I/O Communication or Stop Remote I/O
Communication Button.
The slave status indicators change according to the status of the slaves as shown
below.
Indicator
Gray
Green
Blue
Red
Status
Device not registered
I/O communications
stopped
In normal communications
Communications error
To monitor the detailed status of another slave device, select the corresponding node
address.
6-64
6-14 Monitoring Devices
6-14-2 Monitoring Devices
Unit Status Tab Page
The Unit Status Tab Page displays the status of the Unit, master, and slave functions.
Communication Cycle Time Tab Page
The Communication Cycle Time Tab Page displays the present, maximum, and
minimum values of communication cycle time.
The maximum or minimum value can be cleared by clicking the Clear Button.
6-65
6-14 Monitoring Devices
6-14-2 Monitoring Devices
Error History Tab Page
The Error History Tab Page displays the error history recorded in the master.
The following error history items will be displayed.
Item
Time of Error
Error Information
Detailed Information
Content
Description
The time the error
occurred.
Error code
Detailed error
information
Contents of error
To refresh the display, click the Update Button.
To clear the error history from the master, click the Clear Button.
To save the file in CSV file format, click the Save Button.
CVM1-DRM21-V1 or C200HW-DRM21-V1
The monitor dialog box of the CVM1-DRM21-V1 or C200HW-DRM21-V1 makes it
possible to monitor the following items.
Tab
Status
Communication
Cycle Time
Error history
6-66
Monitor item
Status of the master and slaves
Communication cycle time
Error history
6-14 Monitoring Devices
6-14-2 Monitoring Devices
Status Tab Page
The Status Tab Page displays the status of the master and slaves in remote I/O
communications.
Master status
Starts remote I/O
communications.
Stops remote I/O
communications.
Slave status
Stops remote I/O for
detailed slave status
Detailed slave status
Remote I/O communications between the master and slaves can be started or stopped
by clicking the Start Remote I/O Communication or Stop Remote I/O
Communication Button.
The slave status indicators change according to the status of the slave as shown
below.
Indicator
Gray
Blue
Red
Status
Device not registered
In normal communications
Communications error
To monitor the detailed status of another slave device, select the corresponding node
address.
6-67
6-14 Monitoring Devices
6-14-2 Monitoring Devices
Communication Cycle Time Tab Page
The Communication Cycle Time Tab Page displays the present, maximum, and
minimum values of communication cycle time.
The maximum or minimum value can be cleared by clicking the Clear Button.
Error History Tab Page
The Error History Tab Page displays the error history recorded in the master.
The following error history items will be displayed.
Item
Time of Error
Error Information
Detailed Information
Content
Description
The time the error occurred.
Error code
Detailed error information
Contents of error
To refresh the display, click the Update Button.
To clear the error history from the master, click the Clear Button.
To save the file in CSV file format, click the Save Button.
6-68
6-14 Monitoring Devices
6-14-2 Monitoring Devices
Slaves
Devices can be monitored if the parameters of the devices are specified in EDS files to
allow monitoring.
Some OMRON Slaves provide detailed monitoring windows. Refer to the manual for
the specific Slave for details.
MULTIPLE I/O TERMINALs
The monitor window of the DRT1-COM makes it possible to monitor the status and
configuration.
The configuration indicates the connected I/O Units. I/O Units with errors will be
indicated in red.
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units
With the E3X-DRT21 Fiber Amplifier Communications Unit, the following window
makes it possible to monitor the status of connected sensors.
Smart Slaves: Digital I/O Units
Unit status and maintenance information can be monitored in the Smart Slave
Monitoring Window.
Smart Slaves: Analog I/O Units
Unit status and maintenance information can be monitored in the Smart Slave
Monitoring Window.
E5ZN Temperature Controller DeviceNet Communications Unit
Unit status and the status of the connected Temperature Controller can be monitored.
6-69
6-15 Using General-purpose Tools to Set Devices
6-15-1 Setting Device Parameters with Class Instances
6-15
Using General-purpose Tools to Set Devices
This section explains how to set the device parameters with no corresponding EDS
files or set the node addresses or baud rates through the network.
6-15-1
Setting Device Parameters with Class Instances
Tools - DeviceNet Tool - Setup Parameters
Device parameters for devices that have no corresponding EDS files can be set by
specifying the following items.
• Service code
• Class (object class), instance (class instance) and attribute (instance attribute)
Before setting the device parameters, it is also necessary to obtain the data setting
information on attributes other than the above from the manufacturer of the device.
Unless all the information is known, the device parameters cannot be set.
Use the following procedure to set the device parameters.
1. Place the CX-Integrator online.
2. Select Tools - DeviceNet Tool - Setup Parameters.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
3. Set the Target Node Address to the node address of the device.
6-70
6-15 Using General-purpose Tools to Set Devices
6-15-1 Setting Device Parameters with Class Instances
4. Designate the service.
There are two ways to designate the service code, using the generic service code
defined by DeviceNet or designating it directly. To use the generic service code
defined by DeviceNet, check the Generic option, then 4. Select the desired service
from the drop-down list. To designate the service code directly, check the Custom
option, then input the service code in a HEX format string.
Designating the Generic Service Code
Defined by DeviceNet
Designating the Service Code Directly
5. Designate the class and instance parameters for reading and writing data.
6. Input the data corresponding to the designated service.
7. After all of the items have been input, click the Send Button. The device response
will be displayed in the Result area.
8. Click the Close Button to quit device parameter setting. This completes the device
parameter setting.
1. Parameter Reading Example
1) Check the Generic option in Service, then select Get Attribute Single from the
drop-down list.
2) Designate the class and instance of the parameter to be read.
3) Input Data Area for the Attribute of the parameter to be read.
4) Click the Send Button. The value that was read will be displayed in the Result
area.
2. Parameter Setting Example
1) Check the Generic option in Service, then select Set Attribute Single from the
drop-down list.
2) Designate the class and instance of the parameter to be set.
3) Input Data Area for the Attribute of the parameter to be set.
4) Input the attribute followed by the value to be set for the parameter in the Data
area.
5) Click the Send Button.
6-71
6-16 Optional Functions
6-16-1 Installing Expansion Modules
6-16
Optional Functions
The optional functions make it possible to set Expansion Modules in the CX-Integrator
for new devices, add DeviceNet device vendors, and add new device types.
6-16-1
Installing Expansion Modules
Tools - DeviceNet tool - Install Plugin Module
To install the expansion module, use the following procedure.
1. Select Tools - DeviceNet tool - Install Plugin Module.
A window to specify the name of expansion module set file will be displayed.
2. Input the file name and click the Open Button.
The Expansion Module will be added to the CX-Integrator.
6-16-2
Adding Vendors and Device Types
Option - Edit Configuration File
Use the following procedure to add a new device vendor or device type.
1. Select Option and Edit Configuration File.
2. Select Vendor ID/Device Type List.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
3. To add or modify the vendor information, click on the Vendor Tab.
To add new vendor information, use the following procedure.
1) Click the New Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
2) Input the new vendor ID and vendor name and click the OK Button.
The new vendor will be added to the list.
6-72
6-16 Optional Functions
6-16-2 Adding Vendors and Device Types
To edit existing vendor information, use the following procedure.
1) Select the vendor.
2) Click the Edit Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed.
3) Input the new vendor name and click the OK Button.
4. To add or change the device type, click on the Device Type Tab.
The method of adding or changing the device type is the same as that of adding or
changing vendor information.
5. When all the settings are completed, click the OK Button.
6-73
Communications
Section 7 CompoWay/F
This section explains the settings and operations specific to the CompoWay/F system.
7
7-1
CompoWay/F System Configuration
7-1-1
Overview
7-1
CompoWay/F System Configuration
7-1-1
Overview
The CompoWay/F communications configuration (including slave parameters) can be
uploaded using any one of the following three system configurations.
CompoWay/F Slaves that
are uploaded
1) CompoWay/F Slaves
connected to a CS/CJ-series
PLC (CPU Unit or Serial
Communication Board/Unit)
or serial port C on the
Controller Section of an
NSJ-series NSJ Controller
Communications configuration
Computer (CX-Integrator)
Relay PLC (and target PLC)
CS/CJ-series PLC
Network
connection or
serial connection
(Toolbus or host link)
CompoWay/F
Upload
2) CompoWay/F Slaves
directly connected to a
computer (CX-Integrator)
Computer (CX-Integrator)
• Relay PLC model: CompoWay/F
• Network type: CompoWay/F
RS-232C Cable
Serial connection
(CompoWay/F)
RS-232C to RS-485
Serial Converter (K3SC Series)
RS-485
CompoWay/F
Upload
3) CompoWay/F Slaves
directly connected to a
computer (CX-Integrator) by
a USB cable
Computer (CX-Integrator)
• Relay PLC model: CompoWay/F
•Network type: CompoWay/F
USB Cable
Serial connection
(CompoWay/F)
USB to RS-485
Serial Converter (K3SC Series)
RS-485
CompoWay/F
Upload
7-2
7-2
7-2-1
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a PLC
Communications with CompoWay/F Slaves through a PLC
7-2
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a PLC
7-2-1
Communications with CompoWay/F Slaves through a PLC
Use the following procedures to transfer network information of CompoWay/F Slaves
connected to a serial port of a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit or Serial Communications
Board/Unit, or serial port C on the Controller Section of an NSJ-series NSJ Controller.
Example: In the following example, an E5CN Temperature Controller is connected to
port 1 (RS-422/RS-485 port) of a CJ1W-SCU41-V1 Serial
Communications Unit with the CompoWay/F protocol.
Before Connecting by CompoWay/F Protocol
Before connecting by the CompoWay/F protocol, edit the CJ1W-SCU41-V1 Unit’s
parameters to set the serial port 1 Serial communications mode to Serial Gateway.
1. Right-click the Serial Communications Unit in the I/O table and select Unit Setup.
The Edit Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Set the Port1: Port settings set value to User settings.
3. Set the Port1: Serial communications mode set value to Serial Gateway.
Example: Unit settings for a Serial
Communications Unit/Board
2. Set to User settings.
3. Set the Serial communications mode
to Serial Gateway.
7-3
7-2
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a PLC
7-2-1
Communications with CompoWay/F Slaves through a PLC
Uploading the CompoWay/F Network Configuration
1. With the CX-Integrator online, right-click the Serial Communications Unit under the
target PLC in the Online Connection Information Window and select Connect.
2. A dialog box will be displayed to select one of the Serial Communications Unit’s
serial ports. Select PORT1 (RS-422A/RS-485 port) and click the OK Button.
3. A dialog box will be displayed to select the communications protocol.
Select CompoWayF as the Port 1 (RS-422A/RS-485 port) protocol and click the
OK Button.
Note: The CompoWay/F protocol communications will be enabled when CompoWayF is
selected in the dialog box above and Serial Gateway is selected for port 1 in the
Serial Communications Unit’s Unit parameters.
4. The
icon will be displayed next to the Serial Communications Unit to indicate
that the Serial Communications Unit’s serial port (port 1) can be accessed through
CompoWay/F protocol communications.
7-4
7-2
7-2-1
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a PLC
Communications with CompoWay/F Slaves through a PLC
5. Right-click the Serial Communications Unit in the Online Connection Information
Window and select Transfer [Network to PC].
6. The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Yes Button.
7. The Compoway/F Finding node settings Dialog Box will be displayed.
If the CompoWay/F Slave node’s
node address is unknown:
If the CompoWay/F Slave node’s
node address is known:
Note
Select the All (0-99) Option.
Select the Selection Option and set the minimum and
maximum addresses for the CompoWay/F Slave node
address range.
If you already know the range of node addresses set for the CompoWay/F Slaves,
select the Selection Option, specify the node address search range (finding node
range), and transfer the node parameters.
The search will take about 20 seconds for each node that is not actually connected, so
it will take about 35 minutes for the transfer to be completed if the All(0-99) Option is
selected. For the same reason, the transfer will take longer if the Selection Option is
selected and the maximum node address is higher than the node address of the nodes
actually connected.
7-5
7-2
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a PLC
7-2-1
Communications with CompoWay/F Slaves through a PLC
The CX-Integrator will check all 100
node addresses for nodes, so the
transfer will take about 35 minutes.
If you already know the node address
range, select the Selection Option,
specify the node search range, and start
the transfer.
The CompoWay/F Slave upload starts when the OK Button is clicked.
8. The following dialog box will be displayed when the CompoWay/F Slave transfer is
completed.
Click the OK Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed if no CompoWay/F Slaves could be
found.
Click the OK Button.
9. A CompoWay/F Slave (such as a Temperature Controller) connected directly to the
CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C serial port is displayed in the Network Configuration
Window along with a PLC.
At the same time, a new CompoWay/F network is added in the Workspace
Window.
7-6
7-2
7-2-1
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a PLC
Communications with CompoWay/F Slaves through a PLC
The CompoWay/F network
A new CompoWay/F network is added
in the Workspace Window.
configuration is displayed in the
Network Configuration Window.
7-7
7-2
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a PLC
7-2-2
Setting the CompoWay/F Slave’s Parameters
7-2-2
Setting the CompoWay/F Slave’s Parameters
The following procedure applies to a CompoWay/F Slave that is connected to a PLC.
Use this procedure to set the parameters of the CompoWay/F Slave after the node’s
parameters have been uploaded to the computer (CX-Integrator).
Temperature Controller
1. Right-click the icon of the Temperature Controller (an E5CN in this example) in the
Network Configuration Window and select Start Special Application – Start with
Settings Inherited.
2. The CX-Thermo application will receive the Temperature Controller model number
and start.
After the parameter settings are completed, download the set values to the E5CN.
7-8
7-2
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a PLC
7-2-2
Note
Setting the CompoWay/F Slave’s Parameters
When a K3SC Serial Converter is connected to the PLC’s RS-232C port and a
Temperature Controller is connected to the K3SC by RS-485, make an RS-232C cable
with the following wiring to connect the PLC’s RS-232C port to the K32-23209
Attachment Adapter.
RS-485
Temperature Controller
CS/CJ Series PLC
Input Power
RS-232C Cable
Attachment
adapter
K32-23209
RS-232C Port
To attachment adapter
To PLC
Signal
Signal
Pin No.
Pin No.
RD
2
2
SD
SD
3
3
RD
ER
4
4
RS
SG
5
5
CS
DR
6
7
DR
RS
7
8
ER
CS
8
9
SG
FG
-
-
FG
Procedure for Smart Sensors
1. Right-click Smart Sensor in the Network Configuration Window and select
Parameter – Edit.
2. The Edit Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed.
After setting the parameters, select Transfer [PC to Unit] to download the settings
to the Smart Sensor.
7-9
7-3
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a Computer
7-3-1
Reading from Slaves Connected to the Computer
7-3
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a Computer
Use the following procedures to transfer network information of CompoWay/F Slaves
connected directly to the computer (CX-Integrator) without going through a PLC.
7-3-1
Reading from Slaves Connected to the Computer
1. Select Network – Communication Settings from the menu bar.
The Change PLC Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select CompoWay/F Device from the Device Type List.
Click the Settings Button and select the Driver Tab to display the Network
Settings.
7-10
7-3
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a Computer
7-3-1
Reading from Slaves Connected to the Computer
Set the computer port to
which the CompoWay/F
slaves are connected.
After completing the network settings, click the OK Button.
3. Select Network – Work Online from the menu bar.
(CompoWay/F Slaves cannot be connected online by selecting Auto Online, so be sure to
select Work Online.)
4. When the CompoWay/F Slave is connected online, the Slave will be displayed in
the Online Connection Information Window. Right-click the CompoWay/F Slave
and select Transfer [Network to PC].
5. The following confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
Click the Yes Button.
7-11
7-3
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a Computer
7-3-1
Reading from Slaves Connected to the Computer
6. The Compoway/F Finding node settings Dialog Box will be displayed.
If the CompoWay/F Slave node’s
node address is unknown:
If the CompoWay/F Slave node’s
node address is known:
Select the All (0-99) Option.
Select the Selection Option and set the CompoWay/F
Slave’s node address.
The CompoWay/F Slave upload starts when the OK Button is clicked.
7. The following dialog box will be displayed when the CompoWay/F Slave transfer is
completed.
Click the OK Button.
The following dialog box will be displayed if no CompoWay/F Slaves could be
found.
Click the OK Button.
8. The CompoWay/F Slave connected directly to the computer (CX-Integrator) is
displayed in the Network Configuration Window. The CompoWay/F network is also
added in the Workspace Window.
Example: Connecting an E5ZN Temperature Controller
Right-click the E5ZN Temperature Controller in the Network Configuration Window
and select Start Special Application – Start with Settings Inherited.
7-12
7-3
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a Computer
7-3-1
Reading from Slaves Connected to the Computer
A new CompoWay/F network
is added in the Workspace
Window.
The CompoWay/F network
configuration is displayed in the
Network Configuration Window.
The CX-Thermo application will receive the Temperature Controller model number
and start. After the parameter settings are completed, download the set values to
the E5ZN.
Refer to the CX-Thermo Help function for details on setting parameters and
downloading parameter settings to components.
Note
• When connecting the computer and CompoWay/F Slave, use a K3SC Serial
Converter to convert between the computer’s RS-232C communications and the
CompoWay/F Slave’s RS-485 communications.
7-13
7-3
CompoWay/F Slaves Connected to a Computer
7-3-1
Reading from Slaves Connected to the Computer
Applicable Serial Converter:
RS-232C to RS-485
Adapter
K3SC Serial Converter
(Set RS-232C in the
Master.)
General-purpose RS-232C cable
Standard RS-232C cable (D-SUB 9-pin female on both ends) +
K32-23209 Attachment Adapter (D-SUB 9-pin male on one end, fork
terminals on the other end)
Connected RS-485 devices
In this case, the Master’s
interface is RS-232C.
Loose wires
K3SC
Computer
If a standard RS-232C cable with D-SUB connectors is being used, connect with
an optional K32-23209 Adapter (sold separately), which is 5 cm long and has a
D-SUB 9-pin male connector on one end.
Cable with RS-232C D-SUB connectors
7-14
K32-23209
Unify the communications settings with the
connected devices and set the unit numbers.
When connecting to RS-485, install terminators (120 Ω, 1/2
W recommended) to both ends of the transmission line,
including this end.
Communications
Section 8 NT Links
This section explains the settings and operations specific to the NT Link system.
8
8-1
NT Link Connection Auto-detect Function
8-1-1
Overview
8-1
NT Link Connection Auto-detect Function
8-1-1
Overview
When an NS-series PT is serially connected to a CS/CJ-series PLC through NT Link,
the PT’s communications settings (NT Link baud rate and the PT’s maximum unit
number setting) can be detected automatically. The PLC’s serial port settings are
automatically adjusted to match the detected PT communications settings and provide
an automatic connection between the PT and PLC (NT Link Auto Online Setting
function).
Computer (CX-Integrator)
The PLC’s serial port settings are
automatically changed to match the
NS-series PT’s serial port settings.
Relay PLC
Overwrite
CS/CJ-series PLC
• Serial connection
(Toolbus or Host
Link, see note)
• Network connection
NT Link makes the serial connection
automatically (when using the RS-232C port).
Note: Since the RS-232C port is used by the PT, the peripheral port
must be used to make a direct serial connection to the computer.
Note: The PLC’s serial port settings will be as follows after the automatic connection is
established:
•
Serial communications mode = NT Link (1:N)
•
Port baud rate = NS-series PT’s baud rate setting
•
Max. unit number in NT Link mode = Connected NS-series PT’s setting (Except
when the PT’s maximum unit number setting is 0, the PLC’s setting is 1.)
8-1-2
Procedure
The following example demonstrates the operation of the NT Link Connection
Auto-detect Function when an NS-series PT is connected to the built-in RS-232C port
of a CS/CJ-series PLC’s CPU Unit.
1. With the CX-Integrator online, right-click the CPU port listed below the target PLC
in the Online Information Window and select Connect from the pop-up menu.
2. A dialog box will be displayed to select one of the CPU Unit’s serial ports.
Select Serial Port (the RS-232C port) and click the OK Button.
8-2
8-1
NT Link Connection Auto-detect Function
8-1-2
Procedure
3. A dialog box will be displayed to select the communications protocol.
Select NTLink and click the OK Button.
4. The
icon will be displayed next to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port to indicate that
the port can be accessed with NT Link protocol.
5. Right-click the CPU Unit in the Online Information Window and select NT Link
Tool – NTLink Auto Online Setting.
Note
If the PLC is operating, the following warning dialog box will be displayed.
Check the system to be sure that it is safe to change the PLC’s operating mode to
PROGRAM mode and click the Yes Button.
If the mode is changed to PROGRAM mode, the PLC will stop operating so be sure
that it is all right for the PLC to stop operating.
8-3
8-1
NT Link Connection Auto-detect Function
8-1-2
Procedure
6. The following warning dialog box will be displayed.
If you click the OK Button, the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port’s communications settings
will be overwritten. Verify that the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port is not communicating
and then click the OK Button.
7. The following dialog box will be displayed when an NS-series PT is connected to
the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port.
Verify that the pin 5 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch is OFF and then click the OK
Button.
8. The NT Link Connection Auto-detect Function will be executed.
The following dialog box will be displayed to show the progress of the automatic
connection operation.
9. The following dialog box will be displayed if the connection with the PT is
established automatically.
Click the OK Button.
8-4
8-1
NT Link Connection Auto-detect Function
8-1-2
Procedure
10.
If the PLC’s operating mode was changed from RUN mode, the following
dialog box will be displayed to switch from PROGRAM mode back to RUN mode. To return
to RUN mode, click the Yes Button.
11. The following dialog box will be displayed. To transfer the network configuration to
the computer, click the OK Button.
12. The Network Transfer Dialog Box will be displayed. Execute the transfer according
to the dialog box.
8-5
8-2
Transferring Screen Data through the PLC
8-2-1
Overview
8-2
Transferring Screen Data through the PLC
8-2-1
Overview
The CX-Designer can be started from an NS-series PT in the Network Configuration
Window and created screen data can be transferred through a CS/CJ-series PLC (see
note) to a serially connected NT-series PT.
Computer
(Start CX-Designer from CX-Integrator.)
Relay PLC
NS-series PT
CS/CJ-series PLC
• Serial connection
(Toolbus or Host
Link, see note)
• Network connection
NT Link
(using the RS-232C port)
Screens
Transfer screen data.
Note: Since the RS-232C port is used by the PT, the peripheral port
must be used to make a direct serial connection to the computer.
Note: In order to transfer screen data through the PLC, the PLC must be a CS/CJ-series PLC
with a CPU lot number of 030201 (manufactured February 1, 2003) or later. In addition,
the CPU Unit must be a CS1G-H, CS1H-H, CS1D-S, CJ1M, CJ1G-H, or CJ1H-H. (The
screen data cannot be transferred through a CS1D-H).
8-2-2
Procedure
The following example demonstrates how to transfer screen data through the CPU
Unit’s serial port.
1. Select Network – Work Online or Network – Auto Online from the menu bar.
In this case, Auto Online has been selected.
2. The Select Serial Port Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the desired computer communications port from the pull-down menu and
click the OK Button.
8-6
8-2
Transferring Screen Data through the PLC
8-2-2
Procedure
3. The PLC will be connected online to the computer and the PLC’s rack configuration
will be displayed in the Online Information Window.
Right-click the CPU port and select Connect from the pop-up menu.
4. A dialog box will be displayed to select the CPU Unit’s serial port.
Select Serial Port (the RS-232C port) and click the OK Button.
5. The
icon will be displayed next to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port to indicate that
the port can be accessed with NT Link protocol.
6. Right-click the CPU Unit in the Online Information Window and select Transfer
[Network to PC].
7. The following dialog box will be displayed to confirm the transfer.
Click the Yes Button to transfer the network configuration of the NT Link network
connected to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
8-7
8-2
Transferring Screen Data through the PLC
8-2-2
Procedure
8. The following dialog box will be displayed when the transfer is completed.
Click the OK Button.
Note
The following conditions must be satisfied in order to correctly transfer the network
configuration.
•
•
The CS/CJ-series CPU Unit must be of Lot No. 030201 (Feb. 1 2003) or later.
The NS-series PT system version must be 6.0 or later.
If the lot number for the CPU Unit to be connected is too old, or if the PT version is too
old, the following message will be displayed.
IF this occurs, the network configuration will not be correctly transferred, the NS-series
PT will display Unknown-HMI, and the special application will not start (in a following
step below). Start the CX-Designer separately and make the settings.
9. The NS-series PT connected directly to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C serial port
will be displayed in the Network Configuration Window along with one PLC. (The
Network Configuration Window’s background will be gray to indicate that the
CX-Integrator is online.)
At the same time, the NT Link will be added in the Workspace Window.
The new NT Link is added in the
Workspace Window.
The NT Link network configuration
is displayed in the Network
Configuration Window.
8-8
8-2
Transferring Screen Data through the PLC
8-2-2
Procedure
10. Right-click the icon of the NS-series PT in the Network Configuration Window and
select Start Special Application – Start with Settings Inherited.
CX-Designer will start and a dialog box will be displayed for selecting the project.
11. Click the New Project Button. The NS-series PT model and version will be
inherited, and the New Project Dialog Box will be displayed.
12. Click the OK Button to create the new screen data. The created screen data will
be created in a project file (.ipp extension) for transfer to the NS-series PT.
13. To transfer the screen data to the NS-series PT, select either Quick Transfer [To
PT] or Transfer [To PT] from the PT menu. The following dialog box will be
displayed for confirmation.
8-9
8-2
Transferring Screen Data through the PLC
8-2-2
Procedure
For details on the transfer method, refer to the CX-Designer User’s Manual.
The following flowchart outlines the procedure up to the screen data transfer.
Select the created screen data (project file).
Set the communications path (PC – PLC – PT).
Click the Connect Button to start communications with the PT.
Transfer the project file.
8-10
Communications
Section 9 Network Testing
This section explains the operations of the following network test tools:
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool.
Echoback test between nodes (Ethernet, Controller Link, SYSMAC LINK, DeviceNet)
Ethernet ping test
9
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-1
Diagnostic Functions and Flowcharts
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-1
Diagnostic Functions and Flowcharts
Introduction
The Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool can perform a variety of diagnostic
operations, such as checking the operating status of a Controller Link network made
up of computers and CS/CJ-series, CVM1/CV-series, and C-series nodes, checking
for errors in the node settings, and collecting all of the nodes’ error status and error log
information.
Diagnosis Functions
Diagnosis
function
Network Status
Node Settings
Disconnections
Transmission
Status
Node Status
Collecting Error
Logs
9-2
Description
• Displays a list of the nodes participating in the specified network.
• Diagnoses the operating status of the CPU Units and Controller Link Units/Boards
and displays information on any errors that have occurred.
• Reads the settings (e.g., DM Parameter Area settings) for all nodes participating in
the specified network and diagnoses the integrity of the overall network.
• Diagnostic results are displayed in three levels: Errors, Warnings, and Information.
• For optical ring networks in token ring mode, displays all nodes in the specified
network in the order they are physically connected.
• If the cable has been disconnected, the locations of disconnections are displayed.
• Displays a list of the disconnection counters measuring each node: Number of
node/network separations, number of network disconnections, etc.
• Displays the transmission status counters for all nodes in the specified network.
• Displays the current error status and error log for the specified node (CPU Unit or
Controller Link Unit/Board).
• Collects the error status and error logs for all nodes in the specified network and
saves them to a file.
Page
9-5
9-11
9-14
9-17
9-18
9-21
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-1
Diagnostic Functions and Flowcharts
Operational Flowchart
1. Connect
Connect online to the Controller Link Unit in
the target PLC and upload the network
configuration.
2. Start
Select Tools – Controller Link tool –
Network Diagnosis to start the Controller
Link Network Diagnostic Tool.
Refer to 2-3 Uploading Network Configurations and
Checking for Communications Unit Errors for details on
connecting online and uploading the network
configuration.
Using a CS/CJ/CP-series PLC
in a Toolbus network
(See note 1.):
Note 1: If the PLC is a
CS/CJ/CP-series model and
the network type is Toolbus, it
isn’t necessary to set the PLC
connection. The CX-Integrator
will connect to the PLC when
the automatically when the
Controller Link Network
3. Select Network
If the Change Network Dialog Box is displayed,
select the network to be diagnosed.
(See note 2.)
4. Execute
Diagnostics
Node diagnosis will be performed
automatically.
(See note 3.)
5. Select
Diagnosis
Operation
Select the desired diagnosis operation from
the Diagnosis Menu.
Note 2: The Change Network Dialog Box is displayed
only if there are two or more networks available for
diagnosis. (If dialog box will not be displayed if there is
just one Controller Link Unit in the PLC or the relay
Note 3: The confirmation dialog box will be displayed if
the CX-Integrator is connected to the network to be
diagnosed. This operation is used to list the nodes in
the network and diagnose each node’s status
(normal/error). Click the No Button to cancel the
network status diagnosis in order to execute another
operation such as diagnosing a disconnection.
9-3
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-1
Diagnostic Functions and Flowcharts
Components of the Network Diagnosis Tool Window
This section describes the various components of the Controller Link Network
Diagnostic Tool Window.
Main Window
Component Names and Functions
(1) Title bar
(2) Menu bar
(3) Tool bar
(4) Shared
network
information
area
(5) Node list area
(6) Diagnostic
results area
(7) Status bar
Name
(1) Title bar
(2) Menu bar
(3) Tool bar
(4) Shared network information
area
(5) Node list area
(6) Diagnostic results area
(7) Status bar
9-4
Function
Displays the file name when a node file is selected.
Use to select a menu.
Select a function by clicking an icon.
Displays shared Controller Link network information, such as the
transmission path and communications cycle time.
Displays the node configuration of the Controller Link network, which
was read by executing the network status diagnosis operation.
The node status is indicated by the color of its bitmap icon.
Displays the results of the network status diagnosis.
Double-click an item to view detailed results.
Displays information such as the network address and node address
of the node to which the Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool is
connected.
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-2
9-1-2
Diagnosing Network Status
Diagnosing Network Status
Description of Network Status
A list of the nodes participating in the specified network is displayed to show the
network status. The operating status of the CPU Unit or Controller Link Unit/Board is
diagnosed and information on any detected errors is displayed.
Diagnosis item
Network
participation status
Current Controller
Link Unit errors
Description
Displays the nodes participating in the network using node icons. If a node file
has been selected, any differences between the nodes registered in the file
and the actual nodes will be displayed.
Displays errors that have occurred in the Controller Link Unit.
The node icons for nodes with errors are displayed with a red background.
Diagnosis is performed for the following errors.
• Data link table errors
• Routing table errors
• Network parameter errors
• Network parameter mismatches
Current CPU Unit
errors
• CPU Unit PLC Setup errors
• Model errors
• Fatal data link errors
• EEPROM write errors
Displays errors that have occurred in the CPU Unit.
The node icons for nodes with errors are displayed with a red background.
Diagnosis is performed for the following errors.
• Memory errors
• I/O bus errors
• System errors (FALS)
• Program errors
• Duplicate number errors
• CPU bus errors
• Too many I/O points
• I/O setting errors
• Cycle time too long errors
• Fatal Inner Board errors
• System errors (FAL)
• JMP errors
• Indirect DM BCD errors
• I/O verification errors
• Special I/O Unit errors
• CPU Bus Unit errors
• SYSMAC BUS/2 errors
• SYSMAC BUS errors
• Battery errors
• CPU Bus Unit setting errors
• Momentary power interruption errors
• Remove I/O errors
• Special Unit errors
• PLC Link errors
• Host Link errors
• Cycle time errors
• Special I/O Unit setting errors
• Inner Board errors
• PLC Setup errors
• Basic I/O Unit errors
• Interrupt task errors
• Duplex errors
9-5
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-2
Diagnosing Network Status
Diagnosing Network Status
1. Check that the CX-Integrator is online with the PLC connected through Controller
Link ad select Tools – Controller Link tool – Network Diagnosis.
2. The Select Network Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the desired network in the list and click the OK Button.
3. Network diagnosis will begin on the selected network.
The Controller Link Network Diagnosis Software will start and the network nodes
and diagnostic results will be displayed.
If the relevant network exists in the project workspace, the node configuration
information (network name, node name, branching) will be inherited.
9-6
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-2
Diagnosing Network Status
Network Status Diagnosis Example
The following window shows the results of an example network status diagnosis.
Network Configuration on CX-Integrator
Network Status Diagnosis Results
Data link is stopped.
An error has occurred at node 4.
(The background is red.)
The Units from the Repeater Unit
onwards do not exist in the network.
There may be a disconnection.
The error contents are
displayed here. Doubleclick to display details.
•
In the network status list, T-branches that are input offline are displayed as
Repeater Units. Main lines and branch lines can be distinguished, and line
disconnections in front of Repeater Units can be easily determined.
Up to two hierarchies are supported by CLK Repeater Units. If three or more
T-branch hierarchies are entered, the following message will be displayed and
operation will stop.
9-7
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-2
Diagnosing Network Status
Correct the network so that there are no more than two hierarchies using
T-branches, and then restart the Diagnostic Tool. For details, refer to the Controller
Link Repeater Unit Operation Manual.
• The background of the node icon will be displayed in red when there are errors in a
Controller Link Unit or CPU Unit.
• Information on errors at nodes will be displayed in the diagnosis results area.
• Errors shown in the diagnosis results area can be double-clicked to display details on
the error. (Details on the error can also be displayed by double-clicking node icons
with red backgrounds.)
Note
Errors shown in the diagnosis results area can be double-clicked to display details on
the error. When this is done, the contents of the Auxiliary Area or AR and SR Areas
are automatically read from the CPU Unit and stored in a file. The file is stored as
required in a log file in the folder where the CX-Integrator is installed. The file is in CSV
(text) format.
File names consist of the node address and the time from the PLC.
PLC model
CS Series
CJ Series
CVM1/CV Series
C200HX/HG/HE
CQM1H Series
Computers (or NS-series
Programmable Terminals,
Open Network Controllers,
etc.)
Read area
Auxiliary Area, A000 to A959
Auxiliary Area, A000 to A959
Auxiliary Area, A000 to A511
AR Area, AR 00 to AR 27
SR Area, SR 236 to SR 289
AR Area, AR 00 to AR 27
SR Area, SR 190 to SR 243
Cannot be read.
The Auxiliary Area and AR/SR Areas contain details on error status, the time when the
power was turned ON to the PLC, etc. This file can be used later for analysis.
9-8
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-2
Diagnosing Network Status
Node Icons
Node icon
Node address
Indicates participation
in data links.
Indicates terminating
resistance.
Name that is specified in the
node file
Displayed Icons
The icon that is displayed depends on the model of the PLC, as shown below.
Node icon
Model
CS Series
CJ Series
CVM1/CV Series
C200HX/HG/HE
CQM1H Series
Computers (or NS-series Programmable
Terminals, Open Network Controllers, etc.)
Note
A computer will be displayed when a Controller Link node is a Controller Link Support
Board.
will be displayed when the PLC model cannot be determined (e.g., for NS-series
Programmable Terminals, Open Network Controllers, etc.)
9-9
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-2
Diagnosing Network Status
Node Icon Background Colors
The background color of a node icon will change depending on the status of the
Controller Link Unit/Board. The meanings of these colors are described in the
following table.
Node icon
Background
color
Green
Note
Meaning
The node is participating in the network and no errors have
occurred in the Controller Link Unit or CPU Unit.
Red
The node is participating in the network but an error has
occurred in the Controller Link Unit or CPU Unit.
Gray
The node is registered in the node file but is not participating in
the network.
Blue
The node is not registered in the node file but is participating in
the network.
• With the Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool, the nodes connected to a network
can be registered in a node file. If a node file is selected, the nodes registered in the
file will be compared to the nodes actually participating in the network and differences
will be displayed using the background colors (blue or gray) of the node icons.
•The error status, error log, or unit profile for a Controller Link Unit or CPU Unit can be
displayed from a node icon. Right-click the node icon and select an item from the
popup menu.
•Refer to CPU Unit on page 9-20 for the displays for error status, error logs, and unit
profiles.
Updating the Diagnosis Results Display
Use the following procedure to update the diagnosis results display. This is enabled at
times such as when the terminator settings for the Unit are changed after a network
status diagnosis.
1. Either select View – Update of Node Diagnosis Display or double-click the
Update of Node Diagnosis Display icon.
2. The display will be updated. To execute a network status diagnosis for a different
network, exit the Diagnosis Tool and restart it from the CX-Integrator.
9-10
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-3
9-1-3
Diagnosing Node Settings
Diagnosing Node Settings
Diagnosis Items
The settings of all nodes participating in the specified network are read and the
integrity of the overall network is diagnosed. The results of diagnosis are displayed in
three levels: Error, warning, and information.
Diagnosis item
Integrity of settings in the
DM parameter area
Status of terminating
resistance switches
External power supply
status
Note
Description
The settings in the DM parameter area of the Controller Link Unit are
read and displayed.
The integrity of the overall Controller Link network is checked.
The following DM Area parameter settings are diagnosed.
• Data link mode specifications
• Polling unit/polled unit settings
• Data link startup switches
• CPU Bus Unit system settings
• Transmission path types
initialization specifications
• Routing table enable/disable
(EEPROM clear specification)
specifications
• Designation of 62 nodes for
Wired Units
• Data link status storage formats
The settings of the terminating resistance switches are diagnosed for
Wired Controller Link Units/Boards.
The status of external power supply is diagnosed for Optical-ring
Controller Link Units/Boards.
• Different Units support different settings in the DM parameter area. Check the
Operation Manual for the Unit for details.
For the Controller Link Support Board, the settings are made in the FinsGateway
driver properties. Refer to the Operation Manual for the Support Board for details.
• The status of the terminating resistance cannot be diagnosed for the following
Controller Link Units/Boards. Visually confirm the settings for these Units/Boards.
Item
Units for which the
terminating resistance
cannot be read
Units/Boards
C200HW-CLK21Controller Link Unit (for C200HX/HG/HE PLCs)
CVM1-CLK21 Controller Link Unit (for CVM1/CV-series PLCs)
3G8F5-CLK21 ISA Bus Controller Link Support Board
Diagnosing Node Settings
Select Diagnose – Node Settings from the Main Menu.
9-11
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-3
Diagnosing Node Settings
Node Settings Diagnosis Example
• The settings for each node are displayed in a table.
• The results of diagnosing the integrity of the overall network are displayed at the
bottom. The results of diagnosis are displayed in three levels, as described in the
following table.
Level
Error
Warning
Information
Meaning
Indicates problems in the overall integrity of the network.
Locations causing errors are displayed in red.
Example: The data link mode is set to both user-set links and automatically
set links in the nodes for which the data link startup switch is ON.
Indicates settings that may be appropriate for some applications but which
have a high possibility of being errors (setting mistakes or unset items).
Locations causing warnings are displayed in yellow.
Example: There are no nodes with the data link startup switch set to ON.
Indicates information on items that may be appropriate for some applications.
Example: The Routing Table Enable Bit is ON for C-series PLCs.
• Details will be displayed if the displayed result is double-clicked.
9-12
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-3
Diagnosing Node Settings
• Check the details for all error and warning items in the results of diagnosis. Use the
Programming Devices, such as the CX-Programmer and Data Link Table Setting
Tool, to correct the settings.
• Check all the information items to be sure that the settings are intentional. Use the
Programming Devices, such as the CX-Programmer and Data Link Table Setting
Tool, to correct any settings that are not suitable.
• Select Diagnose – Node Settings from the Main Menu to diagnose the node
settings again.
Note
The status of the terminating resistance cannot be diagnosed for all nodes in networks
containing the following Controller Link Units/Boards. Visually confirm the settings for
these Units/Boards.
Item
Units for which the
terminating resistance
cannot be read
Units/Boards
C200HW-CLK21Controller Link Unit (for C200HX/HG/HE PLCs)
CVM1-CLK21 Controller Link Unit (for CVM1/CV-series PLCs)
3G8F5-CLK21 ISA Bus Controller Link Support Board
CS1W-RPT01/02/03 Repeater Unit
• The Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool cannot determine the order that nodes
are connected in Wired Networks. To enable diagnosis to see if the terminating
resistance is ON only at the ends the network, edit the node file so the nodes appear
in the actual order in which they are physically connected.
Note
•Any items not supported for a particular model will be grayed out on the display.
•If an item cannot be read from a node, the entire line for that node will be grayed out
on the display.
9-13
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-4
Diagnosing Disconnections
9-1-4
Diagnosing Disconnections
Disconnection Diagnosis
All nodes participating in the specified network are displayed in the order they are
physically connected. If the cable has been disconnected, the locations of
disconnections are displayed.
Disconnection diagnosis can be used only for Optical-ring Units/Boards in token ring
mode.
Diagnosis item
Order that nodes are
connected
Network
disconnection status
Disconnection
Counter
Note
Description
Displays nodes in the order that nodes are connected. Connections between
node to communications ports SL and SL2 are displayed.
The network is diagnosed to detect any disconnections. If there are any
disconnections, the locations of them are displayed.
Disconnection counters that measure each Controller Link Unit are
displayed.
• Disconnection diagnosis will not be performed for a network that has not normally
reached ring status after starting the network.
•Disconnection diagnosis will not be performed for an Optical-ring Network in token
bus mode.
•Disconnections cannot be displayed for Wired Networks.
Diagnosing Disconnections
Select Diagnose – Disconnection from the Main Menu, or click the icon.
9-14
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-4
Diagnosing Disconnections
Disconnection Results Example
• Nodes are display in the order they are physically connected in the network.
• The results of disconnection diagnosis are display in the results area.
Any disconnections that are detected are displayed in red.
• Select Diagnose – Disconnection to display the disconnection diagnosis results
again.
Note
The node display for disconnection diagnosis does not display errors that have
occurred at the nodes (i.e., in Controller Link Units and CPU Units). If there are errors,
the following message box will be displayed.
Use the network status diagnosis to diagnose errors at the nodes (i.e., in Controller
Link Units and CPU Units).
9-15
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-4
Diagnosing Disconnections
Disconnection Counters
Disconnection counters, which measure disconnections at each node, can be
displayed by diagnosing disconnections.
Displaying Disconnection Counters
Select Diagnose – Display disconnection counter from the Main Menu.
Disconnection Counter Display
• The disconnection counters that measure disconnections at each node are
displayed.
• The following counter items are displayed.
Item
Time of beginning
disconnection data recording
Number of node/network
separations
Number of network
disconnections
Number of local node
disconnections
Maximum number of
consecutive disconnect cycles
Number of frame drop-outs
(SL1, SL2)
Number of frame brakes
detected (SL1, SL2)
Number of CRC errors
detected (SL1, SL2)
Description
Displays the time that recording disconnection information was
started. This will be the time the power supply was turned ON to
the node, the time the Unit at the node was restarted, or the
time the disconnection counters were cleared.
Displays the number of times the local node was separated from
the network.
Displays the number of disconnections detected on the network.
Displays the number of disconnections detected for the local
node.
Displays the number of communications cycles over which a
disconnection continued. Use this information to determine if a
disconnection was momentary or continuous.
Displays the number of times a data frame received at another
communications port was not received at all at the local
communications port.
Dropouts are counted when the communications line is
completely disconnected.
Displays the number of times only a carrier was detected at the
local communications port for a data frame received at another
communications port.
Brakes are counted when the optical cable is damaged, when
end surface processing is faulty, for contact faults, or whenever
else transmissions are unstable.
Displays the number of CRC errors and Manchester errors.
These errors are counted when the optical cable is damaged,
when end surface processing is faulty, for contact faults, or
whenever else transmissions are unstable.
• Click the Copy Button to copy the data for the disconnection counters to the
clipboard. The data on the clipboard will be in CSV (text) format.
• The data on the clipboard can be pasted to an editor, word processor, or
9-16
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-5
Diagnosing Transmission Status
spreadsheet software.
• To clear the counters, select Diagnose – Clear Disconnection Counter from the
Main Menu.
• The counter information inside the Controller Link Unit/Board at each node will be
cleared and the Time of beginning disconnection data recording will be set to the
time the counters were cleared.
Note
9-1-5
The Time of beginning disconnection data recording is the time that recording
disconnection information was started. This will be the time the power supply was
turned ON to the node, the time the Unit at the node was restarted, or the time the
disconnection counters were cleared.
Diagnosing Transmission Status
Transmission Status Diagnosis
The transmission status counters for all nodes participating in the specified network
can be displayed.
Diagnosing Transmission Status
Select Diagnose – Transmission Status from the Main Menu.
Transmission Status Results Example
• The transmission status counters, which measure transmissions for each node, are
displayed.
• The following counter items are displayed.
Item
Number of CRC
errors
Number of
token re-sends
Number of
token returns
Number of
token timeouts
Number of
polling timeouts
Description
Displays the number of CRC errors. CRC errors are counted for transmission errors, including
those caused by cable faults, contact faults, incorrect terminating resistance settings, etc.
Displays the number of times a failure occurred in passing the token to the next node.
Token resends are counted for transmission errors, including those caused by cable faults,
contact faults, incorrect terminating resistance settings, etc.
Displays the number of times that the token was returned to the polling node because of
continuous failures even when the token was resent.
Token returns are counted for transmission errors, including those caused by cable faults,
contact faults, incorrect terminating resistance settings, etc.
Displays the number of times the token did not return to the local node even after a specified
period of time.
Displays the number of times the local node was not polled even after a specified period of
time.
9-17
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-6
Node Status
Item
Number of
controller
changes
Number of
active node
changes
Description
Displays the number of times that the polling node was changed.
Polling node changes are counted when the power supply is turned OFF to the polling node,
but can also be counted when transmission path errors occur.
Displays the number of times the number of nodes participating in the network increased or
decreased.
Active node changes are also counted when the power supply is turned ON to a node and the
node joins the network. They can also be counted when transmission path errors occur (even
if the power supply is not turned OFF and ON).
• Click the Copy Button to copy the data for the transmission status counters to the
clipboard. The data on the clipboard will be in CSV (text) format. The data on the
clipboard can be pasted to an editor, word processor, or spreadsheet software.
9-1-6
Note
•The values of the transmission status counters are counted from the time the power is
turned ON to a Controller Link Unit/Board or the Unit/Board is reset. The counters will
not count past 255.
•The transmission status counters cannot be cleared directly.
Note
The various transmission status counters cannot be used alone to determine
transmission path errors. Use them as guidelines for checking the transmission status
of the network.
Node Status
Node Status Diagnosis
• Current errors and the error log can be displayed for a specified node (Controller Link
Unit/Board or CPU Unit).
• The model of the specified node (Controller Link Unit/Board or CPU Unit) can also be
displayed.
Controller Link Unit
Displaying Error Status and Error Log
1. Select Node Status – CLK Unit Error Log /Error Status from the Main Menu.
2. A list of the nodes currently participating in the network will be displayed. Select the
node to read and click the OK Button.
9-18
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-6
Node Status
Error Status/Error Log Display Example
• Click the Error Tab to display the current errors.
• Click the Error Log Tab to display a log of errors that occurred in the past.
• Select File – Save to save the error status and error log in a file. The data will be
saved in CSV (text) format.
• Click the Clear All Button to clear the error log from the Controller Link Unit/Board.
9-19
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-6
Node Status
CPU Unit
Displaying Error Status/Error Log
Select Node Status – CPU Unit Error Log/Error Status from the Main Menu.
Error Status/Error Log Display Example
• Click the Error Tab to display the current errors.
• Click the Error Log Tab to display a log of the errors that occurred in the past.
• Click the Clear All Button to clear the error log from the CPU Unit.
9-20
9-1
Controller Link Network Diagnostic Tool
9-1-7
Collecting Error Logs
Displaying Model Numbers
Displaying Model Numbers
Select Node Status – Unit Profile from the Main Menu.
Model Display Example
Click the Copy Button to copy the model number data to the clipboard. The data on
the clipboard will be in CSV (text) format.
9-1-7
Collecting Error Logs
Collecting Error Logs
• The error status and error logs for all nodes on the specified network can be
collected and stored in one file.
• This function enables sending files collected on remote systems as email
attachments for later analysis.
Collect Error Logs
Select Diagnose – Collect All Error Logs from the Main Menu, or click the icon.
The following display will appear while data is being collected.
The data in the file will be in CSV (text) format. The data can be edited using an editor,
word processor, or spreadsheet software.
9-21
9-2
Echoback Test between Nodes
9-2-1
Overview
9-2
Echoback Test between Nodes
9-2-1
Overview
The Internode Echoback Test between PLC Nodes tool is used to execute echoback
tests between specified networks and nodes and the CX-Integrator. Echoback tests
can be executed for Ethernet, Controller Link, SYSMAC LINK, or DeviceNet networks.
A specified data length (unit: bytes) is sent to a specified network and node. The data
is sent back as is (echoback), and the results are compared. If the data agrees, it is
judged a success. If not, it is judged a failure. This allows the communications load
conditions between the computer and specified nodes to be tested.
9-2-2
Start Methods
Either of the following two methods can be used to start an echoback test:
Method 1: While online, open the Online Connection Information Window, right-click
the target PLC or Unit, and select Echoback test between PLC nodes from the
pop-up menu.
Method 2: While online, select Tools - Echoback test between PLC nodes.
9-2-3
PLC Internode Echoback Test Dialog Box
The various items in the PLC Internode Echoback Test Dialog Box are explained
below.
Field
Target
Test
Configuration
Connection
Status
Test Results
9-22
Input
Network
Node
Data Length
Times to
Repeat
Frequency is
not specified
Response
wait time
Network
Node
Model
Elapsed time
Tests run
Contents
Input the network address. Range: 1 to 127.
Input the node address. Range: 1 to 254.
Input the number of bytes of data to be sent between
nodes. Range: 1 to 256.
Input the number of times to repeat the test.
Range: 1 to 255.
Check this item to repeat the tests limitlessly.
Input the time to wait for the echo request packet.
Range: 1 to 30.
Displays the target network address.
Displays the target node address.
Displays the target model.
Displays the online status.
Displays the time elapsed for the test.
Displays the number of times the test has been run.
9-2
9-2-4
Field
Test Results
Input
Success
Failure
Response time
9-2-4
Max (ms)
Min (ms)
Average (ms)
Echoback Test between Nodes
Executing an Echoback Test between Nodes
Contents
Displays the number of test successes. If set for “Frequency
is not specified,” a “-“ is displayed.
Displays the number of test failures. The test is ended when
1,000 failures is reached.
Displays the maximum response time.
Displays the minimum response time.
Displays the average response time. If set for “Frequency is
not specified,” the display shows the average for the last ten
times.
Executing an Echoback Test between Nodes
1. While online, open the Online Connection Information Window, right-click the target
PLC or Unit, and select Echoback test between PLC nodes from the pop-up
menu.
The PLC Internode Echoback Test Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Input (or confirm) the target item, and click the Connect Button.
The connection results will be displayed.
9-23
9-2
Echoback Test between Nodes
9-2-4
Executing an Echoback Test between Nodes
3.
Input (or confirm) the test configuration, and click the Start Button. The test
results and response time will be displayed.
4. To stop testing, click the Stop Button.
9-24
9-3
Ethernet Ping Test
9-3-1
9-3
Ethernet Ping Test
9-3-1
Overview
Overview
By executing a ping command in Ethernet, it is possible to determine whether a
remote PLC is connected to the Ethernet network, and whether its setting as an
Ethernet node (i.e., its IP address) is correct. Ethernet is the only network in which this
test can be executed.
9-3-2
Start Methods
Either of the following two methods can be used to start an Ethernet ping test:
Method 1: While online, open the Online Connection Information Window, right-click
the target Unit, and select Ethernet tool – Ping test from the pop-up menu.
Method 2: While online, select Tools - Ethernet tool – Ping test.
9-3-3
Ping Test Dialog Box
The various items in the Ping Test Dialog Box are explained below.
Input
Target IP address
Node
Response wait
time
Contents
Input the target IP address.
Input the node address. Range: 1 to 254.
Input the time to wait for the echo request packet.
Range: 1 to 30.
Item
Network
Node
Status
Contents
Displays the network address.
Displays the node address.
Displays the test result (success or failure).
9-25
9-3
Ethernet Ping Test
9-3-4
Executing a Ping Test
9-3-4
Executing a Ping Test
1. While online, open the Online Connection Information Window, right-click the target
Unit, and select Ethernet tool – Ping test from the pop-up menu. The Ping Test
Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Input the target IP address, and click the Ping Button.
3. The result will be displayed in the Status field.
9-26
Appendices
A
A-1 CPS File Management
A-1-1 Description of CPS Files
A-1
CPS File Management
This section explains the EDS file management functions of the CX-Integrator
A-1-1
Description of CPS Files
CPS File Overview
CPS is an abbreviation of Component and network Profile Sheet, which contain the
definitions of CS/CJ-series Units and Components required in the CX-One
applications. The definitions are provided in CPS file format (XML file format).
CX-One applications use the information in these CPS files to recognize the
CS/CJ-series Units. The CPS files are also used to create the Special I/O Unit and
CPU Bus Unit settings.
CPS file A
CPS file B
Correspond
ID information
Correspond
Parameter items
Example:
Unit A
Unit model numbers
displayed in I/O table
ID information
Parameter items
Source
data
Unit B
Source
data
Special I/O Unit and CPU Bus Unit settings can
be made with the names in the manuals.
Create
Unit A settings
Create
Unit B settings
Parameter items
Parameter items
Parameter data
Parameter data
CX-One
CPS files contain the following CS/CJ-series Unit and component information.
• ID information (Model number, product name, Unit type, Unit version, etc.)
• Parameter items (Offset address, parameter name, and setting range or selections)
The following diagram shows an example CPS file in XML format.
A-2
A-1 CPS File Management
A-1-1 Description of CPS Files
Installing CPS Files
1. Select Tools – CPS File – Install from the menu bar.
2. The Install CPS files Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the CPS file to install and click the Open Button.
3. The following dialog box will be displayed if the corresponding icon for the specified
Unit/component does not exist in the folder where the CPS file will be installed.
Click the Yes Button to install the icon.
The CPS file will be installed in the following directory:
Program Files\Common Files\Omron\Profiles\CPSFiles
A-3
A-2 EDS File Management
A-2-1 Installing EDS Files
A-2
EDS File Management
This section explains the EDS file management functions of the CX-Integrator.
A-2-1
Installing EDS Files
Tools - EDS File - Install
The CX-Integrator will support new devices if proper EDS files are installed. To install
the EDS file, use the following procedure.
1. Select EDS File and Install.
The following window will be displayed.
The device information will be displayed on the bottom of the window when the
EDS file is selected.
2. Select the EDS file to be installed and click the Open Button.
The EDS file will be added to the Hardware List.
If the EDS file already exists, the new EDS file will overwrite the previous one.
If the EDS files are different to each other in version, the new EDS file will be
added to the Hardware List as shown below.
A-4
A-2 EDS File Management
A-2-2 Creating EDS Files
A-2-2
Creating EDS Files
Tools - EDS File - Create
The EDS files are required by the CX-Integrator to create a network configuration. To
create an EDS file, use the following procedure.
1. Select EDS File and Create.
The following window will be displayed.
2. Set the device information and I/O information.
The device information can be obtained from the device on the network if the
network is online.
3. To read the information, click the Upload from Device Button. The following
window will be displayed.
4. Set the node address of the device and click the OK Button.
For the I/O connections and I/O size of the device, refer to the operation manual of
the device.
5. Click the OK Button.
The device will be added to the Hardware List.
Note
Device parameters cannot be set with the EDS file creation function of the
CX-Integrator. Obtain a proper EDS file from the manufacturer of the device to make
device parameter settings for the device.
A-5
A-2 EDS File Management
A-2-3 Deleting EDS Files
A-2-3
Deleting EDS Files
Tools - EDS File - Delete
To delete the EDS file, use the following procedure.
1. Select the device from the Hardware List.
2. Select EDS File and Delete.
The following confirmation window will be displayed.
3. Click the Yes Button.
The device will be deleted from the Hardware List together with the EDS file.
A-2-4
Saving EDS Files
Tools - EDS File - Save
To save the EDS file, use the following procedure.
1. Select the device from the Hardware List.
2. Select EDS file and Save.
The following window will be displayed to specify the name of the folder where the
EDS file will be saved and the name of the EDS file.
3. Input the folder and file names and click the Save Button The EDS file will be
saved.
A-6
A-2 EDS File Management
A-2-5 Searching EDS Files
A-2-5
Searching EDS Files
Tools - EDS File - Search
To search the device (EDS file) displayed in the Hardware List, use the following
procedure.
1. Select the EDS File and Search.
The following window will be displayed.
2. Input the character string and click the Find Next Button.
The cursor will move to the position of the corresponding device closest to the
present cursor.
3. To quit the search operation, click the Cancel Button.
Note
A-2-6
•The device will be found if it is located below the present cursor position.
•Select Hardware in the Hardware List before using the above procedure to search all
the devices.
Displaying EDS File Properties
Tools - EDS File - Property
To display the properties of the EDS file, use the following procedure.
1. Select the hardware (device) from the Hardware List.
2. Select EDS File and Property.
The following window will be displayed.
The time and date of the creation of the EDS file will be displayed along with
device information on the file.
A-7
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W445-E1-02
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page
numbers refer to the previous version.
Revision code
01
02
Date
Revised content
February 2005 Original production
November 2005 Page xvi: Precautions added.
Page xxi: Revision upgrade table added.
Page 1-4: Information on Ethernet functions added.
Page 1-7: Information on applications changed.
Page 1-8 to 1-11: Changes made to specifications.
Page 1-17: Change made to notes.
Pages 1-20, 21: Information on cables added.
Pages 1-30, 31: Information added on updating the Online
Connection Information Window display.
Page 1-31: Precautions added.
Page 1-34: Note added.
Page 1-37: Information added on updating the Online Connection
Information Window display.
Page 1-38: Information added on setting the IP address table.
Page 1-40: Information added on tools.
Pages 1-43, 44: Information added on popup menus.
Pages 2-11 to 2-13: Information added on connecting online.
Pages 2-19, 20: Information added on setting the IP address table.
Pages 2-23 to 2-25: Information added on uploading network
configurations.
Pages 2-38 to 2-40: Information changed on uploading and
downloading component parameters.
Page 2-44: “Controller Link” corrected to “SYSMAC LINK.”
Pages 2-48, 49: Information added on echoback test.
Page 2-50: Information added on starting specified applications.
Pages 3-6 to 3-8: Information added on creating routing tables.
Page 3-21: Information added on transferring routing tables.
Page 4-33: Information added on SLK files.
Section 5: New information added on Ethernet operations.
Page 8-5: Steps added to procedure for auto-detect function.
Pages 8-10, 11: Information added on transferring screen data.
Pages 9-6 to 9-8: Information added on network diagnostic test.
Page 9-9: Information changed on errors in diagnostic test.
Page 9-11: Information added on updating the diagnosis results
display.
Page 9-14: Information changed on Programming Devices.
Pages 9-23 to 9-25: Information added on echoback test.
Pages 9-26 to 9-27: Information added on Ethernet ping test.
OMRON Corporation
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81)75-344-7109/Fax: (81)75-344-7149
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120 China
Tel: (86)21-5037-2222/Fax: (86)21-5037-2200
Authorized Distributor:
Cat. No. W445-E1-02
This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.
Printed in Japan
">